NEPLAN Users Guide Electrical PDF

NEPLAN
Users Guide
Electrical
Version 5
Busarello + Cott + Partner Inc. ABB Utilities Gmbh

Bahnhofstrasse 40 Kfertalerstrasse 250
CH-8703 Erlenbach D-68167 Mannheim
Switzerland Germany
Phone: +41 1 914 36 66 +49 621 386 27 86

Fax: +41 1 991 19 71 +49 621 386 27 85
E-mail: info@neplan.ch neplan@de.abb.com
Internet: www.neplan.ch www.abb.de/neplan
Contents
Contents
TUTORIAL...............................................................................................................................1
INTRODUCTION ........................................................................................................................1
THE USER INTERFACE..............................................................................................................2
Toolbar ...............................................................................................................................2
Workspace ..........................................................................................................................3
Variant Manager ................................................................................................................3
Symbol Window ..................................................................................................................3
Message Window ................................................................................................................3
THE ONLINE HELP ...................................................................................................................4
DATA ORGANIZATION .............................................................................................................5
THE BASIC ELEMENTS OF NEPLAN........................................................................................6
Nodes ..................................................................................................................................6
Elements..............................................................................................................................7
Protection Devices, Current and Voltage Transformers....................................................7
Station.................................................................................................................................7
Symbol ................................................................................................................................8
Switches ..............................................................................................................................8
Zones and Areas .................................................................................................................8
Partial Networks.................................................................................................................8
STEP 1 CREATE A NEW PROJECT .........................................................................................10
STEP 2 ENTER A SMALL NETWORK......................................................................................12
Input data..........................................................................................................................12
Enter the network..............................................................................................................14
Test your network .............................................................................................................20
STEP 3 INSERT HEADER, SAVE, PRINT, EXIT ......................................................................23
Insert Header ....................................................................................................................23
Save the network ...............................................................................................................25
Print the diagram..............................................................................................................26
Close and open projects ...................................................................................................27
STEP 4 USE OF DIAGRAMS, LAYERS, AREAS AND ZONES ...................................................29
Use of Diagrams ...............................................................................................................29
Use of graphic layers........................................................................................................34
Define and assign Areas and Zones .................................................................................39
STEP 5 CREATE AND USE LIBRARIES ...................................................................................47
Create a new Library........................................................................................................47
Import data from a library................................................................................................51
Update your network data with a library type .................................................................52
Export data to a library ....................................................................................................53
STEP 6 DEFINE VARIANTS ...................................................................................................56
Insert new Subvariants .....................................................................................................57
Save modifications to the variants....................................................................................60
Create and assign a Topology Data File..........................................................................63
Create and assign a Load Data File ................................................................................66
NEPLAN User's Guide V5 0-2
Contents
LOAD FLOW CALCULATION ...................................................................................................69

SHORT CIRCUIT CALCULATION..............................................................................................77
TRANSIENT STABILITY ANALYSIS .........................................................................................85
INTERFACES TO NEPLAN ...................................................................................................107
TIPS FROM THE PRACTICE ....................................................................................................109
Asymmetrical Network Structure....................................................................................109
Load Flow.......................................................................................................................109
MENU OPTIONS .....................................................................................................................1
FILE .........................................................................................................................................1
New .....................................................................................................................................1
Open ...................................................................................................................................1
Close ...................................................................................................................................1
Save.....................................................................................................................................1
Save As ...............................................................................................................................2
Print ... ................................................................................................................................2
Print Preview ... ..................................................................................................................2
Print Setup ... ......................................................................................................................2
Page Setup ... ......................................................................................................................2
Print on One Page ... ..........................................................................................................2
Import ... .............................................................................................................................2
Export ... .............................................................................................................................3
Exit......................................................................................................................................3
INSERT .....................................................................................................................................4
Edit Options........................................................................................................................4
Elements..............................................................................................................................5
AC-Line and Bus.................................................................................................................5
DC and Asym. Line/Bus......................................................................................................6
Nested Block .......................................................................................................................7
Link .....................................................................................................................................7
Map.....................................................................................................................................7
Calibration Symbol.............................................................................................................7
Header ................................................................................................................................8
Color Legend ......................................................................................................................8
Line Legend ........................................................................................................................8
Control Circuit ...................................................................................................................8
Function Block Menu..........................................................................................................9
EDIT.......................................................................................................................................10
Undo .................................................................................................................................10
Redo ..................................................................................................................................10
Cut ....................................................................................................................................10
Copy..................................................................................................................................10
Paste .................................................................................................................................10
Delete................................................................................................................................10
Data ..................................................................................................................................11
Graphics ...........................................................................................................................14
Search ...............................................................................................................................15
Statistics............................................................................................................................16
Diagram Properties ..........................................................................................................16
Variant Properties ............................................................................................................26
VIEW .....................................................................................................................................27

Contents
Redraw..............................................................................................................................27
Variant Manager ..............................................................................................................27
Message Window ..............................................................................................................27
Symbol Window ................................................................................................................27
Ruler .................................................................................................................................27
Page Bounds .....................................................................................................................27
Grid...................................................................................................................................27
Snap to Grid......................................................................................................................28
Snape to Angle ..................................................................................................................28
Grid Properties.................................................................................................................28
Zoom Normal....................................................................................................................28
Zoom Percent....................................................................................................................28
Zoom Custom....................................................................................................................28
Zoom to Fit .......................................................................................................................28
Show Full Screen ..............................................................................................................29
ANALYSIS ..............................................................................................................................30
Calculation .......................................................................................................................30
Partial Network ................................................................................................................30
Parameter .........................................................................................................................31
Results...............................................................................................................................31
LIBRARIES .............................................................................................................................32
Libraries ...........................................................................................................................32
Symbol Library .................................................................................................................32
Set Active Library .............................................................................................................32
Copy to Diagram Library .................................................................................................32
Past from Diagram Library..............................................................................................32
Edit Diagram Library.......................................................................................................32
Import Old CCT Library...................................................................................................33
OPTIONS ................................................................................................................................34
Header ..............................................................................................................................34
Project Description...........................................................................................................34
Measurement and Size ......................................................................................................34
Calibrate...........................................................................................................................34
Insert Calibration Symbol ................................................................................................34
Make Backup ....................................................................................................................35
License ..............................................................................................................................35
WINDOW................................................................................................................................36
New Window .....................................................................................................................36
Cascade ............................................................................................................................36
Tile ....................................................................................................................................36
Arrange Icons ...................................................................................................................36
HELP ......................................................................................................................................37
Help Topics.......................................................................................................................37
About Neplan ....................................................................................................................37
VARIANT MANAGER ..............................................................................................................38
Variants ............................................................................................................................38
Diagrams ..........................................................................................................................38
All Elements ......................................................................................................................38
Elements............................................................................................................................39
TOOLBAR ...............................................................................................................................40
MOUSE BUTTONS ..................................................................................................................41

Contents
Left Mouse Button.............................................................................................................41

Right Mouse Button ..........................................................................................................41
ELEMENT DATA INPUT AND MODELS ..........................................................................1
DATA INPUT DIALOGS OF NETWORK ELEMENTS .....................................................................1
Classification of Data in the Data Input Dialog ................................................................1
Element - Info .....................................................................................................................2
Element - Reliability ...........................................................................................................3
Element - User Data ...........................................................................................................3
Element - More................................................................................................................4
STATION ..................................................................................................................................7
NODE .......................................................................................................................................9
DC NODE ..............................................................................................................................11
LINE.......................................................................................................................................12
ASYMMETRICAL LINE ............................................................................................................20
DC LINE ................................................................................................................................26
LINE-COUPLING .....................................................................................................................28
PYLON ...................................................................................................................................33
COUPLER ...............................................................................................................................34
REACTOR ...............................................................................................................................36
TRANSFORMER ......................................................................................................................38
ASYMMETRICAL TRANSFORMER............................................................................................51
THREE WINDINGS TRANSFORMER .........................................................................................55
FOUR WINDINGS TRANSFORMER ...........................................................................................62
SHUNT ...................................................................................................................................66
CONVERTER ...........................................................................................................................70
SVC (CONTROLLED STATIC VAR COMPENSATOR)...............................................................78
STATCOM (STATIC COMPENSATOR) ...................................................................................82
TCSC ....................................................................................................................................85
UPFC ....................................................................................................................................89
NETWORK FEEDER.................................................................................................................92
SYNCHRONOUS MACHINE ......................................................................................................95
ASYNCHRONOUS MACHINE .................................................................................................116
PS-BLOCK ...........................................................................................................................130
LOAD ...................................................................................................................................134
DC LOAD ............................................................................................................................144
LINE LOAD ..........................................................................................................................146
USER DEFINED SCALING FACTORS ......................................................................................151
FILTER .................................................................................................................................155
SERIE-R-L-C (WITHOUT EARTH CONNECTION) ...................................................................160
PARALLEL-RLC ..................................................................................................................163
SERIE-E-RLC (WITH EARTH CONNECTION) ........................................................................166
DISCONNECT-SWITCH ..........................................................................................................169
LOAD-SWITCH .....................................................................................................................171
CIRCUITBREAKER ................................................................................................................173
FUSE ....................................................................................................................................175
OVERCURRENT RELAY ........................................................................................................176
DISTANCE RELAY ................................................................................................................178
FREQUENCY RELAY .............................................................................................................179
VOLTAGE RELAY .................................................................................................................180
POWER RELAY .....................................................................................................................181

Contents
CURRENT TRANSFORMER ....................................................................................................182

VOLTAGE TRANSFORMER ....................................................................................................183
HARMONIC CURRENT SOURCE.............................................................................................184
HARMONIC VOLTAGE SOURCE ............................................................................................185
SERIES EQUIVALENT LF ......................................................................................................186
SERIES EQUIVALENT SC ......................................................................................................188
SHUNT EQUIVALENT LF ......................................................................................................190
SHUNT EQUIVALENT SC ......................................................................................................192
EARTH SWITCH ....................................................................................................................194
SURGE ARRESTER ................................................................................................................195
MEASUREMENT DEVICE ......................................................................................................196
CONTROL CIRCUIT CCT ......................................................................................................198
FUNCTION BLOCKS ..............................................................................................................200
LOAD FLOW ...........................................................................................................................1
CALCULATION PARAMETERS (LF)...........................................................................................1
RESULTS (LF)..........................................................................................................................6
Select Results ......................................................................................................................6
Show Results .......................................................................................................................6
THEORY OF LOAD FLOW CALCULATION ................................................................................10
VOLTAGE DROP CALCULATION .............................................................................................16
REFERENCE VOLTAGES ..........................................................................................................18
DESCRIPTION OF THE RESULTS ..............................................................................................18
CONTINGENCY (OUTAGE) ANALYSIS ....................................................................................19
CALCULATION WITH DISTRIBUTED SLACK ............................................................................19
CALCULATION WITH LOAD BALANCE ....................................................................................19
AREA/ZONE CONTROL (LF)...................................................................................................20
Wheeling not allowed (option disabled)...........................................................................22
Wheeling allowed (option enabled)..................................................................................24
ASYMMETRICAL LOAD FLOW ................................................................................................26
LOAD FLOW WITH LOAD PROFILES ........................................................................................28
Calculation Parameters....................................................................................................28
Results...............................................................................................................................29
Theory...............................................................................................................................31
OPTIMAL POWER FLOW (OPF, TRANSMISSION) .......................................................1
CALCULATION PARAMETERS (OPF) ........................................................................................1
RESULTS (OPF) .......................................................................................................................7
Select Results ......................................................................................................................7
Show Results .......................................................................................................................7
DESCRIPTION OF THE PROGRAM ..........................................................................11
OBJECTIVE FUNCTION ...........................................................................................................12
RUNNING THE OPF PROGRAM ...............................................................................................13
SHORT CIRCUIT....................................................................................................................1
CALCULATION PARAMETERS (SC)...........................................................................................1
Parameter ...........................................................................................................................1
Faulted nodes .....................................................................................................................3
Faulted lines .......................................................................................................................5
Special fault ........................................................................................................................5
RESULTS (SC)..........................................................................................................................9

Contents
Show Results .......................................................................................................................9

THEORY OF SHORT CIRCUIT CALCULATION...........................................................................15
A Comparison of the Methods:.........................................................................................17
Network Type IEC ............................................................................................................18
The Initial Short Circuit Current Ik" ................................................................................20
The Initial Short Circuit Power Sk"..................................................................................20
The Peak Short Circuit Current Ip ...................................................................................20
The Short Circuit Breaking Current Ib.............................................................................21
The Steady State Current Ik..............................................................................................22
The Thermal Short Circuit Current Ith.............................................................................23
The D.C. Component of Short Circuit Current iDC.........................................................23
The Asymmetrical Breaking Current Iasy ........................................................................23
The ANSI/IEEE-currents ..................................................................................................24
The symmetrical 0.5 cycles current ..................................................................................24
The asymmetrical 0.5 cycle current..................................................................................24
The symmetrical interrupting current (x cycles current)..................................................24
The symmetrical steady state (30 cycles) current.............................................................25
ANSI Standard C37.013 ...................................................................................................25
CALCULATION OF PARTIAL NETWORKS (SC) ........................................................................27
SELECTIVITY ANALYSIS....................................................................................................1
THE SELECTIVITY MODULE ......................................................................................................1
Installation..........................................................................................................................1
Functions of the independent E_SelModul.exe module......................................................1
Functions of the interactive graphic E_E32.exe ................................................................2
GENERAL .................................................................................................................................3
The menus and icons...........................................................................................................3
The list of elements .............................................................................................................3
System parameters ..............................................................................................................4
Project information.............................................................................................................4
INTEGRATION IN THE INTERACTIVE GRAPHIC ...........................................................................5
General ...............................................................................................................................5
Editing of protection device data........................................................................................5
Protection device response.................................................................................................7
Creating selectivity diagrams .............................................................................................7
Editing selectivity diagrams ...............................................................................................9
Parameters..........................................................................................................................9
THE CURRENT-TIME DIAGRAMS .............................................................................................10
General .............................................................................................................................10
Diagram properties ..........................................................................................................10
Saving the diagram or copying to the clipboard ..............................................................12
THE CHARACTERISTIC EDITOR ...............................................................................................13
The dialog window............................................................................................................13
Graphical input and editing of characteristics.................................................................14
Numerical input of characteristic points ..........................................................................15
Specifying standard characteristics..................................................................................15
Creating tolerance characteristics ...................................................................................16
THE MODULE EDITOR .............................................................................................................17
Editing of protection modules...........................................................................................17
Characteristics..................................................................................................................18
Coding of the setting ranges .............................................................................................22

Contents
Tolerances ........................................................................................................................22
Setup of protection modules .............................................................................................23
THE DEVICE EDITOR ...............................................................................................................25
General .............................................................................................................................25
Adding new protection devices, wizards...........................................................................25
Editing of protection devices ............................................................................................26
THE DIAGRAM EDITOR ...........................................................................................................35
The selectivity diagram dialog window ............................................................................35
Editing selectivity diagrams .............................................................................................36
DOCUMENTATION, PRINT OUTPUT .........................................................................................38
General .............................................................................................................................38
Library data......................................................................................................................39
Protection device setting tables and selectivity diagrams................................................39
DISTANCE PROTECTION....................................................................................................1
OVERVIEW ...............................................................................................................................1
MENU OPTIONS FOR RELAYS ...................................................................................................2
STARTER ..................................................................................................................................4
Overcurrent ........................................................................................................................4
Under Impedance ...............................................................................................................4
Starter Characteristic L-L ..................................................................................................6
Earth Faults Detection .......................................................................................................8
Starter Characteristic L-E ..................................................................................................9
TRIPPING ...............................................................................................................................10
Impedance Stages for User Defined Relay .......................................................................10
Tripping Characteristic L-L .............................................................................................11
Tripping Characteristic L-E .............................................................................................11
Setting Parameters for Predefined Relays........................................................................11
ABB REL316.....................................................................................................................12
Siemens 7SA511, 7SA513 .................................................................................................13
AEG PD531, PD551, SD36..............................................................................................14
Back-up Protection ...........................................................................................................15
Automatic Impedance Setting ...........................................................................................16
TRIPPING TIME ......................................................................................................................19
Input..................................................................................................................................19
Automatic Time Setting.....................................................................................................19
VIEW .....................................................................................................................................20
Starter ...............................................................................................................................20
Tripping ............................................................................................................................20
Tripping Schedule.............................................................................................................21
Network Impedances (Impedance Path)...........................................................................22
Dimensions .......................................................................................................................22
PARAMETER (DP) ..................................................................................................................24
Global Parameter (DP) ....................................................................................................24
Relay-Specific Parameters ...............................................................................................26
TRIPPING SCHEDULES ............................................................................................................27
Build-up ............................................................................................................................27
Edit....................................................................................................................................27
Scrolling forward/backward.............................................................................................28
PROCEDURE FOR ENTERING A RELAY ....................................................................................29
RELAY DOCUMENTATION ......................................................................................................30

Contents
CHECKING THE RELAY SETTINGS ..........................................................................................33

Fault Locations.................................................................................................................33
Line Faults........................................................................................................................33
Evaluation According to Fault Locations ........................................................................33
Evaluation According to Relay Location..........................................................................36
HARMONIC ANALYSIS........................................................................................................1
CALCULATION PARAMETERS (HA)..........................................................................................1
THEORY OF HARMONIC AND AUDIO FREQUENCY ANALYSIS ...................................................3
RESULTS (HA).......................................................................................................................11
Select Results ....................................................................................................................11
Results Table.....................................................................................................................11
Graphical Results .............................................................................................................13
MOTOR STARTING...............................................................................................................1
CALCULATION PARAMETERS (MS)..........................................................................................1
THEORY OF MOTOR STARTING CALCULATION ........................................................................2
Voltage Drop ......................................................................................................................4
RESULTS (MS).........................................................................................................................5
Select Results ......................................................................................................................5
Results tables ......................................................................................................................5
Graphical Results ...............................................................................................................5
NETWORK REDUCTION .....................................................................................................1
INTRODUCTION ........................................................................................................................1
SELECTION OF THE NETWORK TO BE REDUCED .......................................................................1
NETWORK REDUCTION FOR LOAD FLOW .................................................................................2
NETWORK REDUCTION FOR SHORT CIRCUIT............................................................................2
VOLTAGE STABILITY .........................................................................................................1
CALCULATION PARAMETERS ...................................................................................................1
Sensitivity Analysis / Modal Analysis .................................................................................1
U-Q Curves.........................................................................................................................2
P-U Curves .........................................................................................................................2
Result Files .........................................................................................................................3
RESULTS ..................................................................................................................................4
Result Tables.......................................................................................................................5
THEORY ...................................................................................................................................6
Introduction ........................................................................................................................6
U-Q Sensitivity Analysis .....................................................................................................6
Q-U Modal Analysis ...........................................................................................................7
U-Q Curves.........................................................................................................................8
P-U Curves .........................................................................................................................9
SMALL SIGNAL STABILITY...............................................................................................1
CALCULATION PARAMETERS ...................................................................................................1
Calculation .........................................................................................................................1
Result Files .........................................................................................................................1
RESULTS ..................................................................................................................................2
Result Tables.......................................................................................................................3

Contents
THEORY ...................................................................................................................................4
TRANSIENT STABILITY ......................................................................................................1
GENERAL REMARKS ................................................................................................................1
Simulation method ..............................................................................................................1
TERMS AND DEFINITIONS, PER-UNIT SYSTEM .........................................................................4
Terms and Definitions ........................................................................................................4
Per-Unit System ..................................................................................................................4
NETWORK ELEMENTS ..............................................................................................................7
Controlled Admittance........................................................................................................7
Simulation...........................................................................................................................9
Maximum-minimum relays ...............................................................................................10
Distance protection...........................................................................................................11
Pole slip protection...........................................................................................................15
Overcurrent protection .....................................................................................................17
PROGRAM CONTROL ..............................................................................................................21
Simulation run and table output .......................................................................................21
Simulation parameters......................................................................................................22
SYMBOL LIBRARY ...............................................................................................................1
OVERVIEW ...............................................................................................................................1
BASIC CONCEPTS .....................................................................................................................1
Symbols of Network Elements.............................................................................................1
Symbols of Protection Devices and Switches .....................................................................2
Symbols for "General Elements" ........................................................................................2
Disconnection Symbol and Flow Indicator ........................................................................2
Drawing Symbols................................................................................................................3
MOUSE BUTTONS ....................................................................................................................3
Select Mode.........................................................................................................................3
Drawing Mode....................................................................................................................3
Double-Click.......................................................................................................................3
GRAPHICAL ELEMENTS ............................................................................................................4
Line Width (Symbol Library)..............................................................................................4
REFERENCES .........................................................................................................................1
ADDITIONAL REFERENCES .......................................................................................................1
APPENDIX............................................................................................................................527
THE STRUCTURE OF THE IMPORT-/EXPORT-FILES ...............................................................527
EDT-File.........................................................................................................................527
NDT-File.........................................................................................................................533
Measurement Data / Load Factor Files .........................................................................535
Harmonic limit file..........................................................................................................536

Contents

Tutorial
Tutorial
Introduction
NEPLAN is a very user friendly planning and information system for electrical-,
gas- and water-networks. All menu options and calculation modules are described
in details in the following chapters.
To get to know NEPLAN in a quick and easy way, we recommend you to follow
this tutorial.
The program will be explained by examples and we show how to start a new
project and how to build a small power system. That means, that the user will
learn how to enter the elements graphically, how to enter data, how to use
libraries, how to run calculations and how to present the results in a manner
adapted to the objectives of the analysis.
As mentioned, the Tutorial is a first step to get used to the NEPLAN software. For
details about models of elements, data input or calculation inputs, please consult
the respective chapters of the User's Guide or use the context sensitive Online
Help.

Tutorial
The User Interface
1
2
3
6
5
Fig. 1.1 Window features in the user interface
The numbers indicate the following window features:

1. Titlebar 5. Variant Manager
2. Menu option bar 6. Symbol Window
3. Toolbar 7. Message Window
4. Workspace with diagrams and data tables 8. Status bar
Toolbar
All command buttons are equipped with balloon help texts, which pop up when the
cursor is held still at the button for a moment without pressing any keys.
Many commands, which can be accessed in the Toolbar, may be found as well in
the respective menus. Others, mainly the graphical commands can only be
accessed in the Toolbar.
1-2 NEPLAN User's Guide V5

Tutorial
Workspace
In the Workspace the different diagrams can be opened. The same diagrams may
be used for entering the network, building control circuits or sketching drawings.
Variant Manager
The Variant Manager gives a good overview of the open projects and variants.
New projects and variants may be managed, what means that they can be
deleted, added, activated or deactivated.
From the Variant Manager, the user can switch to the Diagram Manager, which
administrates the open Diagrams with its graphic layers.
Symbol Window
The Symbol Window contains all element symbols available. Apart from the
standard symbol for some elements there exist other symbols with a different
graphical appearance but exactly the same characteristics.
New symbols also can be created or existing symbols may be modified with the
Symbol Library.
Message Window
The message window is the channel to communicate with the user. It supplies
information about the executed processes, error messages and further
information.

Tutorial
The Online Help
Fig. 1.2 How to call the Online Help
The figure above shows how to call the Online Help. With button 1) a context
sensitive help is called, what means, that after pressing this button, the user may
click on the feature or dialog for which he needs more information.
Selecting the Help Topics in the menu Help or pressing F1, the user can get more
information with a topic or with an index search.

Tutorial
Data Organization
Fig. 1.3 Data Organization of NEPLAN
The figure above shows the data organization of NEPLAN. The NEPLAN directory
contains the following folders:
Bin: contains executable and control files

Dat: contains Examples and NEPLAN projects
Hardlock: contains the executable file for the Hardlock driver
HTML Help: contains the HTML Help files
Lib: contains NEPLAN Libraries
Manuals: contains the manuals as pdf files
Ramses: contains files of the module Ramses
temp: contains temporary files
user: contains User files and projects
During the installation process, an entry in the operational system registry will be
made by NEPLAN. It's the information about where the program can find the
different folders to save and read data.

Tutorial
The Basic Elements of NEPLAN
To understand the NEPLAN environment, it is essential that certain concepts

used in the system are described:
Station
Node Node
Node
Network Feeder Disconnect,

Load Switch
Load
Logical Switches
Fig. 1.4 One line diagram with network components
An electrical power system consists of nodes and elements.
Nodes
A node is the connection point of two elements or a location, where electrical
energy will be produced or consumed (generator, load). A node is described by its
Name,
nominal system voltage in kV,
zone and area,
type of node (main bus bar, bus bar, sleeve, special node),
description,
The nominal system voltage Un is the line-to-line voltage, for which a power
system is designated and on which several characteristics of the power system
has been referred. In NEPLAN the nominal system voltage of the nodes must be
entered during the node data input. Every voltage is given as a line-to-line voltage
(delta voltage).
It is not necessary to past a node in between all elements. They may also be
connected directly with a link. In this case no node results will be presented and
not more than two elements can be connected together in the same point.

Tutorial
Elements
An element corresponds to a network component, like e.g. line, transformer or
electrical machine. There are active elements and passive elements. An element
is described topological by a starting and an ending node. For three windings
transformers a third node must be given. The elements will be described electrical
by
the rated current, rated power and rated voltage and
its parameters, such as losses, reactances, ...
In NEPLAN these parameters are entered with input dialogs.
The active elements are network feeders, asynchronous machines, synchronous

machines and power station units. A network feeder represents a neighboring
network.
The passive elements are lines, couplings, switches, reactors, two and three
windings transformers, shunts and loads. The loads can also be entered along a
line without entering nodes (line loads).
Modeling of Active Elements

For a short circuit calculation the active elements are modeled with the help of
their subtransient reactance.
For a load flow calculation these elements will be represented by resistive and
reactive powers (PQ-nodes) or by voltage magnitude and angle (slack nodes) at
the node. The network feeder usually will be modeled as a slack node.
Protection Devices, Current and Voltage Transformers

Protection devices (overcurrent relays, distance protection relays, circuit breakers)
and current or voltage transformers are associated with the built-in node and the
switching element. They have no influence on the load flow and short circuit
calculation. Only their limits are checked during the calculation. These elements
are used in the relay coordination modules.
Station
A station can contain several nodes and has no meaning for the calculations or
for protection device coordination. It will only be used in relation to the database.

Tutorial
Symbol
For each element type there are different symbols in the Symbol Window. Choose
the one you want to past in the diagram. A Symbol Library is included in the
NEPLAN package, where user defined symbols may be created.
Switches
In NEPLAN the switches are used to change the network topology (switching
on/off elements). There are two different types of switches:
physical switch and
logical switch.
Physical switches are couplings, circuit breakers and disconnect or load switches.
Logical switches are fictive switches, which are assigned to all elements by the
system. A line, for example, has two logical switches, one at the starting and one
at the ending node. A physical switch has no logical switch, because it will already
be switchable.
During the input of a network, the physical switches can be neglected, because
switching can be done with the help of the logical switches. This has a disad-
vantage, when a line leads to a double bus bar system. Switching from one bus
bar to an other, the user has to change the starting or the ending node of the line.
If the user enters two disconnect switches (one to each bus bar) with an additional
node in between, the switching can be done with the disconnect switches. The
physical switches can be reduced during the calculation (see the Parameters
dialog of the respective calculation modules).
Zones and Areas

Zones and areas are network groups, which may be defined. This means, that
every element and node belongs to a zone and to an area. An area normally
includes one or more zones. For load flow calculation it's possible to define
transactions between zones and between areas.
Each zone and area may be presented in a different color.
In Step 4 - E it will be explained how to define zones and areas.
Partial Networks
Unlike zones and areas, a partial network is an independent network. A partial
network has no connections to any other networks. You can make partial
networks by opening logical or physical switches. It is possible to color each
partial network differently (see below).

Tutorial
Station
Partial network 1
Node Node Node
Network feeder Disconnect,

Load switch
Line
logical switch "open"

Partial network 2
Fig. 1.2 Partial networks

Tutorial
Step 1 Create a new project
To create a new project, after having started the program, click on the menu "File
New".
1. Enter the location or directory for saving the project. Pressing the button
"", you can choose the directory.
2. Enter the project name.
3. Choose the network type: Electric, Water or Gas.
4. If you wish, you may enter a project description.
5. Choose the diagram size and the page orientation.
6. Press the OK button.
Fig. 1.5 Create a new project
The figure below shows the user interface after having created the new project.
a. The titlebar shows the name of the active project.
b. One diagram is open for the rootnet.
c. The variant manager shows the project tree, which consists at the moment
of only one rootnet.

Tutorial
b
c
Fig. 1.6 After creating a new project

Tutorial
Step 2 Enter a small network
In this step, you'll enter nodes and elements to build a small electrical network.
The Symbol window allows you to choose the desired element symbol in an easy
way.
You can start entering any element you want. It is not necessary to enter first the
nodes, because the new philosophy of NEPLAN is to first enter the elements and
nodes independently in the diagram, and then to connect them with a link. Only
lines can't be entered independently. They need connection points, which are
nodes or other elements.
It's not necessary to enter a node between all elements, because the elements
can be interconnected directly with a link. However, if the user wants to see the
node results, he has to enter the node graphically.
Input data
We will draw the following network:
Fig. 1.7 Network to be entered in NEPLAN
The necessary parameters are all listed in the following tables.

Tutorial
Network Feeder:
Name Sk''max Ik''max R(1)/X(1) Z(0)/Z(1) C1 Sk''min Ik''min R(1)/X(1) Z(0)/Z(1) LF- U oper Uw oper Poper Qoper
- MVA kA max max uF MVA kA min min Type % Deg MW Mvar
NETZ 1500 3.936 0.1 1.667 0 1500 3.936 0 0 SL 100 0 0 0
Lines:
Name Length Numb Units R(1) X(1) C(1) G(1) R(0) X(0) C(0) Ir min Ir max Red. fact. Q mm2
km Ohm/.. Ohm/.. uF/... uS/... Ohm/.. Ohm/.. uF/... A A mm2
LEIT. 1 1.16 1 Ohm/km 0.103 0.403 0.009 0 0.150 1.400 0.005 0 90 1 0
LIN 2- 4 1.16 1 Ohm/km 0.103 0.403 0.009 0 0.140 1.499 0.005 0 90 1 0
LIN 2- 3 0.59 1 Ohm/km 0.103 0.403 0.009 0 0.140 1.599 0.005 0 70 1 0
LIN 4- 8 0.20 1 Ohm/km 0.113 0.410 0.009 0 0.150 1.599 0.004 0 100 1 0
LIN 3- 8 0.37 1 Ohm/km 0.113 0.413 0.009 0 0.153 1.619 0.004 0 75 1 0
LIN 3- 9 0.16 1 Ohm/km 0.113 0.413 0.009 0 0.154 1.639 0.004 0 60 1 0
LIN 7- 6 1.61 1 Ohm/km 0.066 0.382 0.010 0 0.085 1.459 0.004 0 400 1 0
LIN 5- 2 7.80 1 Ohm/km 0.091 0.415 0.009 0 0.130 1.659 0.004 0 200 1 0
LIN 5- 6 11.90 1 Ohm/km 0.141 0.413 0.009 0 0.160 1.649 0.004 0 190 1 0
LIN 8- 7 19.10 1 Ohm/km 0.112 0.400 0.009 0 0.144 1.587 0.005 0 200 1 0
Loads:
Name LF Type P Q Domestic Units Units
V_ZWOELF PQ 5 4 0 HV
V1 PQ 2 2 0 HV
Synchronous Machines:
Name Sr Ur pUr cosphi xd sat xd' sat xd'' sat x(2) x(0) Ufmax/ur Ikk
- MVA kV % - % % % % % - kA
GEN 1 45 8.5 0 0.85 160 0 20 20 20 2 0
Name mue RG Turbo Amort. Winding Unit Geneator Motor LF-Type P oper Q oper
- - Ohm - - - - - MW Mvar
GEN 1 0 0 1 1 1 0 PQ 40 10
Transformers:
Name From To Vector Unit Comp. Sr Ur1 Ur2 ukr(1) uRr(1) ukr(0) uRr(0)
Node Node Group Transf. Winding MVA kV kV % % % %
TRA8 -12 EIGHT TWELVE YD,05 0 0 60 65 16 10 0 10 0
TRA6 -13 SIX THIRTEEN YD,05 0 0 140 65 8.5 10 0 10 0
TRA8 -11 EIGHT ELEVEN YD,05 0 0 12 65 5.2 10 0 10 0
TRA9 -10 NINE TEN YD,05 0 0 6 65 5.2 8.46 0 8.46 0
TRA1-2 ONE TWO YY,00 0 0 200 220 65 9 0 9 0
Name I0 Pfe U01(0) U02(0) Earthing RE1 XE1 ZE1 active Earthing RE2 XE2 ZE2 active
% kW % % primary Ohm Ohm % secondary Ohm Ohm %

Tutorial
TRA8 -12 0 0 0 0 impedance 0.1 0 100 impedance 6 0 100

TRA6 -13 0 0 0 0 direct 0 0 100 direct 0 0 100
TRA1-2 0 0 0 0 direct 0 0 100 impedance 1 35 100
Name On-load Tap side Controlled Tap act Tap min Tapr Tap max Delta U Beta U Uset Pset Sr min Sr max
Tapchanger bus % % % MVA MVA
TRA8 -12 0 Primary Primary 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 60 60
TRA6 -13 0 Primary Secondary 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 140 140
TRA8 -11 0 Secondary Primary 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 12 12
TRA9 -10 0 Secondary Primary 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 6 6
TRA1-2 1 Primary Secondary 0 -10 0 10 2 0 100 0 200 200
Asynchronous Machines:
Name From Pr Sr Ur Ir cosphi eta Ia/Ir Number Pole- Conv.- cosphi Ma/Mr Mk/Mr Rm sr
Node MW MVA kV A - - - - pairs Drive start - - Ohm %
U3 5.2 ELEVEN 5 6.6489 5.2 0.738 0.8 0.94 5 1 1 1 0.3 0.9 2.2 0 2
U1 5.2 TEN 5 6.6489 5.2 0.738 0.8 0.94 5 1 1 1 0.3 0.9 2.2 0 1.8
Name J H LF type P oper Q oper ANSI Load M0 M1 M2 M0,1,2 Model

kg*m2 s - MW Mvar factor torque in Nm
U3 5.2 100 0.742 PQ oper 2 1 1.5 Parabola 4500 0 7000 1 3. Order
U1 5.2 100 0.742 PQ oper 4 3 1.5 Parabola 3500 0 7000 1 3. Order
Nodes:
Name Node Un Frequ. Umin Umax Ir Ipmax
Type kV Hz % % A kA
THREE Busbar 65 50 0 0 0 0
FOUR Busbar 65 50 0 0 0 0
TEN Busbar 5.2 50 0 0 0 0
TWELVE Busbar 16 50 0 0 0 0
SEVEN Busbar 65 50 0 0 0 0
ELEVEN Busbar 5.2 50 0 0 0 0
THIRTEEN Busbar 8.5 50 0 0 0 0
ONE Busbar 220 50 0 0 0 0
TWO Busbar 65 50 0 0 0 0
EIGHT Busbar 65 50 0 0 0 0
SIX Busbar 65 50 0 0 0 0
FIVE Busbar 65 50 0 0 0 0
NINE Busbar 65 50 0 0 0 0
Enter the network

Tutorial
Enter an element
1. To draw an element from the symbol window, click on it, hold the mouse
button pressed, drag the symbol to the diagram and drop it.
2. A data-input-dialog for the element appears.
3. Enter a name for the element.
4. Enter the element parameters.
5. Press the OK-button when finished.
3 1
Fig. 1.8 Enter an element
Enter a node
6. To enter nodes, click on one of the node button in the Toolbar.
7. Click once in the diagram for a round-point-node. To draw a bar-node, click
in the diagram, but hold the mouse button and move the mouse to define
the length of the bar-node, then leave the mouse button.
8. A data-input-dialog for the node appears.
9. For the node data at least the nominal system voltage and frequency are
required.
10.Press the OK-button when finished.

Tutorial
10
Fig. 1.9 Enter a node
Enter a link
11.To interconnect elements with elements or with nodes, use the links. Press
on the link-button.
12.First click on one end of the element.
13.Then click on the node to finalize the link.

Tutorial
11
12
13
Fig. 1.10 Interconnecting the elements with Links
Build up the whole network (Hint for entering lines)

14.Build up the network in the same manner as explained before. To enter
lines you need nodes where to connect them.
15.For entering lines press on the Line-button.
16.Click on the starting-node.
17.Click in the diagram, wherever you wish to have supporting points.
18.Click on the ending-node
19.Enter the line data in the appearing dialog.
20.Press OK when finished.

Tutorial
15
19 16
17
20
18
Fig. 1.11 Enter a line
Enter a text field

21.Click on the text-button.
22.Click in the diagram. The text field will be inserted and you may enter a text.

Tutorial
21
22
Fig. 1.12 Enter a text field
23.To change the properties of the text field, select it and press the right
mouse button.
24.In the appearing pop-up menu choose Graphic Properties and the dialog
appears.
25.You may change the text and the font or apply a frame and colors.

Tutorial
23
25
24
Fig. 1.13 Change the text field properties
Test your network

After having entered the network with all nodes and elements data, you should
check if all elements are linked and all data is entered correctly. For this reason
perform a load flow calculation with "Analysis Load Flow - Calculation". Watch
out for any error messages in the Message Window and correct your network, till
the load flow calculation is running successfully.
In case that you get an error message for a certain element, the elements ID will
be indicated. There is a feature in NEPLAN to search this element in an easy way:
Search for an element

1. Choose the Search-feature in the Edit-menu.
2. Select the search-criteria. In this case choose Id.
3. Enter the ID of the element you are looking for.
4. Press the button Find Next.

Tutorial
3 4
2
Fig. 1.14 Search for an element
5. The program will move the view of the network, so that the searched
element is displayed in the center with an orange frame around it.
6. Use the button Show Dialog to show the data input dialog of the marked
element.
7. Enter an other ID to look for an other element.
8. Press Cancel to finish the Search.
6
8
5

Tutorial
Fig. 1.15 Find the element

Tutorial
Step 3 Insert Header, Save, Print, Exit
Insert Header
In every diagram a header may be inserted and its data can be edited.
1. Insert a header with "Insert - Header".

2. Click in the diagram to past the header.
Fig. 1.16 Insert a header into the diagram
3. With "Options Header" a dialog with the header text lines appears.
4. The text lines may be modified.

Tutorial
Fig. 1.17 Modify the header lines
5. With "Options Project Description" a respective dialog appears.

6. You may modify the project description.

Tutorial
Fig. 1.18 Modify the project description
The project name and the variant name are displayed automatically in the header.
Save the network

From time to time the network has to be saved to avoid data loss. Generally just
do it by pressing the Save-Icon or with "File - Save". In the following it's shown
how you save a network for the first time or how to save it with a different name.
1. Choose "File Save as".
Fig. 1.19 Save a project
2. Choose the directory, where the project should be saved.

3. Enter the file-name.
4. Click on the button "Save"

Tutorial
3 4
Fig. 1.20 Enter the file-name
Print the diagram

Use Page Setup, Print Setup and Print Preview to adjust all settings before you
Print. To print the diagram on one page activate the option "Print on One Page". If
this function is not activated, the diagram may be printed on several pages.
1. Use "Page Setup" for settings of the paper size and margins.
2. Use "Print Setup" for printer settings.
3. Make a print preview from the diagram. You may print from the preview
window.
4. Print the diagram.
3 2
1
Fig. 1.21 Print the diagram

Tutorial
Close and open projects

Projects may be opened and closed without quitting the program. Several projects
can be open at the same time, they will be displayed in the variant manager.
1. Make a right-mouse-button click on the project symbol in the variant

manager. A popup menu appears.
2. Choose "Close Project" to close the respective project. The same is
possible with "File - Close".
Fig. 1.22 Close a project
3. Open an other, already existing project with "File Open"

Tutorial
Fig. 1.23 Open a project
4. To exit the program use "File Exit"
Fig. 1.24 Exit the program

Tutorial
Step 4 Use of Diagrams, Layers, Areas and Zones
In this step you will learn how to handle diagrams and graphic layers and you'll
define areas and zones. We use the example network MyProject.nepprj, entered
in Step 2.
Use of Diagrams
For a certain project, the network may be entered in different diagrams. With the
help of this function, the user can for instance enter the high voltage network in
one diagram and the low voltage network in several other diagrams. The high
voltage network could also be divided into several diagrams.
An other use is zooming into stations. In the general diagram the station can be
drawn as a "black box" and in an other diagram the station can be drawn in detail
with all protection and switching devices.
In this step, we will learn the handling of diagrams in a project.
Rename a Diagram
The following figure explains the procedure to rename the single diagram in our
project, which actually has the name Diagram 0.
1. Select the diagram manager.

2. Double click on the existing "Diagram 0" and the Diagram Properties dialog
appears.
3. The name can now be changed to "MV-Network".
4. If you wish, insert a diagram description.

Tutorial
Fig. 1.25 Change of diagram name
Define a new diagram

A low voltage network for the substation STAT-LV shall be inserted in an other
diagram. We'll define this new diagram, like shown in the figure below:
1. Make a right-mouse-button click on the Diagram Manager and choose
"Insert new Diagram". The Diagram Properties dialog appears.
2. Enter the name of the new diagram.
3. If you wish, insert a diagram description.

Tutorial
Fig. 1.26 Insert a new diagram
After having closed the Diagram Properties by clicking the OK-button, the
following diagram structure is displayed.
Fig. 1.27 Rootnet with two diagrams

Tutorial
To display a diagram, check its checkbox and uncheck it for closing. The last
checked diagram is the active one and can be edited.
Enter a low voltage network

Activate the diagram "LV-network" and draw the following network.
Fig. 1.28 LV-Network, drawn in the new diagram
The necessary parameters are all listed in the following tables.
Lines:
Name Type Length Number Units R(1) X(1) C(1) G(1) R(0) X(0) C(0) Ir min Ir max Red. Q
Ohm/.. Ohm/..
km . . uF/... uS/... Ohm/... Ohm/... uF/... A A fact. mm2
N-L2 KS 3x150/150 0.03 1 Ohm/km 0.1240 0.072 0 0 0.508 0.115 0 0 360 1 150
N-L1 KS 3x240/240 0.02 1 Ohm/km 0.0754 0.072 0 0 0.308 0.119 0 0 470 1 240
Loads:
Name From node LF Type P Q Domestic Units Units
N-V3 N3 PQ 20 10 0 LV
N-V2 N2 PQ 40 30 0 LV

Tutorial
Transformers:
Name Type From To Vector Unit Comp. Sr Ur1 Ur2 ukr(1) uRr(1) ukr(0) uRr(0)
Node Node Group Transf. Winding MVA kV kV % % % %
16/0.4 KV
TRAFO-NS 630 KVA TWELVE NS_SS_N1 DY,07 0 0 0.63 16 0.4 5.24 1.12 5.24 1.12
Name I0 Pfe U01(0) U02(0) Earthing RE1 XE1 ZE1 active Earthing RE2 XE2 ZE1 active
% kW % % primary Ohm Ohm % secondary Ohm Ohm %
TRAFO-NS 0 0 0 0 direct 0 0 100 direct 0 0 100
Name On-load Tap side Controlled Tap Tap Tapr Tap Delta U Beta U Uset Pset Sr min Sr max
Tapchanger bus act min max % % % MVA MVA
TRAFO-NS 0 Primary Secondary 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0.63 0.63
Nodes:
Name Node Un Frequ. Umin Umax Ir Ipmax
Type kV Hz % % A kA
N3 Sleeve 0.4 50 0 0 0 0
N2 Sleeve 0.4 50 0 0 0 0
NS_SS_N1 Busbar 0.4 50 0 0 0 0
Enter an element more than once in a project

Elements may be represented graphically as many times as you want in the same
project. Mainly this makes sense, when you wish to see the same element in
different diagrams, like in our case. The substation STAT-LV, where the low
voltage network is connected, shall be represented in the LV- and in the HV-
diagram to connect the two networks. It concerns the substation symbol and the
node TWELVE. To draw the node TWELVE a second time follow the instructions:
1. Select the node symbol as usual and draw the node in the diagram.
2. In the appearing Input-dialog, select the Info-tab.
3. Press the button beside the name field.
4. Select an already existing node from a list.
5. By pressing the OK-button, the data of the respective element will be
adopted.

Tutorial
3
1
Fig. 1.29 Enter an already existing element again in the same project.
After you entered the whole low voltage network, perform a Load Flow calculation
to proof the entered data and the connections of the elements.
Use of graphic layers

To each diagram, any number of graphic layers may be assigned. The user can
decide, which graphic layers of a diagram shall be displayed simultaneously. The
figure below shows the principle of diagrams and graphic layers.

Tutorial
Diagram 1
1
2
3
Graphic Layer 1-3 of Diagram 1
Diagram 2
1
2
Graphic Layer 1-2 of Diagram 2
Fig. 1.30 Assignment of graphic layers to diagrams
In each graphic layer any number of graphic elements, electric elements or nodes
can be entered or bitmaps imported. Before you insert a new component, you can
choose the graphic layer, to which it should belong. The graphic layers can be
displayed selectively. For example, it's possible to use different layers for current
transformers and relays. If you are doing load flow calculation, you could switch
off the layer for the relays. If you are doing relay coordination you can switch on
the relay layer.
In our example we'll introduce a second graphic layer for the HV-diagram with the
name Areas/Zones. In the new graphic layer, we will draw the regions of network
areas and zones. We then have the possibility to display or not this graphical
input, by switching on or off the respective graphic layer.
Insert new graphic layers

Follow the instructions to insert new graphic layers:
1. In the Diagram Manager make a right-mouse-button click on the diagram
symbol "HV-Network".
2. In the menu choose "Insert new Graphic Layer".

Tutorial
Fig. 1.31 Add a new graphic layer to the diagram "HV-Network"
3. In the "Graphic Layer Parameters" dialog, enter the name of the graphic
layer.
4. If you wish, you may write a description.
Fig. 1.32 Enter the graphic layer parameters
Finally the Diagram Manager will look like this:

Tutorial
Fig. 1.33 Diagram Manager after entering the new graphic layer
Enter drawings in the new graphic layer

To be able to edit a graphic layer, it has to be activated.
1. Activate the new graphic layer Areas/Zones of the diagram HV-Network,
either by mouse click in the checkbox or by choosing the right option in the
menu, which appears with a right-button mouse click.
2. Draw the regions for an area and a zone and write a text, like in the figure
below, by using the graphical tools in the toolbar.

Tutorial
Fig. 1.34 Input for the graphic layer "Areas/Zones" of the diagram "HV-Network"
Actually, both graphic layers (GrLayer 0 and Areas/Zones) are shown. Switch off
the graphic layer "Areas/Zones", so that only the network is displayed.
1. To be able to switch off the graphic layer Areas/Zones, it mustn't be active.
For that reason, activate the other graphic layer.
2. Right-mouse-button click on the symbol of the "Areas/Zones" layer.
3. Unselect the "Show Graphic Layer" option.
1
2
Fig. 1.35 Switch off the graphic layer "Areas/Zones"
Now, the graphical elements we entered before disappeared and only the network
is visible. A red cross over the graphic layer symbol indicates, that the
"Areas/Zones" layer is not shown, respectively switched off:

Tutorial
Fig. 1.36 Only the graphic layer "GrLayer 0" is shown
Define and assign Areas and Zones

Areas and zones are both network groups and can be defined by the user. Every
element and node belongs to one zone and to one area. An area normally
includes one or more zones. For load flow calculation it is possible to define
transactions between different zones and between different areas.
When creating a new project, there is one area and one zone predefined and
every entered element is assigned to these network groups. After an element has
been entered its area and zone may be changed.
There are different possibilities to assign an area or/and a zone to network
elements. They will be explained below. In general areas and zones have to be
defined first, before they can be assigned to elements.
Define areas and zones

To define areas and zones, choose "Edit Variant Properties".
1. Select the "Areas" tab first.
2. In the list, there exists only the predefined area. To add a new area click on
the respective button.
3. Enter the name of the area
4. Choose a color.

Tutorial
2
3
Fig. 1.37 Define a new area Area_red
Let us change the color of Area 1.

1. Select Area 1 in the Area tab.
2. Click on the Properties button.
3. Change the color.

Tutorial
Fig. 1.38 Change the properties of Area 1
In the same manner define the zone Zone_motors:

1. Select the "Zones" tab first.
2. To add a new zone click on the respective button.
3. Enter the name of the zone and the color.
4. Different scaling factors for a zone may be defined.

Tutorial
2
3
Fig. 1.39 Define zones
Now, zones and areas are defined and they can be assigned to the elements. You
have several possibilities to do it.
Assign areas and zones to the elements, one by one

As shown below, for every single element you may choose independently a zone
and an area, which have been defined previously.

Tutorial
Fig. 1.40 Assign an area and a zone to an element
Assign areas and zones to a group of elements

An other, much easier method is to mark a group of elements and to assign to all
of them an area or/and a zone.
1. Mark a group of elements by using the mouse to put up a selection window
or/and by clicking on different elements, while keeping the Shift-key
pressed.
2. Choose "Assign Areas/Zones" and the "Assign Properties" dialog will
appear.
3. In the "Assign Properties" dialog check the Area-box to assign an area to
the elements. If you want to assign as well (or only) a zone to the elements,
just mark the respective checkbox.
4. You now can select the name of the area, to which the element should
belong to.

Tutorial
5. As we marked a group of elements for the assignment, we choose the

option "Assign to graphical selection".
2
1
3 4
Fig. 1.41 Assign an area (or/and a zone) to a group of elements
As a control, you can now open the Info tab of a Data Input Dialog of an element
that belongs to this area and you'll notice that the area name has been changed.
Assign areas and zones to all elements of a partial network

For this procedure you first have to create a partial network. This means, a part of
the network has to be disconnected from the rest.
1. Disconnect the part of the network, which you want to assign to an area
or/and zone. A partial network is built.
2. Get to the Assign Properties dialog by the menu option "Edit - Data
Assign Areas/Zones".
3. Select Area (or/and Zone) and choose the respective name.

Tutorial
4. Check the box "Assign to all elements of selected partial network" and
select the ID of the partial network. If you don't know this ID, open the Data
Input dialog of one element of this partial network and get it of the Info tab.
5. By pressing the OK button, the assignment will be finalized. Don't forget to
reconnect the partial network.
2 1
4
5
6
Fig. 1.42 Assign an area (or/and a zone) to a partial network
You now have the possibility to color the network according to the different areas
or zones.
1. Get to the Colors tab of the Diagram Properties with "Edit Diagram
Properties".
2. Select "Network Areas" for a coloration of the network according to areas.
3. Press the OK button and the coloration of the network will change.

Tutorial
Fig. 1.43 Network coloration according to areas

Tutorial
Step 5 Create and use Libraries
The NEPLAN Library File *.neplib may contain many element libraries, which are
sorted by element type.
In the following we explain how to create new libraries, how to copy library data to
an element and how to export data from an element to a library.
Create a new Library

The following steps explain how to create a new element library:
1. Choose "Libraries" in the menu "Libraries". The NEPLAN Library

Application appears.
Fig. 1.44 Open the Library Application
2. Select "File - New" to create a new Library File.

3. Enter the Library File name.

Tutorial
Fig. 1.45 Create a new Library File
4. Select "Library New Library" to create a new library.

5. Choose the element type, for which a library has to be created.

Tutorial
Fig. 1.46 Create a new library
6. A new library appeared in the library tree. The libraries are sorted by
element type.
7. Change the name of the new library
6 7
Fig. 1.47 Change name of library
8. Insert a new Library Element (type) by selecting "Library Element - New".

Tutorial
Fig. 1.48 Insert new library element
9. A new library element appeared in the library "50MVA".
Fig. 1.49 New library element in the library "50MVA"
10.Change the type name of the library element.

11.Enter the data for the new library element.
12.If you wish, enter additional library elements.
13.If you wish, enter other libraries.
14.When finished, close the Library Editor with "File-Close".

Tutorial
14 13 12
10
11
Fig. 1.50 Enter library data
Import data from a library

When a network element has been entered in the diagram and you wish to copy
the data from an element type of the library, proceed as follows:
1. In the Params tab of the Element-Data-Input-Dialog, press the button "".
Fig. 1.51 Copy the data from an element type of the library

Tutorial
2. Choose the NEPLAN-Library-File, where the respective element type can

be found.
3. Select the element type in the respective library.
4. To copy the data from the library to your element, click on the OK-button.
Fig. 1.52 Choose the element type
Update your network data with a library type

In case that the data of a certain element type in the library has been changed,
you have the possibility to update this data easily in all network elements, which
are of the same type.
1. Click on the Library button in the Data-Input-Dialog of an element with the
respective element type.
2. In the Library dialog, select the element type.
3. Press the button "Update Data with Modal Type" to update the data in every
network element with the same type.
4. Proceed in the same way to update other elements with a modified type.
When finished, click the OK-button to close the dialog.

Tutorial
Fig. 1.53 Update all elements of a certain element by the library data
Export data to a library

In case that you entered data in the Data-Input-Dialog of an element and you want
to create an element type of this data in a library, proceed as follows.
1. Enter a element type name in the element dialog.
2. Click on the Export-button in the Data-Input-Dialog of the element, to call
the Library dialog.
3. Choose the Library File, whereto export the data.
4. If you want to create a new library, press this button (A new element type
can be inserted in a new or in an already existing library).
5. Select the library, whereto the new element type should be added.
6. To finalize, click the OK-button.

Tutorial
5 4
Fig. 1.54 Export data of an element to the library
7. When you open the Library dialog again, you'll recognize the new library
element.
Fig. 1.55 New element type

Tutorial
In the same manner you may also update an already existing element type in a
library. Select the library in which this element type already exists and press OK.
You then will be asked if the existing element type shall be overwritten.

Tutorial
Step 6 Define variants
For calculating different cases, NEPLAN has the possibility to create different
variants of the rootnet and to combine them with topology and loading data files.
The following figure shows the principle.
BASE CASE or ROOT NETWORK
Variants Loading Topology
Loading-1 Topology-1
... ...
BASE or ROOT
VAR-1 VAR-2 VAR-3 VAR-4
VAR-12 VAR-31 VAR-42
VAR-131 VAR-132 VAR-133 VAR-43
Fig. 1.3 Variant Management System with NEPLAN
The variants are saved together with the Rootnet in the project file (.nepprj), for
topology and loading data separate files will be defined. When activating a
variant, assigned topology and loading files will be opened automatically.
In this step 4, you'll get in contact with the concept of variants. In the following,
different variants will be defined.

Tutorial
Insert new Subvariants

Variants first have to be created in the variant tree, before the modifications for
the different variants can be saved. Several variants will be defined.
1. Make a right-mouse-button click on the rootnet symbol in the Variant

Manager
2. Choose "Insert new Subvariant"
Mcontr32.dll
Fig. 1.56 Insert new Subvariant
3. A "Variant Properties" dialog appears.

4. Enter a Name for the new variant and if you wish, a description.

Tutorial
Fig. 1.57 Enter name and description
5. Variant replacement is displayed in the variant tree.
Fig. 1.58 "Variant replacement" appears in the variant tree
6. Define an other variant Variant additional in the same way as before.

Tutorial
Fig. 1.59 Define a variant "Variant additional"
7. Define two subvariants (Variant a and Variant b) of "Variant replacement"
Fig. 1.60 Define subvariants "Variant a" and "Variant b"

Tutorial
Save modifications to the variants

A variant tree now has been created, but all variants still contain the same data.
Now we will modify the different variants.
1. Activate Variant replacement by clicking on the checkbox.

2. As a modification for this variant, change the length and Ir of LIN 7-6.
Fig. 1.61 Realize the modifications in "Variant replacement"
3. Deactivate Variant replacement by clicking on the checkbox. This is

necessary if you wish to edit next a variant of the same tree branch.
4. You'll be asked, if you want to save the modifications in Variant
replacement. Click on YES.

Tutorial
Fig. 1.62 Save the modifications of Variant replacement
5. Activate Variant a
6. Notice that the modifications carried out in Variant replacement have also
been realized in Variant a (in this case the length and Ir of the LINE 7-6).
7. Call the data input dialog of LINE 8-7 by double clicking the line.
8. Modify the data of the resistance.
8 8
6
7
Fig. 1.63 Realize modifications for Variant a

Tutorial
9. Activate Variant b. As you may notice, the Variant a can still be activated,
because the two open variants are not depending from each other.
10.For this Variant b, you can introduce a compensation to LINE 8-7.
10
10
Fig. 1.64 Realize modifications for Variant b
11.Activate Variant additional

12.Draw a new line from node FIVE to SEVEN and enter its data.

Tutorial
11
12
12
12
Fig. 1.65 Introduce a new line for Variant additional
Create and assign a Topology Data File

Topology data, such as the state of logical switches in the whole network, may be
saved to a Topology Data File.
To define different topology cases of a network, several variants could be defined
with exactly the same characteristics but with a different topology data file.
In the following we'll create such a topology data file by saving a modification of
the state of a few logical switches in our example network.
1. Activate Variant replacement

2. Change the topology. In this case you may open the logical switches of a
transformer.
3. Save the topology with "File - Export - Topology Data", using the name
Topology1.

Tutorial
Fig. 1.66 Create a topology file
4. Deactivate and activate again the Variant replacement but don't save it,
because the topology modifications shouldn't be saved directly to the
variant, but only in the topology file. Now the logical switches are closed
again.
5. We now want to assign the topology file to the Variant replacement. Make
a right-mouse-button click on the symbol of Variant replacement to call the
popup menu, where you choose Properties. The same is possible by
double-clicking the symbol of Variant replacement.

Tutorial
Fig. 1.67 Call the Properties dialog of the variant
6. The Variant Properties dialog appeared.

7. Press the respective button for choosing a "Topology Data File".
8. Look for the topology file and select it.
9. Open the topology file.
10.Press the OK button to finalize.

Tutorial
10
8 9
Fig. 1.68 Assign the topology file to Variant replacement
Create and assign a Load Data File

Data, such as the power to be consumed by a load or the power to be produced
by a generator, may be saved to a Load Data File.
To define different loading cases of a network, several variants could be defined
with exactly the same characteristics but with a different load data file.
In the following we'll create such a load data file by saving a modification of the
operational active power of a generator.
1. By double-clicking the generator, call its data input dialog.

2. Change the operational data of the generator and save this modification to
a "Load Data File with "File Export Load Data".

Tutorial
Fig. 1.69 Change Load data
3. Call the Variant Properties dialog by double clicking the symbol of Variant
replacement.
4. Look for the Load Data File.
5. Open the Load Data File.
6. Finalize by pressing the OK button.

Tutorial
5
6
Fig. 1.70 Assign the load data file to Variant replacement
You mustn't save the Variant replacement after these modifications, but you
need to save the project. So the best way to do is, to first deactivate the variant
without saving it and then you may save the project.
In general be careful that you don't save the variant, when you changed Load or
Topology data, which only should be contained in the Load and the Topology
Data File.
Now the Variant 1 includes a Load Data File and a Topology Data File. When the
variant is opened, also these two data files are loaded.
In the same manner you may assign the same or other Load and Topology Data
File to the other variants.

Tutorial
Load Flow Calculation
In this chapter you will learn how to perform a load flow calculation on a small
network and how to get the desired results.
Open the project

1. Load the Load Flow example network.
2. Call the Load Flow Parameter dialog.
Fig. 1.71 Adjustment of Load Flow calculation parameters
Adjust the calculation parameters

3. Select the calculation method.
4. You may change the maximum number of iterations. Default are 20
iterations.
5. Define if the on-load tapchanging transformers shall be regulated
automatically during the load flow calculation.
6. You may choose a result-file *.rlf, which can be opened with a text editor or
Excel.
7. Use the Reference tab to edit the reference loading for elements and the
reference minimum and maximum voltage.
8. If you want to work with Area/Zone Control, use the respective tab to define
the transactions.
9. Press the OK button to save the change and to quite the Parameter dialog.

Tutorial
Fig. 1.72 Load Flow Parameters
Choose the result variables

10.For the results showed in the single line diagram, you can choose the
variables to be displayed. This can be done now or after the calculation.
Open the Diagram Properties dialog.
11.Choose the Load Flow tab.
12.Select the variables to be displayed in the single line diagram for nodes and
elements. This selection doesnt have any influence on the result tables.
The result tables will contain all variables.
13.Define the units and number of digits for the result variables and decide if
you want to see only the load flow results or at the same time the results of
the last short circuit calculation.

Tutorial
11
12
10
12
13
13
Fig. 1.73 Result variables
Perform the calculation

14.You may now perform the load flow calculation
14
Fig. 1.74 Load Flow Calculation
Analyse the results in the single line diagram

Tutorial
15.The results can be analyzed directly in the single-line diagram. If additional

variables should be displayed, proceed as mentioned in step 10. Its not
necessary to repeat the calculation.
16.Use the zoom buttons to get a better view of the result boxes.
17.The network elements and nodes may be colored depending on the results.
In this example the node became red because the voltage is below the
minimum reference.
16
15
17
Fig. 1.75 Analyzing the results
18.Use the Diagram Properties dialog (Edit Diagram Properties) to define the
coloration of the network depending on the network characteristics or the
calculation results (tab Colors and Color Ranges).

Tutorial
18 18
Fig. 1.76 Coloration of the network
Analyse the results using the result tables

19.Choose Show Results to get the results presented in tables.
20.You may get tables for a summary, the nodes, the elements or all results.
21.There is still the possibility to export the results in a file if this option was not
activated in the Load Flow Parameters dialog.

Tutorial
19
20
21
Fig. 1.77 Result Tables
Analyze specific results

22.If you wish to display only the results of specific elements and nodes either
in the single line diagram or in the result tables, you may use the Select
Results option to select these elements.

Tutorial
22
22
22
Fig. 1.78 Result output only for certain elements and nodes
23.To make sure that the results will be displayed in the single line diagram
accordingly to this selection table, you need to activate this option in the
Edit Diagram Properties Load Flow tab.
24.To make sure that the results will be displayed in the result tables
accordingly to this selection table, you need to activate this option in the
Analysis Load Flow Show Results dialog.

Tutorial
23 24
23
23
24
Fig. 1.79 Result output for all elements and nodes or according to list

Tutorial
Short Circuit Calculation
In this chapter you will learn how to perform a short circuit calculation on a small
network and how to get the desired results.
Open the project

1. Load the Short Circuit example network.
2. Call the Short Circuit Parameter dialog.
Fig. 1.80 Adjustment of Short Circuit calculation parameters

3. Select the fault type.
4. Choose the calculation method.
5. Enter a fault distance if you want to display the results as well of neighbor
nodes of the fault location.
6. Possibly you need to adapt the calculation method depending parameters,
according to your needs.
7. You may choose a result-file *.rsc, which can be opened with a text editor
or Excel.
8. Define the reference for maximum loading of elements.

Tutorial
3
4
5
6
7
8
Fig. 1.81 Short Circuit Parameters
Select the faulted nodes

9. Select the Faulted nodes tab in the Short Circuit Parameters.
10.Select the nodes which should be faulted und move them to the other table
with the arrow button.

Tutorial
10 10
Fig. 1.82 Select faulted nodes
Select faulted lines

11.Select the Faulted lines tab in the Short Circuit Parameters.
12.Select the lines which should be faulted und move them to the other table
with the arrow button.
13.Insert the distance where the fault takes place, in % from the From node.

Tutorial
11
13
12 12
Fig. 1.83 Select faulted lines
Define special faults

14.Select the Special fault tab in the Short Circuit Parameters.
15.Insert new fault descriptions.
16.Define the node numbers and their phases, between which the fault takes
place.
17.Assign the node numbers to the faulted network nodes.

Tutorial
14
15
16
17
Fig. 1.84 Define special faults
Choose the result variables

18.For the results showed in the single line diagram, you can choose the
variables to be displayed. This can be done now or after the calculation.
Open the Diagram Properties dialog.
19.Choose the Short Circuit tab
20.Select the variables to be displayed in the single line diagram for nodes and
elements. This selection doesnt have an influence on the result tables. The
result tables will contain all variables.
21.Define the units and number of digits for the result variables and decide if
you want to see only the short circuit results or at the same time the results
of the last load flow calculation.

Tutorial
19
20
18
20
21
21
Fig. 1.85 Result variables
Perform the calculation

22.You may now perform the short circuit calculation
22
Fig. 1.86 Short Circuit Calculation
Analyse the results in the single line diagram

Tutorial
23.The results can be analyzed directly in the single-line diagram. If additional

variables should be displayed, proceed as mentioned in step 18. Its not
necessary to repeat the calculation.
24.Use the zoom buttons to get a better view of the result boxes.
24
23
Fig. 1.87 Analyzing the results
Analyse the results using the result tables

25.Choose Show Results to get the results presented in tables.
26.You may get tables for all fault currents, only the currents at fault locations
or the node voltages.
27.There is still the possibility to export the results in a file if this option was not
activated in the Short Circuit Parameters dialog.

Tutorial
25
26
27
Fig. 1.88 Result Tables

Tutorial
Transient Stability Analysis
In this chapter you will learn how to perform a simulation with the Transient
Stability module on a small network and how to get the desired results.
Open the project

1. Load the Transient Stability example network.
Fig. 1.89 Open the project
Enter Dynamic Data

2. Enter the Dynamic Data of the synchronous machines in the data input
dialog.

Tutorial
Fig. 1.90 Dynamic data of synchronous machine
3. Enter the saturation data of the synchronous machines.

Tutorial
Fig. 1.91 Saturation data of synchronous machine
Enter control circuits CCTs

4. Click on the CCT-button
5. Click in the diagram near of a synchronous machine to past the CCT.
6. A CCT dialog appears. Enter a name for this CCT.

Tutorial
6
5
Fig. 1.92 Enter a CCT
8. A new diagram for the design of the CCT appeared.

Tutorial
Fig. 1.93 Diagram for the design of the CCT
Design the block diagram for an AVR

9. Switch the Insert menu to a Function Block Menu.
Fig. 1.94 Use of the Function Block Menu
10. Choose an Input-Block.

11. Make a mouse click in the diagram, where you wish to place the block.

Tutorial
12. A properties dialog of the entered block appears. Enter the name of the
block.
13. Select the variable. In this case, for an AVR, we choose the bus voltage
magnitude.
14. Press the button and choose the respective node (BUS 1) from a list.
15. Close the window, pressing OK.
10
12
11
13
14
15
Fig. 1.95 Enter function blocks
16.The Input Block has been pasted in the diagram.

Tutorial
16
Fig. 1.96 An Input block has been entered
17.Choose a Sum-block.
18.Click in the diagram. The properties-dialog appears.
19.Enter a name.
20.Enter the constants and close the window with OK.
17
19
18 20
Fig. 1.97 Enter a Sum block
21.Choose a Source-block for the reference voltage.

Tutorial
22.Place it in the diagram.

23.Enter the name and the source constant.
21
23
22
Fig. 1.98 Enter a Source block
24.Select the Source-block and turn it with the rotate buttons.

25.Use the link to interconnect the function blocks.
24 25
25
24
Fig. 1.99 Interconnection of the function blocks with a link

Tutorial
26.Build the rest of the control circuit in the same manner.

27.Build control circuits for other generators. Function blocks and control
circuits may be copied from one diagram to the other.
27
26
Fig. 1.100 Complete the control circuit (CCT)

1. Choose the parameter menu for transient stability.

Tutorial
Fig. 1.101 Choose the parameter menu
2. Enter the simulation time.

3. You may choose a synchronous machine as reference for the rotor angle.
4. You have the possibility to change the step length and iteration data, but try
first with the default values.

Tutorial
Fig. 1.102 Adjust the simulation parameters
5. Use the Disturbances tab to define the disturbances during the transient
sequence.
6. The disturbance with the sign ! is active for the following simulation.
7. You may edit the disturbance by double click or with the respective button.
6 7
7 6
Fig. 1.103 Select a disturbance
Enter the disturbance data

8. In this case we want to add an initial load of 10% to a static load.
9. Pick the element to which the disturbance should be applied and the time,
when the disturbance has to occur.
10.Use the respective buttons to add, remove or update the disturbance
entries.

Tutorial
8
8
9
9
10
10
Fig. 1.104 Define disturbances
Define the Screen Plots

11.Use the Screen Plots tab to define the variables, which shall be displayed
on the screen or saved to a file.
12.The variables with a chart symbol will be displayed as screen plots during
the simulation.
13.The variables with a disk symbol will be saved to a file and may be used to
draw charts after the simulation.
14.Press Edit to edit a screen plot entry.

Tutorial
11
13
12
14 12 13
Fig. 1.105 Screen Plots to display on the screen or to save to a file
15.Define the element and the variable for which you want to draw a screen
plot or a chart.
16.Use the respective buttons to add, remove or update the screen plot
entries.

Tutorial
15
16
16
Fig. 1.106 Define Screen Plots
Simulation and Analysis

1. Run a Transient Stability simulation.
Fig. 1.107 Run a Transient Stability simulation
2. A Screen Plot appears and the curves of the selected variables are being
drawn. Below the diagrams, a event report is displayed.

Tutorial
Fig. 1.108 Screen plot at the end of the simulation
3. The Screen Plot shows you the selected variables during the whole
simulation process. The user has the possibility to break, to continue or
even to exit the simulation process.
Fig. 1.109 Options to break, continue or exit the simulation

Tutorial
4. Close the Screen Plot and choose Graphical Results for Transient Stability.
If there were never defined any charts for this project, one empty chart will
appear.
Fig. 1.110 Call the Graphical Results
5. You can define several charts. Every chart represents a graphical sheet
and may consist of one or more subcharts. To start, add a subchart in your
existing chart.
6. In the appearing dialog, enter a name for the curve and select the values for
the X-Axis and Y-Axis.
7. Press the OK-button to get to the next dialog.

Tutorial
Fig. 1.111 Select the variables for a curve
8. Enter a name for the chart.

9. Select the curve's drawing settings.
10.If there are more than one curve entries, the displayed drawing settings are
only valid for the marked curve.
11.To add curves in the same subchart or to edit or delete existing curves, use
the corresponding buttons.
12.Switch to the Subchart Settings tab.

Tutorial
12
11
10
Fig. 1.112 Define all the curves to be displayed in one subchart
13.Select an axis.
14.Adjust the properties for the selected axis.
15.You have the possibility to show a legend in the subchart.
16.Press OK to finalize.

Tutorial
13
14
15
16
Fig. 1.113 Adjust the subchart settings
17.The defined curves are drawn in the subchart.

Tutorial
17
Fig. 1.114 A chart with one subchart and one curve
18.Define as many charts, subcharts and curves as you wish. They need to be
defined only once for the project. After each simulation the same curves will
be drawn in the graphical results. Remember that only variables, which
have been declared as variables to be saved to a file, in the "Transient
Stability Parameter - Screen Plot" menu, are available for presentation in
these charts.

Tutorial
18
Fig. 1.115 Define several charts and subcharts
19.To see the Transient Stability results listed in a table choose Result
Table(Elements).
19
Fig. 1.116 Have a look at the presentation of the results in the Result Table
20.Look at the results in the Result table.

Tutorial
20
Fig. 1.117 Transient Stability results listed in a table

Tutorial
Interfaces to NEPLAN
NEPLAN has several interfaces to external applications:

Import/Export through ASCII file
Export to data base
Result data base
Clipboard
DXF-files
Raster-Graphics (e.g. BMP, PCX, TIFF, etc.)
DVG-Format (Format der Deutschen Verbundgesellschaft)
Import/Export
There are two import/export files for external programs, such as MS-Excel, the
EDT- and the NDT-file.
The EDT-file contains topological and electrical data of the elements, the NDT-file
contains the topological and loading data of the nodes.
The file structure of the import/export files is given in the appendix (see
"Appendix").
If data is imported without graphic, then it is possible to generate the graphic of
the network automatically by the NEPLAN "Auto-Layout" function.
Topology/Loading-data files
The topology and the loading data of a network may be saved in the ZDB-file
(topology) and in the NDB-file (loading).
The ZDB- and the NDB-file are used to define variants. To each variant a Load
Data File and a Topology Data File can be assigned (see "Edit Variant
Properties" in the chapter "Menu Options").
Clipboard
The diagram can be exported onto the clipboard. The clipboard data can be
imported by an external program, such as a word processing program.
DXF-Files
DXF-files can be imported. All diagrams are identified and displayed. The user
can select the diagrams to be imported from a list. The imported drawing can be
additionally scaled. The imported diagrams are managed by the program in
different graphic layers. The imported drawing can be changed.

Tutorial
Cadastre and Raster-Graphics Files (BMP, PCX, TIFF)

Raster graphics files (BMP, PCX, TIFF, etc.) can be imported in any diagram. It is
possible to import a raster graphic (e.g. PCX) as a cadastre. The cadastre can be
used as background for the NEPLAN network data. The cadastre can be
calibrated to use real world coordinates.

Tutorial
Tips from the Practice
Important tips from the practice are given here.
Asymmetrical Network Structure
Representation of an Asymmetrical Line

It is recommended to enter lines in a compact way. A 3-phase line from node A to
B can theoretically be entered as three single phase lines, which are coupled
between each other. In this way the program will work not only with the current
circuit resp. the series impedance matrices but also with the coupling matrices.
This increases the calculation effort. The better way is to represent the 3-phase
line with one 3-phase line. The same is valid for a 2-phase line.
Load Flow
Divergence using PV-Nodes
When using PV-nodes the Newton-Raphson method should be used. The

user has to take care that no disconnect or load switches as well as short
lines will be connected to the PV-node, because of numerical problems. If
disconnect and load switches are connected to PV-nodes it is advisable to
reduce them during calculation. If for example a generator is connected to a
bus bar through disconnect switches (one open, one closed), the generator
node should be marked as reducible (see "Node Data Input" in chapter
"Element Data Input and Models").
When using the current iteration method the same is valid. The convergence
can be additionally influenced by the accelerating factor (see "Calculation
Parameters (LF)" in chapter "Load Flow"). Probably the value must be
reduced until 0.05 to obtain convergence. The convergence criteria should
also be reduced.
Switching Topology or Connecting Motors

Tutorial
If the motor starting module is not available and the user like to make voltage
drop calculation when switching the topology or connecting motors, the
network impedance (network feeder) must be represented by a line. In the
normal load flow calculation the internal network impedance (Sk", Un) is not
considered.

Element Data Input and Models
Data Input Dialogs of Network Elements
The element data for the power system calculation are entered with the help of
data input dialogs. The dialog appears after having entered the element graphi-
cally. The entered data will be saved into a common database (project file),
which will be used from all calculation modules. The modules read only the
data, which is necessary to perform the specific calculation. The data not used
will be over read.
At the bottom of the data input dialog the following push buttons are available:
Copy and Copies the data from an element into an internal buffer. While
Paste inserting the data for another element, it is possible to get these
data from the buffer with the option "Paste". The data are
transferred to the data input dialog of this element.
Library For some elements it is possible to select a library containing
predefined standard data. This library can be built up in the menu
Libraries.
Export Its possible to export the data of the element to the actual library
by pressing the Export button. A type name has to be entered
before or a type has to be chosen in the type option of the
Params tab.
OK The edited data will be saved. A new element will be inserted.
Cancel The edited data will not be changed. A new element will not be
inserted.
Help The online Help will be called.
Tools Its possible to use background colors for the data fields of the
data input dialog, depending on if the respective data is
necessary for a certain calculation. A different color may be
chosen for mandatory fields and preference fields.
Classification of Data in the Data Input Dialog

In the following sections the parameters to be entered in the Data Input Dialogs
will be described. For every parameter there is an indication for what kind of
calculation the input is needed. The indication is given by:
L Load flow, Optimal Power flow,

Contingency Analysis, Voltage Stability
S Short circuit, Distance protection
M Motor starting
H Harmonic frequency analysis
P Distance protection analysis
D Dynamic Analysis, Small Signal Stability
R Reliability
O Selectivity Analysis
If there is a parentheses (), it means, that this parameter is used for all
NEPLAN-modules.
All parameters used for short circuit analysis are necessary also for selectivity
analysis, because the short circuit simulation makes part of the selectivity
analysis.
Element - Info
Every element has an Info tab, which gives general information about the
element. The type of information is nearly the same from one element to the
other, thats why this tab is explained here and wont be mentioned anymore in
the elements data input chapters.
Name Name of element. When the Input dialog of an element or

node is open for the first time after the entry of this
element, there is a ""-button beside the name field. If
you want to represent an already existing element in the
project again, then press this button and choose the
respective element.
ID () ID-number of element (generated by NEPLAN).
Partial () ID-number of the partial network (generated by
Network ID NEPLAN).
Description Description of element.
Area () Indicates the area to which the element belongs. New

areas may be defined in "Edit Variant Properties".

Zone () Indicates the zone to which the element belongs. New
zones may be defined in "Edit Variant Properties".
Projected Indicates, if the line is projected or if it exists already.
Connected () From: Name of starting node.
nodes To: Name of ending node.
Checkbox ON/OFF: Connects or disconnects the element
at the respective node.
For some elements the user has the possibility to choose the phases, so its
possible to define an asymmetrical element. This is done by the following
option:
Phases () Indicates the phasing of the element. Possible values are:
- L1L2L3N: Symmetrical element
- L1N: Single phase element, phase L1
If an element doesnt include this option, there exists an other similar element
for asymmetrical applications, which has to be entered (e.g. asymmetrical line).
Element - Reliability
Every element has a Reliability tab for the data input used in Reliability
Analysis. This module is still in development, therefore these parameters will
be explained later.
Element - User Data

Every element has a User Data tab. The user may define his own variables,
which enter in a table list. The values of the variables may be modified directly
in the table list. If the checkbox of a variable is checked, the variable will be
displayed in the single line diagram.
The variables are only for information and documentation purposes and do not
enter in any calculations.
New Name of variable to enter in the table list.
Variable:
Name

New Type of variable to enter in the table list.

Variable:
Type
Add Press this button to add a variable to the table list.
Variable
Remove Press this button to remove a variable from the table list.
Variable
Element - More
Frequency dependence
In general the resistances and the inductances in the equivalent circuits of the
network elements are frequency-dependent. The program permits to consider
the frequency dependency in three different manners:
according to an exponential function
according to a table R(f) and L(f)
according to a locus diagram
Frequency Dependency According to an Exponential Function

The frequency dependency of a resistance resp. of an inductance is according
to the following formulas:
f
Br

R( f ) = Rn 1 + Ar 1
fn

Bl
f
L( f ) = Ln Al
fn
It means:
R(f), L(f): resistance resp. inductance at frequency f
Rn, Ln: nominal value of the resistance resp. inductance at nominal
system frequency
Ar, Br, Al, Bl: Factors
f: Frequency
Fn: nominal system frequency

The figures 4.1 and 4.2 show the characteristic of R(f) resp. L(f) according to
the above formulas. This frequency dependency is only defined for frequencies
above the nominal system frequency.
20.0
R(f)/Rn
10.0
0.0
0.0 500.0 1000.0
frequency f [Hz]
Fig. 4.1 Frequency dependency of a resistance
1.0
L(f)/Ln
0.5
0.0
0.0 500.0 1000.0
frequency f [Hz]
Fig. 4.2 Frequency dependency of an inductance
Frequency Dependency According to a Table R(f) and L(f)

It is possible to enter the frequency dependency of R and L tabulated.
It is meaningful to give the values for the k-th harmonic fk as based values
R(fk)/Rn and L(fk)/Ln. The base are the values Rn, Ln for nominal system
frequency fn. A pair of values fk and R(fk)/Rn resp. fk and L(fk)/Ln are

designated as a foothold. For frequencies not corresponding with the

frequencies of a foothold a linear interpolation will be done.
Frequency Dependency According to a Locus Diagram

Arbitrary impedance curves can be represented by a locus diagram. It is
possible to reproduce given impedance curves (e.g. results of a
measurement). For all frequencies fk the real value R(fk) and the imaginary
value X(fk) of the impedance Z(fk) can be entered tabulated (R and X in series).
These value groups (fk, R, X) are designated as footholds of the locus diagram.
For frequencies not corresponding with the frequencies of a foothold, a linear
interpolation will be done (separate for the real and the imaginary value).
This kind of frequency dependency is only valid for the network elements
"network feeder", shunts and loads. The elements of the equivalent circuits
will be calculated exclusively by the values of the locus diagram and not by the
formulas given for the element models.
Investment Analysis

Station
This chapter describes the parameters of the Data Input Dialog of a station.
This element is not needed for calculations.
Station - Parameters
Name Station name.
Type Station type
Municipality Municipality, where the station has been built.
Location Location of the station.
Protection R Protection concept in the station
This element is not needed for calculations. It is used to switch between

different network layers.
Station-Info
The Info tab is described in Element - Info of chapter Data Input Dialogs of
Network Elements on page 4-2.
Station-Reliability
The Reliability tab is described in Element - Reliability of chapter Data Input
Dialogs of Network Elements on page 4-3.
Station-User Data
The User Data tab is described in Element - User Data of chapter Data Input
Station-More
By pressing this button of the More tab, the Frequency dependence input
parameters can be entered. They are only used for harmonic analysis. The

description can be found in Frequency dependence of chapter Data Input

Dialogs of Network Elements-Element - More on page 4-4.
Investment Data
By pressing this button of the More tab, the Investment Data input parameters
can be entered. They are only used for investment analysis. The description
can be found in Investment Analysis of chapter Data Input Dialogs of
Network Elements-Element - More on page 4-6.

Node
This chapter describes the parameters of the Data Input Dialog of a node.
Node-Parameters
Name Node name.
Area () Defines the area to which the element belongs.
Zone () Defines the zone to which the element belongs.
Node type () Node type. Following values are possible:
- Bus bar
- Sleeve
- Special node
- Main bus bar
The thickness of a node in the diagram can be
changed according to the here entered value (see
menu option "Line Width" in chapter "Menu Options").
Otherwise the input value has no importance.
Dist. P Indicates, if the node has to be considered, when
protection making the automatic relay setting. If this option is
node checked, the node will be handled like a distance
protection relay node.
Un () Nominal system voltage of node in kV.
Uset LDR Setting value in % of nominal voltage for this node.
Input is only relevant, if the node will be regulated
during calculation with a tap-changing transformer
(see chapter "Load Flow").
Umin LDR Min. allowable node voltage in %. If the voltage will
go below this limit during calculation, this value will be
kept (only for Newton-Raphson method).
Umax LDR Max. allowable node voltage in %. If the voltage will
go beyond this limit during calculation, this value will
be kept (only for Newton-Raphson method).
f SP Frequency
Ipmax SP Max. allowable peak short circuit current of bus-bar in
kA.
t dp P Tripping time in seconds of a primary protection, e.g.
fuse in a distribution pole.

Node-Info
Node-Reliability
Node-User Data
Node-More
Investment Data

DC Node
This chapter describes the parameters of the Data Input Dialog of a node.
DC Node-Parameters
Name Node name.
Area () Defines the area to which the element belongs.
Zone () Defines the zone to which the element belongs.
Un () Nominal system voltage of node in kV.
DC Node-Info
DC Node-Reliability
DC Node-User Data
DC Node-More
Investment Data

Line
This chapter describes the parameters of the Data Input Dialog of a line and
the corresponding line model.
Line-Parameters
Name Name of element.
Type Applicable only with a line library. Pressing the button
"", the type may be chosen and the data can be
transferred from the predefined library.
Length () Length of the line in km or miles or 1000 feet (see
Units).
Units () Units for the input values below. Possible values are:
- Ohm/km: Ohm, S, F per km
- Ohm/miles: Ohm, S, F per miles
- Ohm/1000ft: Ohm, S, F per 1000 feet
R(1) () Positive sequence resistance in Ohm/km or see Units.
R(0) SP Zero sequence resistance in Ohm/km or see Units.
X(1) () Positive sequence reactance in Ohm/km or see Units.
X(0) SP Zero sequence reactance in Ohm/km or see Units.
C(1) () Positive sequence capacitance in F/km or see Units.
C(0) SP Zero sequence capacitance in F/km or see Units.
G(1) () Positive sequence conductance in S/km or see Units.
Ir max L Maximum rated current in A. The loading of the line can
be calculated according to Ir min or Ir max (see load
flow calculation parameters).
Ir min L Minimal rated current in A. The loading of the line can
T perm SP Max. permitted temperature in C for the calculation of
minimum short circuit currents. The default value is 80
C.
Red. factor L Reduction factor. Ir will be corrected to:
Ir min = red.fact. * Ir min; Ir max = red.fact. * Ir max
No. of lines () Number of parallel lines between starting and ending
node.
Q Cross-section of the line in mm2 . A line can be

displayed with different line width according to the cross

section (see menu option "Line Width" in chapter "Menu
Options").
Cable Indicates, whether the line is a cable or not. The cables
and the overhead lines can be displayed with different
line types (see menu option "Edit Diagram Properties -
Lines").
Overhead Indicates, whether the line is overhead or not. The
overhead lines and the cables can be displayed with
different line types (see menu option "Edit Diagram
Properties -Lines").
Switchable L Indicates, if the line is switchable for calculation of
optimal separation point.
Line-Sections
This option is useful if the line consists of sections. In the Sections tab the line
sections can be entered. With the corresponding push buttons the sections can
be inserted, updated or deleted. The parameters of the sections can also be
taken from a line library. In the table of the line section entries, the user can
see all entered line sections. The input fields for the parameters are the same
as in the Line-Params tab. The length and parameters of the whole line are
calculated automatically with the entered line sections and they appear in the
Params tab. These calculated parameters cannot be modified, because they
represent a combination of the line sections parameters.
Line-Pylons
The user has the possibility to calculate the parameters of an overhead line
with the help of the Pylons tab in the line data input dialog. With this function,
the parameters of one single line will be calculated by inserting the conductors
characteristics and the arrangement data. To be able to enter the arrangement
data, its necessary to choose one or more pylons. The respective pylons have
to be entered before graphically from the Symbol Window (see chapter Pylon
on page 4-33).
If there are coupled lines, it is recommended to use the line-coupling editor,
which calculates the coupling impedances and the parameters of all the
considered lines (see chapter Line-Coupling on page 4-28).
Phase conductors
Conductors per Bundle conductors can also be entered and calculated. The

bundle number of the conductor elements can be specified here.

The values are 1..4.
Distance Distance of the conductor elements in cm. Typical value: 40
cm.
Diameter Diameter of a conductor element in cm.
R Specific resistance in /km of the phase conductors at 20
Celsius.
Sag Sag h of the conductors in m. For the parameter calculation
the y-values are corrected as follows:
ynew = yinp - 0.7h.
Pylon data
Insert A pylon, entered before, may be selected from a list. Its
possible to choose various pylons and for everyone, the
arrangement data has to be entered.
Delete A pylon may be removed from the list. The respective
arrangement data will get lost.
x (L1) x-coordinate in m of phase conductor L1 related to the pylon
(see remark below).
y (L1) y-coordinate in m of phase conductor L1 from earth.
x (L2) x-coordinate in m of phase conductor L2 related to the
pylon.
x (L3) x-coordinate in m of phase conductor L3 related to the
pylon.
Circuit data calculation
Twisted Indicates, if the phase conductors of the overhead line are
twisted or not. The symmetrical -twisting will be assumed
(cyclical transposition of the phase conductors at 1/3 and
2/3 of the line). The input is valid for each line (phase
system).
rho E Earth resistivity in m. Typical values are: Rock: greater
3000 m; Stone floor, Slate: 1000..3000 m; gneiss,
granite: 10000 m; dry sand, gravel: 200..1200 m; wed
sand, chalky soil: 70..200 m; field: 50..100 m; clay, loam:
100..50 m; marshy soil, alluvial land: smaller 20 m.
Default value: 100 m.
Calculate The line parameters will be calculated based on the data

entered in the Pylons tab. The result will be indicated in the

Params tab.
Earth conductor
Active Defines, whether an earth conductor exists or not. If it is
active, it will be considered for the calculation.
R Specific resistance in /km of the earth conductor at 20
Celsius.
Diameter Diameter of the earth conductor in cm.
Permeability Relative permeability of the earth conductor. Typical
values are: copper, aluminium conductors: =1.0;
aluminium/steel conductors with one layer aluminium:
~5..10; aluminium/steel conductors with cross section ratio
greater equal 6: ~1.0; steel conductors: =25.0 .
X x-coordinate in m of the earth conductor related to the pylon
(see remark below).
Y y-coordinate of the earth conductor in m from earth.
If a phase does not exist its input data remains zero.
Remark to the Coordinate Input:
Y axis
Earth conductors
Phase conductors
X axis
0
Fig. 4.1 Pylon arrangement
Earth or phase conductors, which are left of the pylon, must be entered with
negative x-coordinate. Conductors, which are right of the pylon, must be
entered with positive x-coordinate.

Line-Compensation
Name Name of element
For the primary and the secondary side of the line, the following parameters
have to be introduced, if there is a line compensation:
P(1) () Active power of positive sequence
Q(1) () Reactive power of positive sequence
P(0) SP Active power of zero sequence
Q(0) SP Reactive power of zero sequence
Active () The user can define, which portion in % of the
compensation is active.
Line-Info
Line-Reliability
Line-User Data
Line-More

Investment Data
Line Loads
For the description of the parameters for Line Loads see chapter Line Load
on page 4-146.
Recommended Values for Line Zero Sequence Data:

The zero sequence data of a line are dependent on the line type (cable or
overhead line), of its structure and of its laying (cable). In reference / 3 /
recommended values are shown.
Description of the Model (Line)
R X
Y11 Y22
Ycomp1 Ycomp2
B11 G22
G11 B22
Fig. 4.2 Model of a line
The model parameters of the positive and zero sequence are calculated as fol-
lows:
Positive sequence Zero sequence

R = R(1) length R = R(0) length
X = X(1) length X = X(0) length
B = 2PIfC(1) length B = 2PIfC(0) length
G11 = G / 2 G11 = 0.0

B11 = B / 2 B11 = B / 2
G22 = G / 2 G22 = 0.0
B22 = B / 2 B22 = B / 2
Ycomp1 = G1s + jB1s Ycomp1 = G1s + jB1s
Ycomp2 = G2s + jB2s Ycomp2 = G2s + jB2s
Y11 = G11 + jB11 + Ycomp1 Y11 = G11 + jB11 + Ycomp1
Y22 = G22 + jB22 + Ycomp2 Y22 = G22 + jB22 + Ycomp2
If the input values P1(1,0), Q1(1,0),

P2(1,0), Q2(1,0) unequal zero, it is:
G1s = (P1*P1 + Q1*Q1) / (P1*Un) G1s = (P1*P1 + Q1*Q1) / (P1*Un)
B1s = (P1*P1 + Q1*Q1) / (Q1*Un) B1s = (P1*P1 + Q1*Q1) / (Q1*Un)
G2s = (P2*P2 + Q2*Q2) / (P2*Un) G2s = (P2*P2 + Q2*Q2) / (P2*Un)
B2s = (P2*P2 + Q2*Q2) / (Q2*Un) B2s = (P2*P2 + Q2*Q2) / (Q2*Un)
Further it is:
L = X / (2PIf)
R_T = R[1+0.0039(T-20)] R_T = R[1+0.0039(T-20)]
Meaning:
f System frequency
T Max. permitted temperature
R_T Reactance at temperature T
Ycomp1 Admittance of the line compensation on side 1
Ycomp2 Admittance of the line compensation on side 2
In case the minimum short circuit current is calculated R_T will be taken
instead of R (by 20 C).
Remark: C(1) res. Y(1) are not used in a short circuit calculation according to
IEC.
Model for Harmonic Analysis

A distributed parameter line model is used for modeling the line. The series
and shunt elements are calculated from the exact line equation for each
frequency. Only the positive sequence is considered. The series impedance
Z12 between the nodes 1 and 2 of the line is calculated as:

Z12 = ZW ( f ) sinh( g ( f ))
The shunt impedances are:
Z1 ( f ) = Z 2 ( f ) = ZW ( f ) coth( g ( f ) / 2 )
The values are for the equation: U =ZI
ZW means the natural impedance and g means the propagation constant of

the line. Neglecting the resistant to earth, the following formulas are valid for
ZW and g:
R1 ( f ) + j 2 f L1 ( f )
ZW ( f ) =
G1 + j 2 f C1
g ( f ) = ( R1 ( f ) + j 2 f L1 ( f )) (G1 + j 2 f C1 ) l
It means:
F arbitrary frequency
L1(f) frequency dependent inductance of line in Henry/km
R1(f) frequency dependent resistance of line in Ohm/km
C1 frequency independent capacitance of line in F/km
G1 frequency independent conductance of line in S/km
L length of line in km.
If the frequency dependency of X1 and/or R1 are given, the values L1(f) and/or
R1(f) are calculated from X1 and R1.

Asymmetrical Line
This chapter describes the parameters of the Data Input Dialog of an

asymmetrical line and the corresponding model.
Asymmetrical Line - Parameters

Units).
Phase () Phase values for resistance R in Ohm/km or see Units.
values for R
Phase () Phase values for reactance X in Ohm/km or see Units.
values for
X
Phase () Phase values for capacitance C in F/km or see Units.
values for C
T perm SP Max. permitted temperature in C for the calculation of
minimum short circuit currents. The default value is 80
C.
Red. factor L Reduction factor. Ir will be corrected to:
Ir min = red.fact. * Ir min; Ir max = red.fact. * Ir max
No. of lines () Number of parallel lines between starting and ending
node.
Q Cross-section of the line in mm2 . A line can be
displayed with different line width according to the cross

section (see menu option "Line Width" in chapter "Menu

Options").
Cable Indicates, whether the line is a cable or not. The cables
and the overhead lines can be displayed with different
line types (see menu option "Edit Diagram Properties -
Lines").
Overhead Indicates, whether the line is overhead or not. The
overhead lines and the cables can be displayed with
different line types (see menu option "Edit Diagram
Properties -Lines").
Switchable L Indicates, if the line is switchable for calculation of
optimal separation point.
Asymmetrical Line - Pylons

The user has the possibility to calculate the parameters of an overhead line
with the help of the Pylons tab in the line data input dialog. With this function,
the parameters of one single line will be calculated by inserting the conductors
characteristics and the arrangement data. To be able to enter the arrangement
data, its necessary to choose one or more pylons. The respective pylons have
to be entered before graphically from the Symbol Window (see chapter Pylon
on page 4-33).
If there are coupled asymmetrical lines, it is recommended to use the
asymmetrical line - coupling editor, which calculates the coupling impedances
and the parameters of all the considered lines (see chapter Asymmetrical
Line-Coupling on page 4-28).
Phase conductors
Conductors per Bundle conductors can also be entered and calculated. The
bundle number of the conductor elements can be specified here.
Distance Distance of the conductor elements in cm or inch. Typical
value: 40 cm.
Diameter Diameter of a conductor element in cm or inch.
R Specific resistance in /km or /miles or /1000ft of the
phase conductors at 20 Celsius.
Sag Sag h of the conductors in m or in feet. For the parameter
calculation the y-values are corrected as follows:
ynew = yinp - 0.7h.

Pylon data
Insert A pylon, entered before, may be selected from a list. Its
possible to choose various pylons and for everyone, the
arrangement data has to be entered.
Delete A pylon may be removed from the list. The respective
arrangement data will get lost.
x (L1) x-coordinate in m or feet of phase conductor L1 related to
the pylon (see remark below).
y (L1) y-coordinate in m or feet of phase conductor L1 from earth.
the pylon.
the pylon.
Circuit data calculation
twisted or not. The symmetrical beta-twisting will be
assumed (cyclical transposition of the phase conductors at
1/3 and 2/3 of the line). The input is valid for each line
(phase system).
rho E Earth resistivity in m. Typical values are: Rock: greater
Calculate The line parameters will be calculated based on the data
entered in the Pylons tab. The result will be indicated in the
Params tab.
Earth conductor
Active Defines, whether an earth conductor exists or not. If it is
active, it will be considered for the calculation.
R Specific resistance in /km of the earth conductor at 20
Celsius.
Permeability Relative permeability of the earth conductor. Typical
values are: copper, aluminium conductors: =1.0;
aluminium/steel conductors with one layer aluminium:

~5..10; aluminium/steel conductors with cross section ratio

greater equal 6: ~1.0; steel conductors: =25.0 .
X x-coordinate in m or feet of the earth conductor related to
the pylon (see remark below).
Y y-coordinate in m or feet of the earth conductor from earth.
Remark to the Coordinate Input:
Y axis
Earth conductors
Phase conductors
X axis
0
Fig. 4.3 Pylon arrangement
Earth or phase conductors, which are left of the pylon, must be entered with
negative x-coordinate. Conductors, which are right of the pylon, must be
entered with positive x-coordinate.
Asymmetrical Line - Info

Asymmetrical Line - Reliability


Asymmetrical Line - User Data

Asymmetrical Line - More
Investment Data
Description of the Model (Asymmetrical Line)

Asymmetrical lines are entered in the phase system, L1, L2, L3 with or without
earthing conductor. The line will be described with two symmetrical matrices as
follows:
U L1 Z L1 L1 Z L1 L 2 Z L1 L3 Z L1 N I L1
U Z Z L 2 L 2 Z L 2 L3 Z L 2 N I L 2
L 2 = L1 L 2 with Z = R + jX
U L3 Z L1 L3 Z L 2 L3 Z L 3 L 3 Z L 3 N I L 3

U N Z L1 N Z L 2 N Z L 3 N ZN N I N
I L1 YL1 L1 YL1 L 2 YL1 L3 YL1 N U L1

I Y YL 2 L 2 YL 2 L3 YL 2 N U L 2
L 2 = L1 L 2
I L 3 YL1 L3 YL 2 L3 YL3 L3 YL 3 N U L 3

I N YL1 N YL 2 N YL 3 N YN N U N
Corresponding to the line phasing, elements in the matrix can be set to zero.
No values for these elements should be entered in the input mask. For
example, for a single phase line L1N only the elements for L1-L1, L1-N and N-
N must be entered.

If there is no earthing conductor the values can be set to zero. The impedance
and admittance values can be calculated from the conductor arrangement in
the Pylons tab.
During the network calculation the neutral conductor will be reduced: UN = 0.0.
The 4x4 matrices will become two 3x3 matrices. These matrices can be trans-
formed into the symmetrical component system with the help of the
transformation matrix [Z012] = [T]-1[ZL1L2L3][T]:
1 1 1
[T ] = 1 a 2 a with a = -0.5 + j0.5 * 3

1 a a 2
Remark
It is recommended to enter lines in a compact way. A 3-phase line from node A
to B can theoretically be entered as three single phase lines, which are
coupled between each other. In this way the program will work not only with the
current circuit resp. the series impedance matrices but also with the coupling
matrices. This increases the calculation effort. The better way is to represent
the 3-phase line with one 3-phase line. The same is valid for a 2-phase line.
In case of a single phase or a two phase system with a neutral conductor

(cable) and omitting all currents in earth, there are two ways to enter the data:
ZL
ZN
1. Addition of ZL and ZN 2. Considering the neutral ZN

U L1 ( ZL + ZN ) 0 0 0 I L1 U L1 ZL 0 0 ZN I L1
U 0 0 0
0 I L 2 U 0 0 0 0 I L 2
L2 = or L 2 =
U L 3 0 0 0 0 I L 3 U L 3 0 0 0 0 I L3

U N 0 0 0 0 I N U N ZN 0 0 ZN I N
The first way is the better way and corresponds to the measurement of the
impedances.

DC Line
This chapter describes the parameters of the Data Input Dialog of a line and
the corresponding line model.
DC Line - Parameters
Type Applicable only with a DC-line library. Pressing the
button "", the type may be chosen and the data can be
Units).
R () Positive sequence resistance in Ohm/km or see Units.
L () Inductance in mH/km. Not used for steady state
calculations.
DC Line - Sections
Line sections are not allowed for DC lines.
DC Line - Pylons
Line pylons are not considered for DC lines.

DC Line - Info
DC Line - Reliability
DC Line - User Data

DC Line - More
Investment Data
Description of the Model (DC Line) for steady state calculation
RL
Fig. 4.4 Model of a DC line
RL = R*Length

Line-Coupling
To insert line-coupling data, first the line-coupling symbol has to be chosen in

the symbol window and pasted to the lines, which are coupled together. If the
coupling impedances and the line data are known, they directly can be entered
in the line-coupling and the line data input dialog, respectively. There exists the
possibility to calculate these data by entering the information about the
conductors characteristics and the conductors arrangements data in the line-
coupling data input. By pressing the button "Calculate" in the Impedances tab,
the results will be written into the line-parameters and the line-coupling-
impedances.
Coupling group
A coupling group can consist of maximum 6 lines (systems).
Name Name of coupling group

Earth SP By pressing the ""-button the earth conductors of the
conductors coupling group may be chosen.
Phase SP By pressing the ""-button the phase conductors may
conductors be chosen for every system of the coupling group .
Coupling-Impedances
The coupling impedances can be entered after having entered the coupled
lines (systems). These data and the line parameters can also be calculated, if
the arrangement data is known and entered in the Arrangement tab. For each
coupling (e.g. 1-2: system 1 and system 2; 1-3: system 1 and system 3) the
following data can be entered or calculated:
R(1) SP Positive sequence mutual resistance in /km or /mile

or /1000ft.
X(1) SP Positive sequence mutual reactance in /km or /mile
or /1000ft.
Y(1) SP Positive sequence mutual admittance in S/km or S
/mile or S /1000ft.
R(0) SP Zero sequence mutual resistance in /km or /mile or
/1000ft.

X(0) SP Zero sequence mutual reactance in /km or /mile or

/1000ft.
Y(0) SP Zero sequence mutual admittance in S/km or S /mile
or S /1000ft.
Length SP Length of mutual coupling lc in km or mile or 1000ft.
Calculation By pressing the button Calculation, the Coupling

Impedances and the line parameters will be calculated,
based on the arrangement data.
Coupling-Conductors
Earth conductor (Cond.1 Cond.3)

R Specific resistance in /km or /mile or /1000ft of the
earth conductors at 20 Celsius.
Sag Sag h of the conductors in m or feet. For the parameter
Ynew = yinp - 0.7h.
Phase conductors (System 1 System 6)
No. con. elem. Bundle conductors can also be entered and calculated. The
number of the conductor elements can be specified here.
Dist. con. elem. Distance of the conductor elements in cm or inch. Typical
value: 40 cm.
Diameter Diameter of a conductor element in cm or inch.
R Specific resistance in /km or /mile or /1000ft of the
phase conductors at 20 Celsius.
Sag Sag h of the conductors in m or feet. For the parameter
Ynew = yinp - 0.7h.
Coupling-Arrangement
General Data

Re Earth resistivity in m. Typical values are: Rock: greater

Permeab. Relative permeability of the earth conductor. Typical values
are: copper, aluminium conductors: =1.0; aluminium/steel
conductors with one layer aluminium: ~5..10;
aluminium/steel conductors with cross section ratio greater
equal 6: ~1.0; steel conductors: =25.0 .
twisted or not. The symmetrical -twisting will be assumed
(cyclical transposition of the phase conductors at 1/3 and
2/3 of the line). The input is valid for each line (phase
system).
Earth conductors (Cond. 1 Cond. 3)
X x-coordinate in m or feet of the earth conductor related to
the pylon.
Y y-coordinate in m or feet of the earth conductor from earth.
Earth cond. 13 checkbox: Defines, whether an earth conductor exists or
not.
Phase conductors (System 1 System 6)
the pylon.
the pylon.
the pylon.

Coupling-Info
Coupling-Reliability
Coupling-User Data
Description of the Model (Line Coupling)

The line couplings are only considered in the short circuit calculation (IEC and
superposition method), in the module Distance Protection and for asymmetrical
load flow. The formula to calculate the per unit values are:
Rc(1) = Rc(1) lc / Zn rc(0) = Rc(0) lc / Zn

Xc(1) = Xc(1) lc / Zn xc(0) = Xc(0) lc / Zn
Yc(1) = Yc(1) lc Zn yc(0) = Yc(0) lc Zn
The nominal system impedance Zn is calculated as follows.

Coupling between systems with the same nominal system voltage Un
Zn = Sn / Un.
Coupling between systems with unequal nominal system voltage Un1,
Un2
Zn = Sn / (Un1 Un2).
Sn: base power 100 MVA (set by the program).
Asymmetrical line coupling

A line coupling is asymmetrical when at least one line has asymmetrical
structure. The matrix for two coupled lines are:

U 1L1 I1L1
U 1 I1
L2 L2
U 1L3 [ Z11 ] [ Zc12 ] I1L3
=
U 2 L1 [ Zc12 ] [ Z 22 ] I 2 L1
U 2 L 2 I 2 L2

U 2 L3 I 2 L3
The matrices Z11 and Z22 are current circuit data or series impedance data. The
elements of these matrices can be entered in the dialog box for lines. The
matrix Zc12 is the coupling matrix between the two 3-phase lines (systems).
The elements of this matrix can be entered in the dialog box for line couplings
(see above).
U 1L1 Zc L1 L1 Zc L1 L 2 Zc L1 L3 I 2 L1
U 1 = Zc Zc L 2 L 2 Zc L 2 L3 I 2 L 2
L 2 L1 L 2
U 1L 3 Zc L1 L 3 Zc L 2 L 3 Zc L3 L3 I 2 L3
The coupling impedance and admittance matrices can be calculated from the
conductor arrangement.
The coupling matrix can be transformed into the symmetrical component

system with the help of the transformation matrix.
It is possible to couple at maximum six 3-phase lines (systems). Each line

(system) can have asymmetrical structure, that means any phase(s) can be
omitted.

Pylon
The pylon symbol may be placed somewhere near the corresponding lines. In
the data input dialog of a pylon, no parameter data may be entered. In the lines
and earth conductors the pylons have to be selected and the arrangement data
can be entered and modified in the Pylons tab of the line data input dialog, see
Line-Pylons in chapter Line on page 4-13.
Pylon-Parameters
Name Name of element
Earth The earth conductors assigned to this pylon are shown with
Conductors its arrangement data.
Lines The lines assigned to this pylon are shown with its
arrangement data.
Draw A drawing shows the pylon with the arrangement of the
assigned lines and earth conductors.
Pylon-Info
Pylon-Reliability
Pylon-User Data

Coupler
This chapter describes the parameters of the Data Input Dialog of a Coupler.
Coupler-Parameters
Ir L Rated current in kA.
Ipmax S Max. allowable peak short circuit current in kA.
Remote R Indicates, if the switch is remote controlled.
controlled
Bay R Configuration of the coupler:
configuration DCD: Disconnecter Circuitbreaker - Disconnecter
D: Disconnecter
r(1) D Positive sequence resistance in per unit.
x(1) D Positive sequence reactance in per unit.
r(0) D Zero sequence resistance in per unit.
x(0) D Zero sequence reactance in per unit.
Remark:
The resistance and reactance for the switch model are only necessary to be
introduced, when the switches are not reduced during calculation (see
"Reduce" option in calculation parameters of the different calculation modules).
For load flow calculations with the method "Extended Newton Rapson" these
impedances are never relevant, because this LF-method is modeling the
switches without impedances.
For Dynamic Analysis the impedance data always have to be entered.
Coupler Info

Coupler-Reliability
Coupler-User Data

Reactor
This chapter describes the parameters of the Data Input Dialog of a reactor
and the corresponding reactor model.
Reactor-Parameters
Type Applicable only with a reactor library. Pressing the
button "", the type may be chosen and the data can
be transferred from the predefined library.
Ur () Rated voltage in kV.
Ir () Rated current in A.
uRr(1) () Copper losses in % of Sr=3UrIr.
ukr(1) () Short circuit voltage in % of Sr=3UrIr.
Reactor-Info
Reactor-Reliability
Reactor-User Data
Reactor-More


Investment Data
Description of the Model (Reactor)
R X
Fig. 4.5 Model for a reactor
The model parameters of the positive and zero sequence are calculated as fol-
lows:
Positive and Zero Sequence
Z = ukr(1)Ur/(3Ir100)
R = uRr(1)Ur/(3Ir100) X = (Z - R)

Transformer
This chapter describes the parameters of the Data Input Dialog of a

transformer and the corresponding transformer model.
Transformer-Parameters
Type Applicable only with a transformer library. Pressing the
Un1 () Nominal voltage of the primary winding node (just for
information).
Un2 () Nominal voltage of the secondary winding node (just for
information).
Ur1, Ur2 () Rated voltage of the primary and secondary winding,
based on the transformation ratio.
Sr () Rated power in MVA.
URr(1) () Rated positive sequence copper losses of winding 1
and 2 in % with respect to Sr and Ur1 at tap = tap r.
Ukr(1) () Rated positive sequence short circuit voltage in % with
respect to Sr and Ur1 at tap = tap r.
URr(0) SP Rated zero sequence copper losses for winding 1 and 2
in % with respect to Sr and Ur1 at tap = tap r.
Ukr(0) SP Rated zero sequence short circuit voltage in % with
U01(0) SP Rated zero sequence open circuit voltage in % with
respect to Sr and Ur1 at tap = tap r and primary side
(feeding from primary side).
U02(0) SP Rated zero sequence open circuit voltage in % with
respect to Sr and Ur1 at tap = tap r and secondary side
(feeding from secondary side).
I0 LMDR Open circuit current in % with respect to Sr and Ur1.
P fe LMDR Iron core losses in kW.
On-load LMDR If checked, the on-load tapchanging transformers will
tapchanger be regulated automatically during load flow calculation.
This parameter is also considered for the impedance
correction in the short circuit calculation according to
IEC60909.

Unit SP Indicates whether the transformer is part of a power

transformer station unit.
Compens. SP Indicates, whether the two-winding transformer has a
Winding compensation winding. If there is one, the YY-trans-
former will be modeled according to Fig. 4.8.
Switchable L Indicates whether the optimal separation point proce-
dure is allowed to connect or disconnect this element.
Vector SP Wiring of the windings in nodes 1 and 2. Default value
Group is YD.05. The common vector groups can be selected
from a list. The vector groups can be entered according
to:
NEPLAN-Format: After the winding designations a
point and then voltage phase shifting. E.g. YY.00,
YD.05, YZ.5
DVG-Format: If the neutral is brought out, a N or
n must be set after the corresponding winding
designation. E.g. YNYn, YND5, YNZn5
pTap LMDR Deviation in % of transformer ratio from nominal Tap.
Only necessary for Short Circuit calculations by
IEC60909 (2001) and for transformers without on-load
tap-changer, which make part of a power station unit.
Operating values before SC
Operat. SP For Short Circuit calculation with the norm IEC60909
values active (2001) an impedance correction factor is introduced in
the calculation equations.
Check this box, if longterm operating conditions before
the short circuit are known, and the correction factor
shall be calculated by using the following parameters.
Secondary values
Ub max SP Highest operating voltage in kV, before short circuit.
Ib max SP Highest operating current in A, before short circuit.
Cos(phi) SP Angle of power factor, before short circuit.
Primary value
Ub min SP Lowest operating voltage in kV, before short circuit.
Transformer-Limits

Evaluation LM The user can select the criteria for the calculation of the
according to transformer loading. If Ir is activated the current (Ir min
Ir or Sr or Ir max) is taken, if Sr is activated the power (Sr min
or Sr max) is taken as reference.
Ir1 min LM Minimal current in A for the calculation of the
transformer loading on the primary winding. The
loading can be calculated according to Ir min or Ir max
(see load flow calculation parameters).
Ir1 max LM Maximal current in A for the calculation of the
transformer loading on the primary winding. The
Ir2 min LM Minimal current in A for the calculation of the
transformer loading on the secondary winding. The
Ir2 max LM Maximal current in A for the calculation of the
transformer loading on the secondary winding. The
Sr min LM Minimal power in MVA for the calculation of the
transformer loading. The loading can be calculated
according to Sr min or Sr max (see load flow calculation
parameters).
Sr max LM Maximum power in MVA for the calculation of the
according to Sr min or Sr max (see load flow calculation
parameters).
Transformer-Regulation
Tap side LMDR Indicates if the tap location of the tap changer is on the
primary or secondary side.
Controlled LMDR Indicates if the voltage is controlled at the primary or at
node the secondary node of the transformer or if there is a
remote control.
With the remote control option, a neighboring node can
be controlled with the transformer. The controlled node
can be selected from a list (press "").
Tap min LMDR Minimum tap settings of the regulated transformer.

Tap r LMDR Rated tap setting.

Tap max LMDR Maximum tap settings of the regulated transformer.
Tap act LMDR Actual tap setting. This value is used to calculate the
ratio of the transformer. Tap act = Tap r has to be set, if
the ratio is equal t = Ur1/Ur2.
Ukr(1),Ukr(0) () Positive and zero sequence short circuit voltage in %
Tap min with respect to Sr and Ur1 at tap = tap min.
Ukr(1),Ukr(0) () Rated positive and zero sequence short circuit voltage
Tap r in % with respect to Sr and Ur1 at tap = tap r.
Ukr(1),Ukr(0) () Positive and zero sequence short circuit voltage in %
Tap max with respect to Sr and Ur1 at tap = tap max.
Ukr(1),Ukr(0) () Calculated positive and zero sequence short circuit
Tap act voltage in % with respect to Sr and Ur1 at tap = tap act.
These values are calculated with a quadratic interpola-
tion between Ukr of tap min and tap max. During a load
flow calculation the short circuit voltage will be adapted
according to the tap of the automatically tap changer.
Delta U LMDR Magnitude of the additional voltage per tap step on the
tap location side. This value must be given in % of the
rated voltage on the tap location side of the
transformer. A negative value can be entered. In this
case the taps are mirrored (see below).
U set LMDR Setting voltage in % of nominal voltage of the controlled
node. This value can also be entered in the node mask
(see "Node Data Input").
This value will be a function of the load current, if com-
pounding is active. The value must be between Umin
and Umax (see below).
The transformer will regulate to this voltage if the "Auto
regulated" option (Params tab) is checked.
Beta LMDR Angle in of the additional voltage on the tap location
side.
P set LMDR Regulated power flow of primary winding in % with
respect to Sr. For negative power flow insert negative
value. This value is only valid for phase shifting trans-
formers (Angle Beta > 0.0).
Compounding
Active LMDR Indicates, if compounding is active or not (see below). If
the compounding is not active, the set value will be kept
constant at Uset.

Imin LMDR Minimal load current in % of the rated transformer

current at the controlled side.
Imax LMDR Maximum load current in % of the rated transformer
current at controlled side.
Umin LMDR Minimal voltage of the controlled node in %. The value
Unom must be between Umin and Umax (see above).
Umax LMDR Maximum voltage of the controlled node in %. The
value Unom must be between Umin and Umax (see
above).
Transformer-Earthing
Primary side SP The user can choose between three types of earthing
for the primary side: direct, impedance, isolated.
Re1, Xe1 SP Real- and imaginary part of earthing impedance of side
1 in Ohm. (only for impedance earthing)
Secondary SP The user can choose between three types of earthing
side for the secondary side: direct, impedance, isolated.
Re2, Xe2 SP Real- and imaginary part of earthing impedance of side
2 in Ohm. (only for impedance earthing)
Active SP For the primary and the secondary side, the user can
define, which portion in % of the earthing impedance is
active.
Transformer-Info
Transformer-Reliability

Transformer-User Data
Transformer-More
Investment Data
Regulation: Tap settings

The following table shows different possibilities to enter Delta U and to define
the Tap changer side.
Delta U positive Tap changer at Tap changer at secondary
Constant voltage at primary side side
primary side
Tap act = Tap min highest secondary lowest secondary voltage
voltage
Tap act = Tap max lowest secondary highest secondary voltage
voltage
Delta U negative Tap changer at Tap changer at secondary

Constant voltage at primary side side
primary side
Tap act = Tap min lowest secondary highest secondary voltage
voltage
Tap act = Tap max highest secondary lowest secondary voltage
voltage

Compounding
If compounding and automatic voltage regulation is active, the set value for the
voltage of the controlled node will be changed in function of the transformer
load current and according to the characteristic below:
Uset
Umax
Itr
Imin Imax
Umin
Fig. 4.6 Compounding Characteristic
Uset means the set value for the regulated node voltage. Itr is the current,
which flows through the transformer during the calculation. If Itr is zero, the set
value for the regulated node voltage is the same as the entered value. Possible
values are: Umin = 95%, Umax = 105%, Imin=Imax=80%.
Recommended Values for Transformer Zero Sequence Reactances:

The ratio between the reactances of the positive and zero sequence are
dependent on the core structure and of the vector group of the transformer:
Vector group Yz with for all transformer X(0)/X(1) = 0.1 .. 0.15

earthing at z -winding types:
Vector group Dy- or Yd with 3-salient pole core: X(0)/X(1) = 0.7 .. 1.0
earthing at y-winding (Sr small: X(0)/X(1) = 1.0)
5-salient pole core: X(0)/X(1) = 1.0
3 one pole
transformers: X(0)/X(1) = 1.0
Vector group Yy with for all transformer X(0)/X(1) = 1.0 .. 2.4 1)
compensation winding and types:
earthing at y-winding
Vector group Yy- or Yz 3-salient pole core: X(0)/X(1) = 3.0 .. 10.0 1)
without compensation

winding and earthing at y- 5-salient pole core: X(0)/X(1) = 10.0 .. 100.0 1)

winding: 3 one pole
transformers: X(0)/X(1) = 10.0 .. 100.0 1)
1)
Very dependent on the transformer's structure and the ratio between the
leakage flux to useful flux (the leakage flux goes partly through the transformer
tank).
Remark:
Regulated transformers are only regulated automatically during load flow
calculation, when the "Auto regulated" option in the Params tab is checked.
Description of the Model (Transformer)

The models for load flow, short circuit and harmonic analysis calculations are
different. The following figure shows the model of a transformer for load flow
calculation.
R X
Y/2 Y/2
t:1
Fig. 4.7 Model of a transformer for load flow calculation
The model parameters of the positive sequence are calculated as follows:

Positive sequence
Z = Ukr(1)Ur1/(Sr100) R = URr(1)Ur1/(Sr100)
X = (Z-R) YFe = PFe/Ur1
Y0 = I0Sr/(100Ur1) Y = YFe - j(Y0-YFe)

Calculation of Regulated Transformer

The voltage and ratio are calculated as follows:
Tap max
Tap act

Tap mit
U
Tap min
Ur reg
Ur
Fig. 4.8 Regulated Transformer
Regulation on Primary Side

Ur1reg = Ur1 + (Tapact - Tapr) Ur1U/100[cos()+jsin()]
treg = Ur1reg/Ur2
Regulation on Secondary Side

Ur2reg = Ur2 + (Tapact - Tapr) Ur2U/100[cos()+jsin()]
treg = Ur1/Ur2reg
If = 0 the voltage can be controlled.

If = 90 the active power can be controlled.
If 0 < < 90 the power or the voltage can be controlled.
Transformer Model for Short Circuit Calculation

The following figure shows the transformer model for a short circuit calculation
of positive sequence.
R X
t:1

Fig. 4.9 Transformer model for short circuit calculation of positive sequence
The transformer model of the zero sequence is dependent on the vector group
(see Fig. 4.8 - 4.10).
3 Ze1 Z 3 Ze2
t:1
If Ze1 < 100.0 and Ze2 >>:

3 Ze1 Z
If U01(0) 0.0 and U02(0) 0.0:

3 Ze1 Z1 Z2 3 Ze2
Zh
t:1
Fig. 4.10 Transformer model for short circuit calculation (vector group YY) of zero
sequence

3 Ze1
Fig. 4.11 Transformer model for short circuit calculation (vector group YD or ZY) of
zero sequence
Fig. 4.12 Transformer model for short circuit calculation (vector group DD) of zero
sequence
The model parameters of the positive and zero sequence are calculated as
follows:

Z = Ukr(1)Ur1/(Sr100) Z = Ukr(0)Ur1/(Sr100)
R = URr(1)Ur1/(Sr100) R = URr(0)Ur1/(Sr100)
X = (Z-R) X = (Z-R)
Z = R + jX Z = R + jX
Ze1 = Re1 + jXe1 Ze2 = Re2 + jXe2
Z10 = U01(0)Ur1/(Sr100)
X10 = (Z10-R)
Z10 = R + jX10
Z20 = U02(0)Ur1/(Sr100)
X20 = (Z20-R)
Z20 = R + jX20

The impedances Z1, Z2 and Zh in Fig. 4.8 can be calculated from the following
equations (Ze1=Ze2=0.0):
Z10 = Z1 + Zh
Z20 = Z2 + Zh
Z = Z1 + Z1Z2 / (Z1+Z2) Z1 + Z2
Z10, Z20 and Z are input values and given
above.
Note:
For Short circuit calculations according to IEC the impedance Z will be
multiplied by a correction K:
IEC909 (1988)
Unit transformer: K = cmax /2/
Network transformer: K = 1.0
IEC60909
Unit transformer with on-load tapchanger:
2 2
Un U rTLV c max
K=
1 + xd " xT sin rG
2 2
U rG U rTHV
Unit transformer without on-load tapchanger:
Un U c max
K= rTLV (1 pT )
U rG (1 + pG ) U rTHV 1 + xd " sin rG
Network transformer:
c max Un c max
K = 0.95 or K=
1 + 0.6 xT U b 1 + xT I b sin
I
r
b
with
Un Nominal system voltage of connecting node
Ub Highest operating voltage before SC
Ib Highest operating current before SC
phib Angle of power factor before SC
Ir Rated current of transformer
xT Transformer reactance
cmax maximum voltage factor
UrTLV Transformer rated voltage on low-voltage side

UrTHV Transformer rated voltage on high-voltage side

UrG Rated voltage of unit generator
pG Deviation of generator terminal voltage from rated voltage
(1+pT) Used off-load tap

Asymmetrical Transformer
This chapter describes the parameters of the Data Input Dialog of an asym-
metrical transformer and the corresponding transformer model.
Asym. Transformer-Parameters
Type Applicable only with an asymmetrical transformer
library. Pressing the button "", the type may be
chosen and the data can be transferred from the
predefined library.
Switchable L Indicates whether the optimal separation point proce-
dure is allowed to connect or disconnect this element.
Negative LMDR Mark this checkbox, if you wish the transformer to have
polarity negative polarity, like shown below.
L L
positive polarity
N N
L L
negative polarity
N N
Un1 () Nominal voltage of the primary winding node (just for

information).
Un2 () Nominal voltage of the secondary winding node (just for
information).
Ur1, Ur2 () Rated voltage of the primary and secondary winding,
based on the transformation ratio.
When the phase configuration is Phase to Neutral
(L1N, L2N or L3N), then the value for the rated voltage
Ur has to be given as a phase to earth value.
Sr () Rated power in MVA.
URr(1) () Rated positive sequence copper losses of winding 1
and 2 in % with respect to Sr and Ur1 at tap = tap r.
Ukr(1) () Rated positive sequence short circuit voltage in % with
I0 LMDR Open circuit current in % with respect to Sr and Ur1.

P fe LMDR Iron core losses in kW.

Phases () Indicates the phases of the transformer on primary and
secondary side. If the input of the phases and the input
of the vector group don't match together, the phase
indication will be decisive.
When the phase configuration is Phase to Neutral
(L1N, L2N or L3N), then the value for the rated voltage
Ur has to be given as a phase to earth value.
Vector () The following vector groups may be chosen:
Group 1.) E E
2.) E 2E
3.) 2E E
The transformer side with E has a Phase-Phase or
Phase-Neutral connection.
The transformer side with 2E has a Phase-Neutral-
Phase connection.
See the model of the asymmetrical transformer.
Regulation
Tap act LMDR Actual tap setting. This value is used to calculate the
ratio of the transformer. Tap act = Tap r has to be set, if
the ratio is equal t = Ur1/Ur2.
Delta U LMDR Magnitude of the additional voltage per tap step on the
tap location side. This value must be given in % of the
rated voltage on the tap location side of the
transformer. A negative value can be entered. In this
case the taps are mirrored (see below).
Tap side LMDR Indicates, if the tap location of the tap changer is on the
primary or secondary side.
Controlled LMDR Indicates, if the voltage is controlled on primary or on
bus secondary side of the transformer.
The transformer will regulate to this voltage if the "Auto
regulated" option is checked.
Auto LMDR Indicates whether the transformer should be regulated

regulated automatically for the load flow calculation.
Asym. Transformer-Info
Asym. Transformer-Reliability
Asym. Transformer-User Data

Asym. Transformer-More
Investment Data
Network Elements-Element - More on page 4-6
Description of the Model (Asymmetrical Transformer)

Depending of the vector group of the asymmetrical transformer, E/E or 2E/E,
the following models are valid:

Yh/2 Yh/2
t:1
a) Model E/E
X
1 : 2a
U 1R U 2R
Yh/4 Yh/4
U 1N
Yh/4 Yh/4
U 1S U 2S
1 : 2a
X
b) Model 2E/E
Fig. 4.13 Model of the asymmetrical transformer

Three Windings Transformer
This chapter describes the parameters of the Data Input Dialog of a three
windings transformer and the corresponding transformer model.
3W-Transformer-Parameters
Type Applicable only with a 3W-Transformer library.
Pressing the button "", the type may be chosen
and the data can be transferred from the predefined
library.
Un1 () Nominal voltage of the primary winding node (just
for information).
Un2 () Nominal voltage of the secondary winding node
(just for information).
Un3 () Nominal voltage of the tertiary winding node (just
for information).
Ur1, Ur2, Ur3 () Rated voltage of the primary, secondary and tertiary
winding, based on the transformation ratio.
Sr12, Sr23, Sr31 () Rated power in MVA.
12: primary-secondary,
23: secondary-tertiary,
31: tertiary-primary.
URr(1)12, 23, 31 () Rated positive sequence copper losses in % with
respect to Sr12, Sr23, Sr31 and Ur1, Ur2, Ur3.
Ukr(1)12, 23, 31 () Rated positive sequence short circuit voltage with
Ukr(0) 12,23,31 SP Rated zero sequence short circuit voltage with
I0 LMDR Open circuit current in % with respect to Sr12 and
Ur1. This value is only considered in the Loadflow
calculation, method Extended Newton Raphson.
P fe LMDR Iron core losses in kW. This value is only
considered in the Loadflow calculation, method
Extended Newton Raphson.
Auto regulated LMDR Indicates if the transformer in the load flow
calculation should be automatically regulated. The

following is assumed, when calculating the

Loadflow with Newton Raphson or Current Iteration
method:
If the box is checked, the program assumes a
two-windings transformer with a compensation
winding. In this case the model of a two-
winding transformer is taken (see
"Transformer" on page 4-38). The tertiary node
will be neglected. No load can be connected to
the tertiary node.
Compens. SP Indicates, whether the three-winding transformer
Winding has a compensation winding. If there is one, the
YYY-transformer will be accurately modeled in the
zero system.
Vector group SP Winding connection in nodes 1, 2 and 3. The
winding coefficient has to be given, with respect to
node 1 according to VDE 0532/1. The common
vector groups can be selected from a list. The
vector groups can be entered according to:
NEPLAN-Format: After the winding
designations a point and then voltage phase
shiftings, which are also separated with a point.
The coefficient of the winding in node 1 must be
set to zero or it can be neglected (e.g. YYD.0.5
instead of YYD.0.0.5).
DVG-Format: If the neutrals are brought out,
a N or n must be set after the corresponding
winding designation. E.g. YNYn0d5
3W-Transformer-Limits
Ir 1,2,3 min LM Minimal current on primary, secondary and tertiary
side in A for the calculation of the transformer
loading. The loading can be calculated according to
Sr min or Sr max resp. Ir min or Ir max (see load
Ir 1,2,3 max LM Maximum current on primary, secondary and
tertiary side in A for the calculation of the
according to Sr min or Sr max resp. Ir min or Ir max


Sr min LM Minimal power in MVA for the calculation of the
Sr max LM Maximum power in MVA for the calculation of the
Evaluation acc. LM The user can select the criteria for the calculation of
to Sr or Ir the transformer loading. If Ir is activated the
currents (Ir 1,2,3 min or Ir 1,2,3 max) are taken, if
Sr is activated the power (Sr min or Sr max) is
taken.
3W-Transformer-Regulation
1st Regulation
Tap side LMDR Indicates if the tap location of the tap changer is on
the primary, secondary or tertiary side.
Controlled node LMDR The node to be controlled must be selected from a
list, press "". If there is no node selected, the tap
location node will be controlled.
Remote control:
A neighboring node can also be controlled with the
transformer. The controlled node can be selected
from a list (press ""). Remote control is only
possible if the input field "Transf.regul." is set to
YES.
Tap act LMDR Actual tap setting. This value is used to calculate
the ratio of the transformer. For the tap calculation
see "Transformer" on page 4-38.
Ukr(1) 12,23,31 () Positive and zero sequence short circuit voltage in
Ukr(0) 12,23,31 % with respect to Sr12, Sr23, Sr31 and Ur1, Ur2,
Ur3 at tap = tap min.
Tap min
Ukr(1) 12,23,31 () Rated positive and zero sequence short circuit

Ukr(0) 12,23,31 voltage in % with respect to Sr12, Sr23, Sr31 and

Tap r Ur1, Ur2, Ur3 at tap = tap r.

Ur3 at tap = tap max.
Tap max
Ur3 at tap = tap act. These values are calculated
Tap act
with a quadratic interpolation between ukr of tap
min and tap max.
dU LMDR Magnitude of the additional voltage per tap step on
the tap location side. This value must be given in %
of the rated voltage on the tap location side of the
transformer. A negative value can be entered. In
this case the taps are mirrored (see "Transformer"
on page 4-38).
Beta LMDR Angle in of the additional voltage on the tap
location side.
P set LMDR Regulated power flow of primary winding in % with
respect to Sr12. For negative power flow insert
negative value. This value is only valid for phase
shifting transformers (Angle Beta > 0.0) and if the
option "Auto regulated" is checked.
U set LMDR Setting voltage in % of nominal voltage of the
controlled node. This value can also be entered in
the node mask (see "Node Data Input").
This value will be a function of the load current, if
compounding is active. The value must be between
Umin and Umax (see below).
The transformer will regulate to this voltage if the
option "Auto regulated" (Params tab) is checked.
2nd Regulation
the primary, secondary or tertiary side.
It can't be the same winding as in the 1st regulation.
The taps of the 2nd regulation can only be changed
manually (it won't be automatically).
Tap min LMDR Minimum tap settings of the 2nd tap changer.
Tap max LMDR Maximum tap settings of the 2nd tap changer.

the ratio of the transformer.
this case the taps are mirrored (see below).
Beta LMDR Angle in of the additional voltage on the tap
location side.
3W-Transformer-Earthing
Primary side () The user can choose between three types of
earthing for the primary side: direct, impedance,
isolated.
Re1, Xe1 SP Real- and imaginary part of earthing impedance of
side 1 in Ohm. (only for impedance earthing)
Secondary side SP The user can choose between three types of
earthing for the secondary side: direct, impedance,
isolated.
Tertiary side SP The user can choose between three types of
earthing for the tertiary side: direct, impedance,
isolated.
Active SP It's possible to define, which portion in % of the
earthing impedance is active on primary, secondary
and tertiary side.
3W-Transformer-Info

3W-Transformer-Reliability
3W-Transformer-User Data
3W-Transformer-More
Investment Data
Network Elements-Element - More on page 4-6
Description of the Model (3-W Transformer)

The three windings transformer will be modeled by three two windings
transformer (models see "Transformer" on page 4-38). The calculation of the
model parameters is:
Positive sequenze Zero sequence

Zij = Ukr(1)ijUri/(Srij100) Zij = Ukr(0)ijUri/(Srij100)
Rij = URr(1)ijUri/(Srij100) Rij = 0
Xij = (Zij-Rij) Xij = Zij
Zij = Rij + jXij Zij = jXij
ij {12, 23, 31}

i {1, 2, 3}

Ze1 = Re1 + jXe1 Ze2 = Re2 + jXe2

Ze3 = Re3 + jXe3
Z1 Z2
1 4 2
Z3
Z1 = 0.5 * (Z12 + Z13 Z23)

Z2 = 0.5 * (Z23 + Z12 Z13)
Z3 = 0.5 * (Z13 + Z23 Z12)
The ficticious node 4 will be internally reduced, thus a 3 winding transformer

will be represented by a 3x3 matrix.

Four Windings Transformer
This chapter describes the parameters of the Data Input Dialog of a 4W-
Transformer and the corresponding transformer model.
4W-Transformer-Parameters
Type Applicable only with a 4W-Transformer library.
and the data can be transferred from the predefined
library.
Un1, Un2, Un3, () Nominal voltage of the primary, secondary, tertiary
Un4 and 2. tertiary winding node.
Ur1, Ur2, Ur3, () Rated voltage of the primary, secondary, tertiary
Ur4 and 2. tertiary winding, based on the transformation
ratio.
Sr1, Sr2, Sr3, () Rated power in MVA of the primary, secondary,
Sr4 tertiary and 2. tertiary winding
URr(1)12, 13, () Rated positive sequence copper losses in % with
14, 23, 24, 34 respect to Sr4 and Ur1, Ur2, Ur3, Ur4.
Ukr(1)12, 13, 14, () Rated positive sequence short circuit voltage with
23, 24, 34 respect to Sr4 and Ur1, Ur2, Ur3, Ur4.
Ukr(0)12, 13, 14, SP Rated zero sequence short circuit voltage with
23, 24, 34 respect to Sr4 and Ur1, Ur2, Ur3, Ur4.
Vector group SP Winding connections in nodes 1, 2, 3 and 4. The
winding coefficient has to be given, with respect to
node 1 according to VDE 0532/1. The common
vector groups can be selected from a list. The
vector groups can be entered according to:
NEPLAN-Format: After the winding
designations a point and then voltage phase
shifting. E.g. YY.00, YD.05, YZ.5
DVG-Format: If the neutral is brought out, a
N or n must be set after the corresponding
winding designation. E.g. YNYn, YND5, YNZn5

4W-Transformer-Regulation
There is no automatic regulation possible for the 4W-Transformer. The tap
have to be changed manually.
the primary, secondary, tertiary or 2. tertiary side.
Tap min LMDR Minimum tap settings of the tap changer.
Tap max LMDR Maximum tap settings of the tap changer.
the ratio of the transformer. For the tap calculation
see "Transformer" on page 4-38.
this case the taps are mirrored (see "Transformer"
on page 4-38).
4W-Transformer-Earthing
Primary side () The user can choose between three types of
earthing for the primary side: direct, impedance,
isolated.
Secondary side () The user can choose between three types of
earthing for the secondary side: direct, impedance,
isolated.
Tertiary side () The user can choose between three types of
isolated.
2. Tertiary side () The user can choose between three types of

isolated.
Active SP It's possible to define, which portion in % of the
earthing impedance is active on primary, secondary
and tertiary and 2. tertiary side.
4W-Transformer-Info
4W-Transformer-Reliability
Dialogs of Network Elements on page 4-3
4W-Transformer-User Data
4W-Transformer-More
Investment Data

Description of the Model (4W-Transformer)

The four windings transformer will be modeled by four two windings
transformer (models see "Transformer" on page 4-38). The calculation of the
model parameters is:

Zij = ukr(1)ijUri/(Sr4100) Zij = ukr(0)ijUri/(Sr4100)
Rij = uRr(1)ijUri/(Sr4100) Rij = 0
Xijij = (Zijij-Rij) Xij = Zij
Zij = Rij + jXij Zij = jXij
ZEi = REi + jXei
ij {12, 13, 14, 23, 24, 34} ; i {1, 2, 3}

e.g. Z24 = ukr(1)24Ur2/(Sr4100)

Shunt
This chapter describes the parameters of the Data Input Dialog of a shunt and
the corresponding shunt model.
Shunt-Parameter
Type Applicable only with a shunt library. Pressing the button
transferred from the predefined library
Control () There are three different type of control modes:
mode fixed: The shunt consists of a fixed value of active
and reactive power.
discrete: The shunt consists of various shunt
elements, which will be connected or disconnected,
depending on the regulated voltage.
continuously: The shunt will be able to change
the reactive power continuously, without steps, in
the defined range.
Ur () Rated voltage in V.
Fixed admittance
P(1) () Positive sequence active power in MW. Dependent on
the phase connectivity (see Info tab) the value must be
entered as phase value.
Q(1) () Positive sequence reactive power in Mvar. Q(1) is
negative for a capacitive load. Dependent on the phase
connectivity (see Info tab) the value must be entered as
phase value.
P(0) SP Zero sequence active power in MW. This value has not
to be entered when entering an asymmetrical shunt. It
will be calculated.
Q(0) SP Zero sequence reactive power in Mvar. Q(0) is negative
for a capacitive load. This value has not to be entered
when entering an asymmetrical shunt. It will be
calculated.
Operating () Indicates if the shunt is capacitive or inductive,
mode depending on the sign of the entered reactive power Q.
(negative value means capacitive mode, positive value
means inductive mode)

Effective () Depending on the operational mode, the predefined

Q-scaling scaling factors for capacitive or inductive Q are taken to
factor calculated the effective scaling factor, which is
displayed in this field. The predefined scaling factors for
the network and zones may be modified in Data -
Operational Data of the menu Edit (see chapter Menu
Options).
The user cant define User Defined Scaling Factors for
the shunts.
Switched admittance blocks
Remote LMDR Check this option, if an other node than the shunt node
controlled has to be controlled. By mouse click on the remote
node may be chosen from a list.
Switched LMDR There may be defined blocks of reactive power, each
admittance one of which consists of various steps.
blocks
Remarks:
The switched shunt elements at a bus may consist entirely of reactors (all
admittance blocks have positive values for dQ) or entirely of capacitor banks
(all admittance blocks have negative values for dQ). In these cases, the shunt
blocks are specified in the order in which they are switched on the bus.
If the switched shunt devices at a bus are a mixture of reactors and capacitors,
the reactor blocks are specified first in the order in which they are switched on,
followed by the capacitor blocks in the order in which they are switched on.
The difference between the continuous and the discrete regulation is only, that
for the continuous mode, the reactive power can vary continuously in the whole
defined range, without steps.
Shunt-Info
Network Elements on page 4-2. The option Phases has additional possibilities
because shunts may be placed as well between phases:
Phases () Indicates the phasing of the element. Possible values are:

- L1L2L3N: Symmetrical shunt impedance

- L1N: Single phase shunt impedance, phase L1
- L1L2: Impedance between phases L1 and L2
Shunt-Reliability
Shunt-User Data
Shunt-More
Investment Data
Description of the Model (Shunt)

Fig. 4.14 Model of shunt
follows:

R = P(1)Ur/(P(1)+Q(1)) R = P(0)Ur/(P(0)+Q(0))
X = Q(1)Ur/(P(1)+Q(1)) X = Q(0)Ur/(P(0)+Q(0))
If Q(1) is given as a negative value, in the module Harmonic analysis the

following is taken for X:
X = -1.0 / X (capacitive).
If an asymmetrical shunt has been entered, the program will transform
the parameters from the phase into the symmetrical component system
with the transformation matrix.

Converter
This chapter describes the parameters of the Data Input Dialog of a Converter
and the corresponding Converter model.
Converter-Parameters
Name () Name of the converter.
Type ()
Converter type
Rectifier, () Indicates, if the converter is a
Inverter - Rectifier
- Inverter
Regulation
Regulation () The converter can be
P: Power regulated
I: Current regulated
A+U: Voltage and angle regulated
Pset () Set value for power regulation in MW.
Umode () Minimum voltage for power regulation (for voltages below
Umode control shifts to constant current with
Iset =Pset/Uset)
Iset () Set value for current regulation in kA.
Uset () Set value for voltage regulation in kV. In case of power
regulation Uset denotes the voltage used for calculating
the new setvalue at the control mode shift (see Umode).
Firing angle
Teta set () Set value for the rectifier firing or inverter margin angle in
. This value is only valid for A+U regulated converter
Teta min () Minimum value for the rectifier firing or inverter margin
angle in .
Teta max () Minimum value for the rectifier firing or inverter margin
angle in .
Transformer
Transformer () Indicates, if the converter transformer should be included
integrated in the converter. If clicked, no external transformer must
be defined, the converter represents a converter plus a

transformer.
T () Nominal tap ratio of the converter transformer in pu from
DC to AC side.
Tap locked () If this parameter is checked the tap will be fixed on T.
dT () Converter transformer tap-step in pu.
T min () Minimum value of converter transformer tap ratio in pu.
T max () Maximum value of converter transformer tap ratio in pu.
negative () The converter is a negative pole

pole
positive pole () The converter is a positive pole
numb. () Number of three-phase converter bridges in series
bridges
Xc () Commutating reactance in Ohm.
RLoss () Equivalent total active power losses in the valves and
auxiliaries in Ohm. This parameter is only considered in
Loadflow calculation, method Extended Newton
Raphson.
Vdrop () Voltage drop across the valves in V. This parameter is
only considered in Loadflow calculation, method
Extended Newton Raphson.
Im () Current margin in % of the current set value Iset.
Im distrib. () This is the converter participation factor in % in case of a
multi-terminal system. If the current order at any rectifier
is reduced, current orders of remaining converters are
modified in proportion by these factors.
Grounding () Name of grounding node in case of a bipole HVDC link.
node One corresponding negative and positive pole of a
terminal must have the same grounding node.
Rg () Grounding resistance in Ohm.
Converter-Info

Converter-Reliability
Converter-User Data
Converter-More
Investment Data
Description of the Model (Converter)

Every HVDC system consists of rectifiers and inverters, which are called
converter. The basic equations for a converter are (rectifier):
3 2
U d = U d 0 cos( )
3
X c T B I d Rl I d Vdrop with Ud0 = B T E ac

3 2
Ud = B T E ac cos( )

Qac = Pac tan ( )
Pac = Pd = U d I d
6 B
I ac = Id

The equation for a DC line is:

U di = U dr Rdc I d
The abbreviations are:

Ud: Converter DC voltage; Udi for inverter, Udr for rectifier
Eac: Converter AC voltage
Pac: Active power at AC terminal

Qac: Reactive power at AC terminal

Iac: AC current
Pd: DC power at DC terminal
Vdrop: Voltage drop across the valves
B: Number of bridges
T: Transformer ratio from DC to AC
Xc: Commutating reactance
Rl : Losses in the valves
Rdc: Resistance of the DC line
Id: Converter DC current
: AC power factor angle
: Firing angle (for rectifier)
An equivalent circuit for a converter can be drawn as follows:

E ac Ud
1:T I dc
P ac , Q ac Xc
Fig. 4.15 Equivalent circuit of a converter
The DC voltage Ud and/or the DC current Id are controlled by the firing angle
alpha and the converter transformer ratio T. The firing angle and the
transformer ratio (tap position) are varied within their limits.
HVDC Systems in NEPLAN

NEPLAN can handle any number of two-terminal and multi-terminal HVDC
systems. The following configurations are possible:
Fig. 4.16 Monopolar HVDC link

Fig. 4.17 Bipolar HVDC link
G G
Fig. 4.18 Meshed multi-terminal HVDC system
In a two-terminal system, there are a rectifier and an inverter, one of them

controls the DC voltage (normally the inverter) and one the DC current or DC
power. In a multi-terminal system there is at least one converter, which controls
the DC voltage.
The normal operation of a two-terminal system can be described by the

following diagram:

Udi
Rectifier, current controlled
Inverter, voltage controlled
Udset
Operating
Im point
Idi Idrset
Fig. 4.19 Normal operation of a two-terminal system
In the normal mode of operation the margin angle of the inverter is adjusted to
maintain the desired inverter DC voltage Udset. The ratios of the inverter and
rectifier transformer are also adjusted, so that the firing angle alpha and the
margin angle gamma are within their limits min and max. In the current
controlling rectifier a voltage margin of about 3% is maintained in order to avoid
frequent changes in control allocations. For that reason if the minimum firing
angle for the rectifier is 5-7 the operating firing angle will typically have values
14 16 .
If the rectifier AC voltage is too low and the transformer ratio has reached the
limit, the voltage control of the inverter will be abandoned. The inverter now will
control the current: The current order Idiset at the inverter is lower than the
current order Idrset (the current margin is defined as Im = Idrset - Idiset). The new
operating point can be described as follows:

Udi
Inverter, current controlled
Udset
Operating
point Im
Idiset Idrset
Fig. 4.20 Current control of the inverter
Analogous can be said for multi-terminal systems. The configuration

considered is this of the parallel arrangement: The current in all the converter
stations (of number n) except one are adjusted according to current or power
control setpoints. One converter per pole (usually the one with the lower
voltage ceiling) will control the voltage. Current control is also provided at the
voltage setting terminal, so that it satisfies the following equation:
Iset
j =1..n
j
= I m arg in
where Imargin is a positive quantity, and Iset > 0 if j is a rectifier, Iset < 0 if j
j j
is an inverter.
In case of voltage depression in a current controlled converter, voltage control

will be shifted to this converter and the current settings of the remaining
j
terminals will be changed according to the participation factors Im distrib . If i
denotes the converter that hits the minimum angle limit, the new current
setpoint of any converter j i can be calculated using:
mi Iset i
( j
)
Iset new = Iset + isrec a j
, j
a t
t i
where isrec = 1 if j is a rectifier and isrec = 1 if j is an inverter.

j
The coefficient a is calculated using the following formula
Im distrib j / 100. nInv

a =
j
, if j Rectifier
SCoeff nInv + nRec
Im distrib j / 100. nRec
a =
j
, if j Inverter
SCoeff nInv + nRec
where
SCoeff = Im distib i / 100.

iC
and C all converters apart from the voltage controlling terminal that are not
blocked.

SVC (Controlled static VAR Compensator)
This chapter describes the parameters of the Data Input Dialog of a SVC and
the corresponding SVC model. The configuration assumed is that of a fixed
capacitor and a thyristor controlled reactor.
SVC-Parameters
Transformer LMDR Indicates if there is a transformer in the static VAR
system.
U ref LMDR Reference voltage for the regulation.
X sl LMDR Slope admittance: slope of the linear mode in the U/I
characteristic curve (see below).
Qc max LMDR Maximal capacitive reactive power in Mvar.
Qcmax is a positive value and means the maximum
generated inductive reactive power of the SVC at
nominal voltage. Qcmax corresponds to the reactive
power of the fix capacitor.
Ql max LMDR Maximal inductive reactive power in Mvar.
Qlmax is a positive value and means the maximum
consumed inductive reactive power of the SVC at
nominal voltage. Qlmax corresponds to the
maximum reactive power of the inductance Ql
minus the maximum reactive power Qc max of the
capacitor: Qlmax = Ql Qcmax (see Fig. 4.13)
SVC-Info
SVC-Reliability

SVC-User Data
SVC-More
Investment Data
Description of the Model (Static VAR Compensator)

For load flow calculations a regulated VAR compensator can be described as
follows:
HV
U2
VT
Transformer
I2
LV Controller
U1
Ql
F C L
0
Qc max
SVC
Fig. 4.21 Model of a SVC
F: Filter
C: fix capacitor
L: thyristor controlled reactor
The elements filter, controlled reactor and capacitor will be modeled with the
shunt element. The characteristic of a SVC is:

U2
Ql max
Umax
U
Uref I
U/I=Xsl
Umin
Qc max
capacitive inductive
I2
Imin Imax
Fig. 4.22 SVC characteristic curve
There are three modes:

capacitive mode (U2 <= Umin):
I2 = Bcap * U1 with Bcap = - Bc0 and Bc0 = Qcmax / U2n2 ; Qcmax: input value
inductive mode (U2 >= Umax):

I2 = Bind * U1 with Bind = Bl0 - Bc0 and Bl0 = (Qcmax + Qlmax) / U2n2 ;
Qcmax, Qlmax : input values
linear control range, normal mode ( Umin <= U2 >= Umax):

I2 = (U2 - Uref)/Xsl for Xsl 0 ; Xsl : input value
U2 = Uref for Xsl = 0
The equivalent circuits are:

XT XT
XSL U1 U2
U1 U2 U1 U2
I2 I2 I2
Bcap Bind
Uref
Linear mode Capacitive mode Inductive mode
Fig. 4.23 Equivalent circuits of a SVC
XT: Reactance of the transformer
The data of the transformer are entered separately. In the SVC, the user has to
indicate only if there is a transformer or not by clicking the corresponding
checkbox in the Data Input Dialog of the SVC.
If there is no transformer, the regulated/controlled VAR compensator works like
a PV-node with P=0.0 MW and U = Unom. This behaviour is similar to that of
synchronous machines. The reactive power will be calculated.
If the limits Qcmax .. Qlmax are reached, the regulated VAR compensator will
be converted into a constant inductance or capacitance (see the figure above)
and not into a PQ-node with Q = Qcmax or Q = Qlmax, like in the case of a
synchronous machine.
The input of Qcmax, Qlmax and the slope Xsl determine the characteristic of
the SVC. If Qlmin <= Qcmax, the inductive mode is missed.
Remarks:
When importing a project file (*.mcb) from version 4.2 or earlier the data of a
SVC must be checked, because the data entry has changed.

STATCOM (Static Compensator)
This chapter describes the parameters of the Data Input Dialog of a Static
Compensator (STATCOM) and the corresponding model.
STATCOM-Parameters
Transformer LMDR Indicates if there is a transformer in the static VAR
system.
U ref LMDR Reference voltage for the regulation.
X sl LMDR Slope admittance: slope of the linear mode in the U/I
characteristic curve (see below).
Imax C LMDR Maximal current for capacitive operation.
Imax L LMDR Maximal current for inductive operation
P(0) SP Zero sequence active power in MW. This value has not
to be entered when entering an asymmetrical shunt. It
will be calculated.
Q(0) SP Zero sequence reactive power in Mvar. Q(0) is negative
for a capacitive load. This value has not to be entered
when entering an asymmetrical shunt. It will be
calculated.
STATCOM-Info
STATCOM-Reliability
STATCOM-User Data

STATCOM-More
Investment Data
Description of the Model (Static Compensator)

The STATCOM represents the GTO-based version of the SVC (see "SVC
(Controlled static VAR Compensator)" on page 4-78). It consists of a Voltage
Sourced Converter (VSC) behind a coupling transformer (see Figure below).
The VSC generates a balanced set of sinusoidal voltages of controllable
magnitude and phase angle. For load flow calculations the STATCOM can be
described as follows:
HV
U2
Coupling VT
I2 Transformer
LV
U1 Controller
Multi-pulse V Ref
Inverter
DC Terminal
Energy Storage
(optional)
STATCOM
Fig. 4.24 STATCOM configuration
The voltage-current characteristic of the STATCOM is shown in the following

figure.

U2
Ql max
Umax
U
Uref I
U/I=Xsl
Umin
Qc max inductive
capacitive
I2
Imin Imax
Fig. 4.25 STATCOM characteristic curve
The STATCOM can provide both, inductive and capacitive vars and it is able to
control its output current over the rated maximum capacitive or inductive range,
independent of the AC System voltage. In the linear control range the
functional capability of STATCOM is analogous to that of the SVC. Operation
at the limits is however different: The SVC becomes an uncontrolled shunt
reactance (capacitive or inductive) for which the current falls in proportion to
the voltage whereas the STATCOM at full output behaves like a current
source.

TCSC
This chapter describes the parameters of the Data Input Dialog of a TCSC
(Thyristor Controlled Series Capacitor) and the corresponding model. The
model assumes n (n >= 1) identical TCSC modules connected in series and
controlled independently.
TCSC-Parameters
Operation LMDR Indicates if there is one single TCSC module or several
modules in series.
Module Parameters
Xc LMDR Reactance of the capacitor in Ohm
Xl LMDR Reactance of the inductor in Ohm
X Limits, LMDR Limits on total reactance of the TCSC or on Thyristor
Teta Limits firing angle. In case of multi-module operation, only X
Limits can be entered.
X min LMDR Minimum value of module reactance (negative for
capacitive operation). The (X min,X max) range should
not contain any resonance region.
X max LMDR Maximum value of module reactance (negative for
capacitive operation). The (X min,X max) range should
not contain resonance values.
Teta min LMDR Minimum value of thyristor firing angle.
The (Teta min, Teta max) range should not contain
resonance values.
Teta max LMDR Maximum value of thyristor firing angle.
The (Teta min, Teta max) range should not contain
resonance values.
Max. Volt. LMDR Maximum allowed voltage drop in kV.
Drop
Regulation
P, I, Xtot, LMDR Selection of the variable to be controlled.
Transm. P: Line power flow
angle
I: Line current
Xtot: Total TCSC reactance in Ohm
Transm. Angle: Transmission angle

Pset LMDR Control value for line active power flow control in MW.
Iset LMDR Control value for line current control in A.
Xtot LMDR Control value for total TCSC reactance control in Ohm.
Transm. LMDR Control value for transmission angle (angle U1 angle
angle U2) control in .
TCSC-Info
TCSC-Reliability
TCSC-User Data
TCSC-More
Investment Data
Description of the Model (TCSC)
The TCSC consists of a fixed capacitor connected in parallel with a thyristor

controlled reactor (TCR) (see figure below). The TCR is the main control unit of
the TCSC: By means of the firing angle of the thyristors, the effective inductive
reactance of the TCR varies and causes rapid reactive power exchange
between the TCR and the system. Depending on the system conditions

inductive or capacitive vars may be needed. To meet this requirement the

variable inductor is usually connected in parallel with a fixed capacitor. A
metal-oxide varistor is also connected in parallel for overvoltage protection.
MOV
I line Xc
Xl
Fig. 4.26 Per phase TCSC module
Firing angles are allowed to vary between 90 and 180. For a certain firing
angle the variable inductive reactance of the TCR equals in absolute value the
capacitive reactance of the fixed capacitor Xc causing a resonance. Thyristors
are fired sufficiently far away from the resonance value to avoid problems with
control (resonance region limits).
The TCSC module is modeled as a single variable reactance with firing angle
(or reactance) limits. Additional limitations can be imposed on the voltage drop
and on the line current (in case of line current control).
A X max
E
VMax
I Max
Cap. operation
Xc
B G
Not available
0 C
~Xl ILine
Ind.operation
VMax
F
D
X min
X TCSC X TCSC
(a): One-module operation (b): Two-module operation

Fig. 4.27 XTCSC versus line current characteristic
The figure above depicts the steady-state TCSC equivalent reactance XTCSC
versus line current characteristic, where the following physical and operating
limitations are displayed:
A,D: resonance region limitation
B: firing angle limitation (=180) (XTCSC is equal to the capacitors
reactance Xc)
C: firing angle limitation (=90) (XTCSC is almost equal to the inductors
reactance Xl)
E,F: upper voltage limits for capacitive and inductive operation
G: maximum allowed current in continuous operation
A TCSC can either operate in the capacitive or in the inductive region. That
means, that Xmin and Xmax, must be entered both as negative (Cap.
operation) or both as positive (Ind. operation) values.
As shown in 4.26a in case of one-module operation there is a range of values
for XTCSC that cannot be controlled. Figure 4.26b depicts the same
characteristic with two identical modules connected in series with half the
rating (half the Xl and Xc reactances) of the original (one) module. The two
modules are independently controlled. The control gap is now partially covered
and for increasing number of modules the operating area of the TCSC covers
the entire region enclosed by the dashed curve in Figure 4.26b.
Remark
In general (in multi-module operation) each module can have a different firing
angle. Therefore in the results there is no firing angle value (firing angle = 0),
whereas there is a value for the total effective reactance and voltage drop.

UPFC
This chapter describes the parameters of the Data Input Dialog of a UPFC
(Unified Power Flow Controller) and the corresponding UPFC model.
UPFC-Parameters
Vser min LMDR Minimum series voltage magnitude in % of the bus
nominal voltage.
Vser max LMDR Maximum series voltage magnitude in % of the bus
nominal voltage.
Iq min LMDR Minimum shunt current in A.
Iq max LMDR Maximum shunt current in A.
P max LMDR Maximum power through the DC link (Px) in MW.
Connecting Transformers Leakage Impedances
Series Tr. R LMDR Leakage resistance of series transformer in Ohm.
Series Tr. X LMDR Leakage reactance of series transformer in Ohm.
Shunt Tr. R LMDR Leakage resistance of shunt transformer in Ohm.
Shunt Tr. X LMDR Leakage reactance of shunt transformer in Ohm.
Line Flow Regulation at port 2
P LMDR Control value for the active line flow P2.
Q LMDR Control value for the reactive line flow Q2.
Voltage Regulation
Sending end LMDR Control value for the voltage magnitude of the sending
V set end.
Receiv. end LMDR Minimum voltage magnitude at the receiving end.
V min
Receiv. end LMDR Maximum voltage magnitude at the receiving end.
V max
UPFC-Info

UPFC-Reliability
UPFC-User Data
UPFC-More
Investment Data
Description of the Model (UPFC)
ILine - UT +
U1 U2
IQ Px (+) P2,Q2
Shunt Series
connected connected
converter converter
Fig. 4.28 Unified Power Flow Controller (UPFC)
The basic structure of the UPFC implementation is shown in the figure above.
UPFC consists of two voltage-sourced converters, one connected in shunt with
the line through a transformer and one connected in series with the line
through a second transformer. The two converters are operated from a
common DC link, provided by a DC storage capacitor. The series connected
converter injects a controlled voltage UT in series with the line. The phase

angle of the phasor UT can be chosen independently of the line current and
the magnitude is variable between zero and a maximum UTmax.
The series converter exchanges real and reactive power with the transmission
system. The reactive power can be generated independently from the series
converter, while the real power has to be supplied from the network. That is the
primary function of the shunt converter, which is controlled in such a way as to
provide at its DC terminal the real power needed by the series converter. A
secondary function of the shunt converter is to generate or absorb reactive
power for regulation of the AC terminal voltage U1.
Apparent power exchanged through series injected voltage:

Sxser = Pxser + jQxser = UT (ILine)* (1)
Apparent power exchanged through shunt current:

Sxshu = Pxshu + jQxshu = U1 (IQ)* (2)
In (1): Pxser > 0 (Qxser > 0) means that active (reactive) power is injected to
the system.
In (2): Pxshu > 0 (Qxshu > 0) means that active (reactive) power is drawn from
the system.
The UPFC model ignores device losses, therefore:

Pxshu = Pxser = Px
The reactive powers Qxser, Qxshu however can be independently produced by

the two converters.
With nonzero transformer impedances the equations (1) and (2) become:
Apparent power exchanged through series injected voltage:

Sxser = Pxser + jQxser = 3 UT (ILine)* (1)
Apparent power exchanged through shunt current:

Sxshu = Pxshu + jQxshu = 3 U1 (IQ)* - 3 |IQ|2 (Rshu +jXshu) (2)

Network Feeder
This chapter describes the parameters of the Data Input Dialog of a network
feeder and the corresponding network feeder model.
Network Feeder-Parameters
Type Applicable only with a network feeder library. Pressing
the button "", the type may be chosen and the data
can be transferred from the predefined library.
Sk" max, min SMHP Maximum and minimum initial symmetrical short circuit
power in MVA (Sk" =3UnIk").
Ik" max, min SMHP Maximum and minimum initial symmetrical short circuit
currents in kA (Ik" = Sk"/(3Un)).
R(1)/X(1) SMHP Maximum and minimum ratio of positive sequence
max, min resistance of feeder to its positive sequence reactance.
Z(0)/Z(1) SP Maximum and minimum ratio of zero sequence
max, min impedance to its positive sequence impedance.
R(0)/X(0) SP Maximum and minimum ratio of zero sequence
max, min resistance of feeder to its zero sequence reactance.
C H Capacitance of network in F.
Operational data
LF-Type LMDR Node type for load flow calculation. Possible values
are:
"SL": Slack node. Input of values "U oper" and
"Uw oper" compulsory (see below).
"PQ":P,Q-node. Input of values "P" and "Q"
compulsory (see below).
U oper LMDR It's the voltage, in % with respect to Un, which the
Slack has to regulate, if the LF-Type will be "SL".
Uw oper LMDR Angle of voltage in degrees, if the LF-Type will be "SL".
Slack portion LMDR The portion in % of the total slack active power, which
has to be supplied by this network feeder. This value is
only considered, if the load flow is calculated with
distributed slack or with zone/area control (see load
flow calculation parameters). The sum of all slack
portions in the network or zone/area may be unequal to
100%. In this case the program internally scales the

slack portion proportionally, so that the effective sum is

100%.
P LMDR Input of active power in MW, if the LF-Type will be
"PQ". For generating power the value for P must be
given as positive value. For loads the value must be
given as negative value.
Q LMDR Input of reactive power in Mvar, if the LF-Type will be
"PQ". Positive value means generation of inductive
reactive power (over excited generator); negative value
means consumption of inductive reactive power (under
excited generator).
Network Feeder-Info
Network Feeder-Reliability
Network Feeder-User Data

Network Feeder-More
Investment Data


Description of the Model (Network Feeder)

The following figure shows the model of a network feeder.
C X
Fig. 4.29 Model of a network feeder for short circuit calculation (above) and for
harmonic analysis (below)
follows:
Z(1) = cUn/Sk" Z(0) = Z(1) (Z(0)/Z(1))
= arctan(X(1)/R(1)) 0 = arctan(X(0)/R(0))
R(1) = Z(1)cos() R(0) = Z(0)cos(0)
X(1) = Z(1)sin() X(0) = Z(0)sin(0)
Z(1) = R(1) + jX(1) Z(0) = R(0) + jX(0)
For harmonic analysis only the positive sequence is considered and the imped-
ance Z(1) will be calculated as a mean value of the minimal and maximal short
circuit power.

Synchronous Machine

synchronous machine and the corresponding model.
Synchronous Machine - Parameters

Type Applicable only with a synchronous machine library.
Pressing the button "", the type may be chosen and the
data can be transferred from the predefined library.
Ur SMHPD Rated voltage in kV.
pUr SP If the generator voltage Ug is permanently higher than
the rated voltage Ur, this should be indicated with a
deviation in %. Only necessary for Short Circuit
calculation by IEC60909 (2001).
Sr SMHPD Rated power in MVA.
Cos(phi) SMP Power factor.
Ufmax/Ufr SP Ratio of highest possible excitation-voltage to rated
excitation at rated load and power factor.
xd sat. SP Synchronous reactance in % with respect to Sr and Ur
(saturated value). Recommended value:
Turbo-SM: 120 .. 270
Salient pole-SM: 70 .. 130
xd' sat SMHP Saturated transient reactance in % with respect to Sr and
Ur. This value will only be used for short circuit
calculations according to ANSI. Recommended value:
Turbo-SM: (1.4 .. 1.7)* xd"
Salient pole with amortisseur winding: 20 .. 45%
xd" sat SMHP Saturated subtransient reactance in % with respect to Sr
and Ur. Recommended value:
Turbo-SM: 9 .. 22 (large values when large Sr)
Salient pole-SM: 12 .. 30 (large values if slow speed rotor
with large Sr)
Ikk SP Steady state short circuit current in kA of generator with
compound excitation during 3-phase short circuit.
Ikk=0: Generator with no compound excitation.
Ikk<>0: Generator with compound excitation.

Ikk will be used to calculate the minimum steady state

short circuit current for generators with compound
excitation.
Mue SP The factor mue will be used for the calculation of
breaking currents.
mue=0 : mue value will be calculated according to
IEC standard.
Mue<>0: mue will be set to the input value.
RG SMHP Equivalent resistance of generator in Ohm. RG is
considered for the calculation of all currents except for
the calculation of the peak current ip. For ip-calculation a
fictive value according to IEC will be taken, no matter
which calculation method is used (see Description of the
Model (SC)).This fictive value for RG is also used for the
calculation, if RG is set to 0.
X(2) SP Negative sequence reactance given by x(2)=0.5(xd"+xq")
in % with respect to Sr and Ur.
Recommended value: x(2) = xd".
X(0) SP Zero sequence reactance of the synchronous machine in
% with respect to Sr and Ur. Recommended value: x(0) =
(0.4 .. 0.8) xd".
Amortisseur SP Checkbox, indicates if the synchronous machine has an
winding amortisseur (damper) winding or not.
Motor SP Indicates, if the synchronous machine works as motor.
This input influences the minimum short circuit current
according to IEC909.
Rotor type SP Indicates the type of the synchronous machine (salient
pole or round rotor).
Unit SP Checkbox, indicates whether the machine is part of a
generator power station unit.
Earthing SP Indicates de type of earthing of the generator.
Re, Xe SP For impedance earthing: Generator star point earthing
resistance and reactance in Ohm.
Active SP The user can define, which portion in % of the earthing
impedance is active.
Generation L For the OPF-Simulation it's possible to minimize the
costs generation costs. These costs are represented by the
following quadratic curve:
C(P) = a*P2 + b*P + c
The following parameters have to be entered:

a: quadric factor in unit of currency (e.g. US$) to

MW2
b: linear factor in unit of currency to MW2
c: constant factor in unit of currency
P is the active power produced by the generator in
MW
Synchronous Machine - Limits

P min LDR Minimum allowable active power in MW.
If the synchronous machine works as generator, P
min is a positive value and means the minimum
amount of active power, which the machine must
produce.
If the synchronous machine works as motor, P min is
a negative value and means the maximum amount of
active power, which the machine can consume (see
below).
P max LDR Maximum allowable active power in MW.
If the synchronous machine works as generator, P
max is a positive value and means the maximum
amount of active power, which the machine can
produce.
If the synchronous machine works as motor, P max
is a negative value and means the minimum amount
of active power, which the machine must consume
(see below).
Q min LDR Minimum allowable limit for the reactive power Q in Mvar,
when LF-Type equal "PV". If Q runs below this value
during LF-calculation, Q will be set Q = Q min (only for
Newton-Raphson method).
If the synchronous machine works over excited,
Qmin is a positive value and means the minimum
amount of inductive reactive power, which the
machine must produce.
If the synchronous machine works under excited,
Qmin is a negative value and means the maximum

machine can consume.

Q max LDR Maximum allowable limit for the reactive power Q in
Mvar, when LF-Type equal "PV". If Q runs beyond this
value during LF-calculation, Q will be set Q = Q max
(only for Newton-Raphson method).
If the synchronous machine works over excited, Q
max is a positive value and means the maximum
machine can produce.
If the synchronous machine works under excited, Q
max is a negative value and means the minimum
machine must consume.
Cosphi control
P lim LDR Break point of the characteristic curve.
Cosphi max LDR Maximum Cosphi of the feasible domain of "Cosphi
oper". The check box "Capacitive" selects between
inductive or capacitive operation.
Cosphi min LDR Minimum Cosphi of the feasible domain of "Cosphi oper".
The check box "Capacitive" selects between inductive or
capacitive operation.
Capability Curve
Curve LDR The user can define himself a PQ-curve. Depending on
the active power P, the limits Qmin and Qmax of the
reactive power will be defined by this Capability Curve for
a LF-type PV. Points of this curve may be entered with
"Insert", and removed with "Delete". The whole (Pmin,
Pmax) range must be included in the capability list.
Active LDR During LF-calculation the PV-generator is checking if the
during necessary reactive power Q, to guarantee the node-
calculation voltage U oper, is between Qmin and Qmax. If the
Capability Curve is active, the program is using the limits
defined in this curve.
Synchronous Machine - Operational

LF-Type LDR Type of node for load flow calculation.
Possible values:

"PQ": P,Q-node. Input of the values "P" and "Q"

"PV": P,V-node. Input of the values "U oper" and
"P" compulsory (see below).
"SL": Slacknode. Input of the value "U oper"
compulsory (see below). Voltage angle will be set
to 0.
"PC": P,C-node. Input of the values "P" and
"Cosphi oper" compulsory (see below).
Operating () Based on the operational data, the operating mode
Mode indicates if the synchronous machine is working as a
generator or as a motor and if it is over- or
underexcited.
U oper LD Amount of voltage in % related to Un, if LF-Type equal
"PV" or "SL". The generator will be voltage-regulated.
Uw oper LMDR Angle of voltage in degrees, if the LF-Type will be "SL".
PGen LMDR Input of active power in MW, if the LF-Type will be
"PV", "PQ", or "PC". For generating power the value for
P must be given as positive value. For loads the value
must be given as negative value.
This value will be multiplied by the scaling factor to
receive the operational power Poper.
QGen LMDR Input of reactive power in Mvar, if the LF-Type will be
"PQ". Positive value means generation of capacitive
reactive power (overexcited generator); negative value
means consumption of capacitive reactive power
(underexcited generator).
receive the operational power Qoper.
Effective LMDR Indicates the total scaling factor for the active power of
scaling factor the synchronous machine. It is calculated by the
for P product of the network, of the zone and of the assigned
scaling factor for P: fep=fnp*fzp*fap
Effective LMDR Indicates the total scaling factor for the reactive power
scaling factor of the synchronous machine. It is calculated by the
for Q product of the network, of the zone and of the assigned
scaling factor for Q: feq=fnq*fzq*faq
Scaled values LMDR For PV, PQ and PC LF-types, the effective active
power P, to be produced or consumed, is indicated.
For PQ LF-typ, additionally the effective reactive power
Q, to be produced or consumed, is indicated.

The scaled values Poper and Qoper are calculated

with P and Q and the respective scaling factors:
Poper= P* fep ; Qoper= Q* feq
Remote LDR In case of a voltage regulated generator (LF-Type: PV)
controlled bus the node to be regulated can be entered here. If this
input field is empty, the voltage of the generator node
will be regulated. The remote control is only working for
nodes, which are connected with the generator node
through elements. In case of a three-windings
transformer remote control is only possible for a
generator connected at the secondary node. The
tertiary node must have no load and no generation (I3 =
0.0 A)
Static LDR The static in Hz/MW of the generator can be entered
here. The static S is defined as follows:
Static: S = -(f0 f) / (Poper P)
Poper: Scaled value for active power
P: Calculated active power for operating frequency f
f0: Nominal system frequency in Hz.
f: Operating frequency in Hz.
The calculated active power at operating frequency f is

P = P0 + (f0 f) / S. The operating frequency f can be
entered in the load flow calculation parameters.
Slack portion LDR The portion in % of the slack active power, which has
to be generated or consumed by this synchronous
machine. This value is only considered, if the load flow
is calculated with distributed slack or with area
interchange control (see load flow calculation
parameters). The sum of all slack portions in the
network or zone/area may be unequal to 100%. In this
case the program internally scales the slack portion
proportionally, so that the effective sum is 100%.
Qpv LDR The portion of reactive power in %, which has to be
generated or consumed by this machine in case of PV-
node (with or without remote control) in case of
different machines regulating the voltage of the same
node (see below). The sum of all Qpv portions for the
regulated node may be unequal to 100%. In this case
the program internally scales the Qpv portion
proportionally, so that the effective sum is 100%.

Cosphi control (LF type "PC")

Cosphi oper LDR Cosphi-value of the generator, used for the following
"Cosphi control" options:
Cosphi oper remains constant for the option
"Cos(phi) constant".
Cosphi oper is used as initial value for the
options "Reactive power" and "Reactive/active
power".
Capacitive LDR The check box "Capacitive" selects between inductive
or capacitive operation.
Cos(phi) LDR The control input "Cosphi oper" is constant.
constant
Cos(phi) LDR "Cosphi oper" changes dependent on the active power
characteristic according to a characteristic curve (see Cosphi
curve characteristic curve).
Reactive LDR If the corresponding node voltage becomes greater
power than its maximum value U max, "Cosphi oper" changes
so, that the asynchronous machine is lowering the
reactive power production, respectively increasing the
consumption of inductive reactive power. "Cosphi
oper" must not leave the feasible domain defined by
"Cosphi min" and "Cosphi max".
Reactive/ LDR Same behavior as type "Reactive Power". If "Cosphi
active power oper" can't be adjusted further, the active power is
reduced so that the node voltage doesn't exceed
Umax.
Synchronous Machine Scaling Factors

Operating LMDR Indicates if the synchronous machine is working as a
Mode generator or motor, depending on the sign of the active
power P. For the generator mode, P has to be positive,
for motor mode negative.
Scaling factor LMDR Displays the predefined scaling factor of P and Q for
of network the network. Depending on the Operating Mode, these
are the scaling factors for generation or load.
Predefined scaling factors may be changed in Edit -
Data - Operational Data (see chapter Menu Options).
Scaling factor LMDR Displays the predefined scaling factors of P and Q for
of zone the zone. Depending on the Operating Mode, these are
the scaling factors for generation or load. Predefined

scaling factors may be changed in "Edit - Data -

Operational Data" (see chapter Menu Options).
Assigned LMDR Displays the scaling factors of P and Q, assigned to
scaling factor this synchronous machine. It's a total of the assigned
user defined scaling factors (see below).
Effective LMDR Displays the effective scaling factors of P and Q for this
scaling factor synchronous machine. It's the product of all scaling
factors: fe=fn*fz*fa
Assign user defined scaling factors
Table LMDR The user has the possibility to assign one or more user
defined scaling factors. Every user defined scaling
factor may consist of a constant factor (P-factor, Q-
factor) and a time dependent factor (characteristics). If
there are various user defined scaling factors in the
table, a total factor has to be calculated with help of the
portion. The portion may be defined directly in the table
and it has to be considered that the total of all portions
cant exceed 100%. That's why it's necessary to lower
first a portion before increasing an other one. The total
of all assigned user defined scaling factors is displayed
in the fields "Assigned scaling factor and its calculated
as follows:
faP= p1 * Pfactor1 + p2 * Pfactor2 +
faQ= p1 * Qfactor1 + p2 * Qfactor2 +
p = Portion
For simulations with the module Load Flow with Load
Profiles the time dependent scaling factor gets into the
equation:
faP= p1 * Pfactor1 * Pfactor_t1(t) + p2 * Pfactor2 *
Pfactor_t2(t) +
faQ= p1 * Qfactor1 * Qfactor_t1(t) + p2 * Qfactor2 *
Qfactor_t2(t) +
Insert LMDR Inserts in the table a time dependent scaling factor,
which can be chosen from a list of all defined factors.
Remove LMDR Removes the marked scaling factor from the table.
Define scaling LMDR Enters in the Scaling Factors Editor, where the user
factors may define Scaling Factors and the time-dependent
characteristic curves (see chapter User Defined
Scaling Factors on page 4-151).
Show LMDR Shows the time dependent characteristic curves of the
characteristic Scaling Factor Type marked in the table.

Synchronous Machine Dynamic

Ur SMHPD Rated voltage in kV.
Sr SMHPD Rated power in MVA.
Model D Indicates the model of the synchronous machine for
dynamic simulation. Possible models are:
- Classical
- Transient
- Subtransient
Rotor type D Indicates the rotor type of the synchronous machine.
H D Inertia constant of the generator and turbine.
D D Mechanical damping in MW/Hz.
R D Stator resistance
Machine reactances
Xd D d-axis synchronous reactance in % with respect to Sr
and Ur.
Xq D q-axis synchronous reactance in % with respect to Sr
and Ur.
Xd' D d-axis transient reactance (unsaturated) in % with
respect to Sr and Ur.
Xq' D q-axis transient reactance (unsaturated) in % with
Xd" D d-axis subtransient reactance (unsaturated) in % with
Xq" D q-axis subtransient reactance (unsaturated) in % with
Xc D Characteristic reactance in % with respect to Sr and Ur.
This value is used to calculate the field values. If Xc is
unknown, set Xc = Xp.
Xl D Stator leakage reactance or Potier reactance in % with
Time constants
Type D Indicates, if the time constants are entered for open
circuit or short circuit. The corresponding values are
calculated.

Tdo' D d-axis transient open-circuit time constant in s.

Tqo' D q-axis transient open-circuit time constant in s.
Tdo" D d-axis subtransient open-circuit time constant in s.
Tqo" D q-axis subtransient open-circuit time constant in s.
Td' D d-axis transient short-circuit time constant in s.
Tq' D q-axis transient short-circuit time constant in s.
Td" D d-axis subtransient short-circuit time constant in s.
Tq" D q-axis subtransient short-circuit time constant in s.
For salient pole machines x'q = xq and/or Tq0

' = 0 must be set.
Synchronous Machine Saturation (D)

Saturation parameters may be inserted for d-axis and q-axis.
Saturation D Indicates if the saturation is considered for the
calculation.
Type D Indicates, if the saturation will be described with the
field currents Ia, Ib, Ic or the parameters A and B (see
below). The value for Ia must always be entered.
Possible values are:
- Field currents Ia, Ib, Ic
- Parameter A, B
The corresponding values are calculated.
Ia D Exciter current in A on the air gap characteristic at
nominal voltage. This value must always be entered,
even if the saturation is described by the parameters A
and B.
Ib D Exciter current in A on the open-circuit characteristic at
nominal voltage (see below).
Ic D Exciter current in A on the open-circuit characteristic at
120% of nominal voltage (see below).
A, B D Parameter values or saturation factors (see below).
The saturation of a synchronous machine is defined by its open-circuit

characteristic. The graph will be described with the parameters Ia, Ib and Ic of
the air gap and the open-circuit characteristic:

terminal voltage
air gap characteristic
120 %
open-circuit characteristic
100 %
0%
0 Ia Ib Ic field current
Fig. 4.30 Air gap and open circuit characteristic
With these currents Ia, Ib and Ic, the saturation factors A and B can be
calculated, which are used to reproduce the open-circuit characteristic
approximately.
I Open circuit = I Airgap (1 + A e B (u 0.8 ) )
(I b I a )2 I 1.2 I a
with A= and B = 5 ln c
I a (I c 1.2 I a ) 1.2 (I b I a )
Synchronous Machine Info

Synchronous Machine - Reliability

Synchronous Machine - User Data


Synchronous Machine - More
Investment Data
Portions of Reactive Power for PV-Generators

The sum of the Q portions for one PV-node doesnt need to be 100%. The
program calculates proportionally the effective portion factor.
PV-Node
G Q pv = 40% ! (40*100/120=33.3%)
G Q pv = 50% ! (50*100/120=41.7%)
G Q pv = 30% ! (30*100/120=25%)
PV-Node, Remote control
G Q pv = 40% ! (40*100/120=33.3%)
G Q pv = 50% ! (50*100/120=41.7%)
G Q pv = 30% ! (30*100/120=25%)

P- and Q-limits of the Machine

The limits must be entered as follows:
Motor 0 Generator
P min P max
Under excited 0 Over excited
Q min Q max
Cosphi characteristic curve (SM)
Cosphi oper
Cosphi max
Cosphi min
P
P min P lim P max
Fig. 4.31 Cosphi characteristic curve
Description of the Model (SC) (SM)

Fig. 4.32 Model of a synchronous machine for short-circuit calculation
The model parameters of the positive, negative and zero sequence are
calculated as follows:
Positive sequence Negative sequence

R = Rf R = Rf
X = xd"Ur/(100Sr) X = x(2)Ur/(100Sr)
Zero sequence
R = Rf + 3RE
X(0) = x(0)Ur/(100Sr)
X = X(0) + 3XE
The parameter RG (resistance) is set in function of Ur and Sr according to IEC

(RG of the Data Input Dialog is used only for the calculation of iDC and only if
RG is unequal to 0):
Rf = 0.05Xd" (for Ur > 1 kV and Sr >= 100 MVA)
Rf = 0.07Xd" (for Ur > 1 kV and Sr < 100 MVA)
Rf = 0.15Xd" (for Ur <= 1 kV)
Remarks:
According to IEC the impedance Z =R+jX will be multiplied by the factor K:
IEC909 (1988)
If Generator is a part of a power station unit:
c max
K=
1 + xd " sin r
IEC60909
If short circuit is fed directly from the generator without transformer:
Un c max
K=
U r (1 + pU rG ) 1 + xd " sin r
If the generator is a part of a power station unit with on-load tapchanger:
2 2
Un U rTLV c max
K=
1 + xd " xT sin rG
2 2
U rG U rTHV
If the generator is a part of a power station unit without on-load tapchanger:

Un U c max
K= rTLV (1 pT )
U rG (1 + pU rG ) U rTHV 1 + xd " sin rG
When the minimal short circuit current is calculated the reactance of all
compound excited generators (Ikk0) are set to Xdk=Ur/(3Ikk).
The parameters Ufmax/Ufr, xd sat. and "Rotor type" are needed to calculate
the gamma value resp. the steady state current Ik = Ir . Ir stands for the rated
current.
The breaking current will be calculated as Ia = Ik". The factor is defined as

a function of minimum delay of circuit breakers tmin (parameter is given in the
calculation parameter mask of module Short circuit) and of the ratio Ik"/Ir. The
factor will not be calculated when a value unequal 0 is given in the
corresponding input field (only in special cases, see IEC standard / 2 /).
Time constants
The following relations are valid for the time constants:
Td0' + Td0" = xd/xd' * Td' + (1 - xd/xd' + xd/xd") * Td"

Td0' * Td0" = xd/xd" * Td' * Td"
and
Tq0' + Tq0" = xq/xq' * Tq' + (1 - xq/xq' + xq/xq") * Tq"
Tq0' * Tq0" = xq/xq" * Tq' * Tq"
Description of the Dynamic Models

There are three models available for dynamic simulations of synchronous
machines:
(1) Classical model
(2) Transient model
(3) Sub-transient model
The suitable model to select is determined by the existing data or by the

machine's importance for a particular fault event. The larger the synchronous
machine in question and the closer it is in electrical terms to the fault
computed, the higher must be the precision of the machine model selected.
For machines farther away or less important, simpler models can be selected.

Classical model
A classical model is built as a constant voltage source behind a constant
impedance, z.
i k
z
e u
Fig. 4.33 Classical model for dynamic analysis
The magnitude and angle of the complex voltage, e are constant.

The impedance z is
z = ra + jx'd
For xd the saturated value will be used. The saturated value of xd may also be
calculated in Prost from the unsaturated value (see Synchronous Machine
Saturation (D) on page 4-104).
The angle delta of the voltage e is determined from the swing equation (in per
unit)
2 H d2 + KD d = m m
m e
0 dt2 0 dt
me = Real e i*

The mechanical torque mm may be determined through a speed governing

system. Inertia constant H can be calculated from moment of inertia GD2.
2
n
[min1 ] GD2[tm2 ]
H[s]= 1
2 60

SN[kVA]
Data required for classical model:

Sn Nominal complex power
Un Nominal voltage

ra Stator resistance
xd' Direct axis transient reactance
H Inertia constant
KD Damping constant
Transient model
The transient model is a simple model in which, in addition to the swing
equation (See classical model) transient effects of direct and quadrature axes
are also considered. The field voltage Ufd may be modified through an
automatic voltage regulator. The circuit corresponds to that of subtransient
model without subtransient windings.
ud = ra id q uq = ra iq + d
' '
x
d xd id + Ufd xq
xq iq
d = x'd id + q = x'q iq +
'
1 + sTd0 '
1+ sTq0
me = d iq q id
The saturation of the main magnetic field is taken into consideration through
saturated reactances. They can be entered directly in the Params tab of the
data input dialog, or the program can calculate them for an initial operating
point with the saturation curves and the unsaturated reactances in the Params
tab (see Synchronous Machine Saturation (D) on page 4-104). Saturated
reactances remain constant during the simulation.
Data required for transient model:

Un Nominal voltage
xl Stator leakage reactance
xd Direct axis synchronous reactance
Td0 Direct axis transient open circuit time constant
xq Quadrature axis synchronous reactance
xq Quadrature axis transient reactance

Tq0 Quadrature axis transient open circuit time constant

H Inertia constant
KD Damping constant

' = 0 must be set.
Subtransient model
The subtransient model represents a complete machine model as given in the
following circuits.
id R=ra xl xrc xfd rfd ifd

i1d
-id+ifd+i1d
x1d
ud xad ufd
r1d
iq R=ra xl
-iq+i1q+i2q i1q i2q

x1q x2q
uq
xaq
r1q r2q
Fig. 4.34 Subtransient model for dynamic analysis
Simpler models can be simulated by setting some of these characteristic

values to zero. xad, xfd, rfd and xaq are not allowed to be zero.
The saturation of the main field is represented by saturated reactances xads
and xaqs. During the simulation these reactances are modified according to the
actual main field.
The per unit equations of the subtransient model is as follows:

ud = ra id + x l iq aq uq = ra iq x l id + ad
x1d fd + x fd 1d
ad = x"ads id + aq = x"aqs iq + 1q + 2q

xrc (x fd + x1d ) + x fd x1d x1q x2q

dfd d1q
= affd fd + af1d 1d + bfad ad + bffd ufd = a11q 1q + b1aq aq
dt dt
d1d d2q
= a1fd fd + a11d 1d + b1ad ad = a22q 2q + b2aq aq
dt dt
me = ad iq aq id
For swing equation see classical model.

The q-axis leads the d-axis by 90o.
The coefficients of differential equations are calculated from circuit elements.
wo is the nominal frequency.
x"ads = 1 x"aqs = 1
1 + xfd + x1d 1 + 1 + 1
xads xrc (x fd + x1d ) + x fd x1d xaqs x1q x2q

0 rfd (x rc + x 1d )
a ffd =
x rc (x fd + x1d ) + x fd x 1d
0 rfd x rc
a f1d =
x rc (x fd + x 1d ) + x fd x 1d 0 r1q
a11q =
0 r1d x rc x1q
a1fd =
a22q =
r1d (x rc + x fd ) x 2q
0
a11d =
b1aq =
0 rfd x 1d x1q
b fad =
b2aq =
0 r1d x fd x 2q
b1ad =
x rc (x fd + x 1d ) + x fd x 1d
b ffd = 0
Data required for subtransient model (unsaturated values):

Un Nominal voltage
xl Stator leakage reactance
xc Characteristic reactance
xd Direct axis synchronous reactance
xd Direct axis subtransient reactance
Td0 Direct axis transient open circuit time constant
Td0 Direct axis subtransient open circuit time constant
xq Quadrature axis synchronous reactance
xq Quadrature axis transient reactance
xq Quadrature axis subtransient reactance
Tq0 Quadrature axis transient open circuit time constant
Tq0 Quadrature axis subtransient open circuit time constant
H Inertia constant
KD Damping constant

' = 0 must be set.

Characteristic reactance xc:

The reactance xc is an additional characteristic variable required for a more
accurate calculation of the exciter field variables. It can be determined by
measurement, or calculated from design data.
For more detailed notes, see [2].
If the value of xc is not known, the stator leakage reactance xl (Potier
reactance) is used as a default value.

Asynchronous Machine

asynchronous machine and the corresponding model.
Asynchronous Machine - Parameters

Type Applicable only with an asynchronous machine library.
No. of SMHP Number of identical asynchronous motors at the node.
motors
Input Ir SMHP Defines if the current Ir or the Cosphi and the Efficiency
can be entered. If the checkbox is active, Ir may be
entered and the Efficiency and Sr will be calculated. If the
checkbox isn't active, the Cosphi and the Efficiency have
to be entered and Sr and Ir will be calculated.
Ur SMHP Rated voltage in kV.
Ir SMHP Rated current in kA.
Sr SMHP Rated power in MVA. This value is calculated by Ur and
Ir.
Pr mech SMHP Rated active power in MW.
**
Rated slip M Slip at rated operation in %.
sr
Cosphi at SMHP Power factor cos(phi) at Sr and sr.
Sr and sr
Efficiency SMHP Efficiency for rated operation.
at Sr and sr
Pole pairs SMHP Number of pole pairs of stator.
of stator
Ia/Ir SMHP Ratio of locked-rotor current to the rated current of the
motor.
Ma/Mr M* Ratio of starting torque to rated torque.
Mk/Mr M* Ratio of breakdown torque to rated torque.
Cosphi start M* Power factor at start.
Transient D Type of transient model used for dynamic analysis.
model

ANSI factor SP ANSI factor. If short circuit is calculated according to

ANSI/IEEE, the factor for multiplying the subtransient
reactance of the motor can be entered here. The factors
are given in section 5.4.1 of the ANSI/IEEE Standard
C37.010-1979. Pressing the "Calculate" button, the factor
will be set automatically by the program.
Rm SMHP Equivalent resistance of motor in Ohm. If 0, a fictive value
according to IEC will be taken (see below).
Converter SMHP Indicates if the machine is a converter fed drive.
fed drive
Asynchronous Machine - Operational

LF-Type LMDR Defines, how the motor is modeled, when the motor is
not started up:
Mload:
The motors operating point is calculated with the help
of the operating load torque (see chapter "Motor
Starting"). The consumed power depends on the load
torque and the terminal voltage. The parameters,
which are marked with (M*) or (M**), are necessary.
PQoper:
The motor works with constant power Poper and
Qoper. The parameters, which are marked with (M*) or
(M**), are not necessary.
PC:
The motor works with constant power Poper and
constant Cosphi oper. A Cosphi control may be
activated for this LF-Type.The parameters, which are
marked with (M*) or (M**), are not necessary.
Operating () Based on the operational data, the operating mode
mode indicates if the asynchronous machine is working as a
motor or as a generator.
P LMDR Active power in MW to be consumed. For
supersynchronous operation this value must be
entered negative. In normal operation of ASM this
value is positive. P can also be calculated from the
machine mechanical power Pmech (see below).
receive the operational power Poper.

Q LMDR Reactive power in Mvar of ASM. This value is always

positive. Q can also be calculated from the machine
mechanical power Pmech and Cosphi (see below).
receive the operational power Qoper.
Effective LMDR Indicates the total scaling factor for the active power of
scaling factor the asynchronous machine. It is calculated by the
for P product of the network, of the zone and of the assigned
scaling factor for P: fep=fnp*fzp*fap
Effective LMDR Indicates the total scaling factor for the reactive power
scaling factor of the asynchronous machine. It is calculated by the
for Q product of the network, of the zone and of the assigned
scaling factor for Q: feq=fnq*fzq*faq
Scaled values LMDR The scaled values for Poper and Qoper are calculated
with P and Q and the respective scaling factors:
Calculate P LMDR P and Q may be calculated from the efficiency,
and Q cos(phi) and Pmech by pressing the button "Calculate".
The value for Pmech (Mechanical power of the
machine in MW) can be entered here. Otherwise the
option has to be chosen, that Pmech is equal to the
rated mechanical power Pr mech.
Option Pmech:
P = Pmech / Efficiency;
Q = P*sqrt(1-cos2)/cos
Option Pmech=Pr mech:
P = Pr mech / Efficiency;
Q = P*sqrt(1-cos2)/cos
Cosphi control (LF type "PC")
Cosphi oper LDR Cosphi-value of the asynchronous machine, used for
the following "Cosphi control" options:
Cosphi oper remains constant for the option
"Cos(phi) constant".
Cosphi oper is used as initial value for the options
"Reactive power" and "Reactive/active power".
Capacitive LDR The check box "Capacitive" selects between inductive
or capacitive operation.
Cos(phi) LDR The control input "Cosphi oper" is constant.
constant
Cos(phi) LDR "Cosphi oper" changes dependent on the active power

characteristic according to a characteristic curve (see Cosphi

curve characteristic curve for asynchronous machine).
Reactive LDR If the corresponding node voltage becomes greater
power than its maximum value U max, "Cosphi oper" changes
so, that the asynchronous machine is lowering the
reactive power production, respectively increasing the
consumption of inductive reactive power. "Cosphi oper"
must not leave the feasible domain defined by "Cosphi
min" and "Cosphi max".
Reactive/ LDR Same behavior as type "Reactive Power". If "Cosphi
active power oper" can't be adjusted further, the active power is
reduced so that the node voltage doesn't exceed
Umax.
Asynchronous Machine Scaling Factors

Operating LMDR Indicates if the asynchronous machine is working as a
Mode load or as a generator, depending on the sign of the
active power P. For the load mode, P has to be
positive, for generator mode negative.
Scaling LMDR Displays the predefined scaling factor of P and Q for
factor of the network. Depending on the Operating Mode, these
network are the scaling factors for generation or load.
Scaling LMDR Displays the predefined scaling factors of P and Q for
factor of the zone. Depending on the Operating Mode, these are
zone the scaling factors for generation or load. Predefined
scaling factors may be changed in Edit - Data -
Operational Data (see chapter Menu Options).
Assigned LMDR Displays the scaling factors of P and Q, assigned to
scaling this asynchronous machine. It's a total of the assigned
factor user defined scaling factors.
Effective LMDR Displays the effective scaling factors of P and Q for this
scaling asynchronous machine. It's the product of all scaling
factor factors: fe=fn*fz*fa
Table LMDR The user has the possibility to assign one or more user


as follows:
p = Portion
equation:
Pfactor_t2(t) +
Qfactor_t2(t) +
Insert LMDR Inserts in the table a time dependent scaling factor,
Remove LMDR Removes the marked scaling factor from the table.
Define LMDR Enters in the Scaling Factors Editor, where the user
scaling may define Scaling Factors and the time-dependent
factors characteristic curves (see chapter User Defined
Show LMDR Shows the time dependent characteristic curves of the
characte- Scaling Factor Type marked in the table.
ristic
Asynchronous Machine - Limits

LF-Type LMDR Defines, how the motor is modeled, when the motor is not
started up:
Mload:
The motors operating point is calculated with the help of
the operating load torque (see chapter "Motor Starting").
The consumed power depends on the load torque and
the terminal voltage. The parameters, which are marked

with (M*) or (M**), are necessary.

PQoper:
The motor works with constant power Poper and Qoper.
The parameters, which are marked with (M*) or (M**), are
not necessary.
PC:
The motor works with constant power Poper and constant
Cosphi. A Cosphi control may be activated for this LF-
Type.The parameters, which are marked with (M*) or
(M**), are not necessary.
P min LDR Minimum allowable active power in MW.
If the asynchronous machine works as a load, P min
is a positive value and means the minimum amount
of active power, which the load will consume.
If the asynchronous machine works as a generator, P
min is a negative value and means the maximum
amount of active power, which the machine can
produce.
P max LDR Maximum allowable active power in MW.
If the asynchronous machine works as a load, P max
is a positive value and means the maximum amount
of active power, which the machine can consume.
If the asynchronous machine works as a generator, P
max is a negative value and means the minimum
amount of active power, which the machine must
produce.
P lim LDR Break point of the characteristic curve.
Cosphi max LDR Maximum Cosphi of the feasible domain of "Cosphi
oper". The check box "Capacitive" selects between
inductive or capacitive operation.
Cosphi min LDR Minimum Cosphi of the feasible domain of "Cosphi oper".
The check box "Capacitive" selects between inductive or
capacitive operation.
Asynchronous Machine Model

The date entered in the Model tab is only used for motor starting calculations.
For more information about the motor starting calculation please see the
respective chapter.

There are two possibilities how to calculate the model of the asynchronous
machine for motor starting. The first is a simplified manner, because the rotor
resistance R2(s) and the leakage reactance X2(s) are calculated for s=1 and
s=sr and then they are linearly interpolated between the two points. An other
possibility is to enter predefined curves for M/Mr and I/Ir as precise as possible
(curves given by the manufacturer). Using the entered values, R2 and X2 may
be calculated for every point. Between the entered points, R2 and X2 will be
interpolated linearly. Using these exact curves of R2 and X2 for the model of
the asynchronous machine, the electromagnetic torque Me and the current I
may be calculated for every possible slip s.
Thats why the input of data in this Model tab is only necessary for the second,
more precise possibility of calculating the model. The first possibility is
standard and is done automatically.
Equivalent-circuit impedances
R1/Zr M Stator side resistance related to Zr.
X1/Zr M Stator side leakage reactance related to Zr.
Xh/Zr M Main reactance related to Zr.
Rated values
Ur SMHP Rated voltage in kV, entered in the Params tab.
Ir SMHP Rated current in kA, entered in the Params tab.
Mr M Rated torque in Nm.
Zr M Rated impedance in Ohm, calculated with Ur and Ir.
Asynchronous machine table entries
Insert A new table line will be entered.
Delete The marked table lines will be deleted.
Calculate M By pressing the button, R2/Zr and X2/Zr will be
calculated for every slip which has the Calc. R2, X2
box checked. Using m/Mr and I/Ir.
Sort The table entries will be sorted according to the slip.
Plot Predefined (based on M/Mr and I/Ir) and calculated
(based on X2/Zr(s) and R2/Zr(s)) curves for the current
I(s), the electromagnetic torque Me(s), the Cosphi(s)
and the load torque Ml(s) may be displayed.
S M Slip
M/Mr M Electromagnetic torque related to rated torque.
I/Ir M Current related to rated current.
Cosphi Cos(phi), not necessary for the calculation of R2/Zr

and X2/Zr.
R2/Zr M Rotor resistance related to Zr
X2/Zr M Leakage reactance related to Zr
Calc. R2,X2 M Checkbox, defines if R2 and X2 shall be calculated
when the button Calculate is pressed.
Library
Characteristic M The table entries (machine characteristic) can be
type imported from or exported to a library. By pressing the
button , an existing characteristic type in the
selected library can be chosen.
Export to M The table entries (machine characteristic) may be
library exported to the library by pressing this button. A name
for the characteristic has to be typed in the text field.
Equivalent circuit for motor starting calculations

The equivalent circuit of an asynchronous machine for motor starting
calculation is given below:
R1 X1 X2(s)
Xh R2(s)/s
Fig. 4.35 Asynchronous machine equivalent circuit
The equivalent circuit impedances are calculated with the help of the input
values of the Params tab:
X1 = k(Ir/Ia) 0.26 < k < 0.55, default k=0.5;

Xh = 1.0 / (sin() - cos() ((Mk/Mr) - ((Mk/Mr) 2 - 1.0))
R1 = ha - (Ir/Ia)2(Ma/Mr) cos() / (1.0 - sr)
R2(s=1) = Xh2(ha - R1) / hb
X2(s=1) = Xh hc / hb
R2(s=sr) = Xh2 (cos() - R1) sr / hd
X2(s=sr) = Xh ((X1 - sin()) (sin() - X1 - Xh) - (R1 - cos()) 2 / hd

ha = (Ir/Ia) cos(an)
hb = (ha - R1) 2 + ((Ir/Ia) sin(an) - X1 - Xh) 2
hc = (X1 - (Ir/Ia) sin(st)) ((Ir/Ia) sin(st) - X1 - Xh) - (R1 - (Ir/Ia) cos(st)) 2
hd = (cos() - R1) 2 + (sin() - X1 - Xh) 2
The following abbreviations are taken:

Cos(): Rated power factor
Cos(st): Locked rotor power factor
Mr, Mk, Ma: Nominal, breakdown and locked rotor torque
Ir, Ia: Rated and locked rotor current
: Efficiency
s, sr: Slip and rated slip
Consideration of Saturation and eddy currents

The saturation of the leakage reactance X2 and the eddy-currents losses in R2
are considered in the equivalent circuit as follows:
Without any table entries in the Model tab:

During start-up the resistance R2 and the reactance X2 are linear interpolated
between the points R2(s=1) and R2(s=sr) resp. X2(s=1) and X2(s=sr). The
calculation of these values from the motors input values are given above. This
representation of the motor leads to a result on the safer side.
With table entries in the Model tab:

To obtain more accurate results, the user has the possibility to enter a
sequence of rotor resistances and leakage reactances R2 resp. X2 in function
of the slip s. Because it is difficult to know the values for R2 and X2 in functions
of the slip, the user can enter the values for the electromagnetic torque Me, the
current I and the Cos(phi) in function of the slip (curves given by the
manufacturer -> predefined curves). With these values the program calculates
R2 and X2 for each given slip, when the Calculate button has been pressed.
For every slip between the given values, the program interpolates linearly R2
and X2, to get a complete model. To compare the calculated curves with the
manufacturers (predefined) curves, it is possible to display both in the same
diagram (button Calculate).

Asynchronous Machine Info

Asynchronous Machine - Reliability

Asynchronous Machine - User Data

Asynchronous Machine - More
Investment Data
Start-up device
Start-up M** Indicates, whether the machine will be started up during
motor starting calculation or not.
t start M** Time in seconds after which the motor will be start-up.
**
Start-up M Starting device. Possible values:
device - Direct: Direct start-up
- YD: Wye-Delta start-up
- Z stator: Start-up impedance
- R rotor: Rotor resistance start-up

- Transformer: Start-up with auto-transformer

- C: Start-up with compensation
t switch, M** There are two options to by-pass the start-up device. It
s switch can be switched after reaching a certain time or a certain
slip in %. When switching after time, the delay of start-up
tstart will be considered. The switching time will be
therefore t = tstart + tswitch. If direct starting this value has
no meaning.
Transfomer
Ur1, Ur2 M** Transfomer rated voltage at primary and secondary side
in kV. This input is only relevant in case of transformer
start-up.
Sr M** Transfomer rated power in MVA. This input is only
relevant in case of transformer start-up.
uRr, ukr M** Transformer copper losses and short circuit voltage in %
This input is only relevant in case of transformer start-up.
Z stator
Rs M** Real part of stator start-up impedance in Ohm. This input
field is only important if the start-up device will be "Z
stator".
Xs M** Imaginary part of stator start-up impedance in Ohm. This
input field is only important if the start-up device will be "Z
stator".
R rotor
Rr M** Start-up rotor resistance in Ohm. This input is only
relevant in case of rotor resistance start-up.
C start
Qc M** Reactive power in kvar, which will be compensated at
voltage Un. This input is only relevant in case of
capacitor start-up. The capacity C, which will be inserted
parallel to the motor, is:
C = Qc / Un2
Cascading
n cascade M** The values C, Rr or Zs (Rs, Xs) will be cascade during
the start-up, if the start-up type will be "C", "R rotor" or "Z
stator". The values will be changed as follows:
Ci = C - (i - 1) * C / n
Rri = Rr - (i - 1) * Rr / n

Zsi = Zs - (i - 1) * Zs / n
The running variable i (cascade i) begins at 1 and is
incremented by 1 during the start-up, according to the n
time resp. slip areas (see "t switch", "s switch").
Mechanical Load
H M** Inertia constant.
**
J M Moment of inertia in kgm.
Load torque
Given as M** The load torque characteristic may be entered by a Table
or a Parabola.
Table M** The Table can be chosen from a Library.
Parabola
M0, M1, M2 M** Parameters of quadratic starting characteristic (Parabola)
Mload(s)=M0+M1*(1-s)+M2*(1-s) in Nm (s: slip) or
related to the rated torque of the motor (see below).
Nm M** Gives the units of the load torque:
Nm (checkbox checked) or related to the rated torque of
the motor.
Load Table Entries
s, M load M** The load torque may be entered as a table with user
defined points.
Remark:
The load torque is described by the equation:
Ml = M0 + (1 - s) M1 + (1 - s) 2 M2 (parabola)
or
Ml = Ml(s) (characteristic (table entries))
The input of Ml(s) is more significant as the input of M0, M1 and M2.
Voltage drop calculation: All values marked with (M*) are necessary.
Motor starting calculation: All values marked with (M*) or (M**) are
necessary.

Cosphi characteristic curve (AM)
Cosphi oper
Cosphi max
Cosphi min
P
P min P lim P max
Fig. 4.36 Cosphi characteristic curve
Description of the Model (SC) (AM)
Fig. 4.37 Model of asynchronous machine for short-circuit calculation
The model parameters of the positive sequence are calculated as follows:
Positive sequence:
Z = cos(phi)Ur / [Prmech(Ia/Ir)n] n: number of ASM
X = Z / ((Rm/Xm)+1)
R = X (Rm/Xm)
The ratio Rm/Xm will be set according to IEC, if Rm is set to 0:

Rm/Xm = 0.1 for high voltage motors with active power Pr per Pole
pair >= 1MW
Rm/Xm = 0.15 for high voltage motors with active power Pr per Pole
pair < 1MW

Rm/Xm = 0.42 for low voltage motors
The impedance Z = R + jX of zero sequence is set to infinity.
Remark:
For a thyristor fed motor (corresponding checkbox must be checked) the
following values are assumed:
Ia/Ir = 3
Rm/Xm = 0.1

PS-Block
This chapter describes the parameters of the Data Input Dialog of a Power
Station Block and the corresponding model.
PS-Block Parameters
Type Applicable only with a "Power Station Block" library.
Pressing the button "", the type may be chosen and
the data can be transferred from the predefined
library.
Unit transformer
Ur1, Ur2 SMHP Rated voltage of the node 1 and 2 in kV.
Sr SMHP Rated power of the transformers in MVA.
Vector group SP Wiring of the windings in node 1 and 2. Default-value:
YY.00 .
uRr(1) SMHP Positive sequence copper losses in % with respect to
Sr (of transformer) and Ur1.
ukr(1) SMHP Positive sequence short circuit voltage in % with
respect to Sr and Ur1.
uRr(0) SP Zero sequence copper losses in the windings 1 and 2
in % with respect to Sr and Ur1.
ukr(0) SP Zero sequence short circuit voltage in % with respect
to Sr and Ur1.
Earthing SP Indicates de type of earthing of the unit transformer.
Re1, Xe1 SP Real- and imaginary part of earthing impedance in
Ohm, on primary side (winding 1).
Unit generator
Sr SMHP Rated power of generator in MVA.
xd" sat SMHP Saturated subtransient reactance in % with respect to
Sr (of generator) and Ur2.
x(2) SP Negative sequence reactance x(2)=0.5 (xd"+xq") in %
with respect to Sr (of generator) and Ur2.
Cos(phi) SMHP Power factor.
xd sat. SP Synchronous reactance in % with respect to Sr (of
generator) and Ur (saturated value).
Ufmax/Ufr SP Ratio of highest possible excitation voltage to rated

excitation at rated load and power factor.

Turbo SP Checkbox to indicate the type of the synchronous
machine.
Operational data
P oper LMDR Input of active power in MW. For generating power the
value for P must be given as positive value. For loads
the value must be given as negative value.
Q oper LMDR Input of reactive power in Mvar. Positive value means
generation of capacitive reactive power (overexcited
generator); negative value means consumption of
capacitive reactive power (under excited generator).
PS Block Info
PS Block - Reliability
PS Block - User Data

PS Block - More
Investment Data


Description of the Model (PS Block)
3 Ze1 Z R
T G
X
G
t:1
Fig. 4.38 Model of power station block in the positive and negative system
The model parameters of the positive and negative sequence are calculated as
follows:
Positive sequence Negative sequence

ZT = ukr(1)Ur1/(Sr100) ZT = ukr(1)Ur1/(Sr100)
RT = uRr(1)Ur1/(Sr100) RT = uRr(1)Ur1/(Sr100)
XT = (ZT-RT) XT = (ZT-RT)
ZT = RT + jXT ZT = RT + jXT
RG = Rf RG = Rf
XG = xd"Ur/(100SrG) XG = x(2)Ur/(100 SrG)
ZG = RG + jXG ZG = RG + jXG
The model of the power station block in the zero sequence depends on the
vector group of the transformer. Because the star point of the transformer is
not grounded on generator side, the only transformers with vector groups ZY
and YD can lead a zero sequence current.

3 Ze
ZT
Fig. 4.39 Model of power station block (vector groups YD or ZY) in the zero
sequence
Zero sequence
ZT = ukr(0)Ur1/(Sr100)
RT = uRr(0)Ur1/(Sr100) XT = (ZT-RT)
ZT = RT + jXT
Ze1 = Re1 + jXe1
The parameter RG (resistance) is set in function of Ur and Sr according to IEC:
RG = 0.05xd" (for Ur > 1 kV and Sr >= 100 MVA)

RG = 0.07xd" (for Ur > 1 kV and Sr < 100 MVA)
RG = 0.15xd" (for Ur <= 1 kV)
Remarks:
The power station block is only for short circuits according to IEC909.
For all other calculation, also short circuit calculation according to
IEC60909, it is more convenient to represent a generator and a
transformer separately.
According to IEC the impedances ZT and ZG must be multiplied by the factor

K:
IEC909
K = cmax/(1+(xd"-XT)sin(phi)) considering the voltage ratio.
IEC60909
The correction factors are given in die sections for data input for generators
and transformers.

Load
This chapter describes the parameters of the Data Input Dialog of a Load and
the corresponding model.
Load Parameters
Type Applicable only with a load library. Pressing the button
Lf-Type () Type of node for load flow calculation. Possible values:
"cos(phi)" compulsory (see below).
"IC": I,C-node. Input of the values "I" and
"PI": P,I-node. Input of the values "P" and "I"
"SC": S,C-node. Input of the values "S" and
"EC": E,C-node. Input of the values "E",
"Velander factor 1", "Velander factor 2" and
Units () Indicates if the values P, Q and I are given for low or
high voltage. Possible values:
HV: High voltage
LV: Low voltage
The default value can be given in the Edit Options
mask (see "Edit Options" in chapter "Menu Insert").
When introducing a new load the default unit will be
taken.
S () Consumed power in MVA or kVA. Dependent on the
phase connectivity (see Info tab) the value must be
P () Consumed active power in MW or kW. Dependent on
Q () Consumed reactive power in Mvar or kvar. Dependent

on the phase connectivity (see Info tab) the value must

be entered as phase value.
I () Amount of load current in kA or A. Dependent on the
cos (phi) () Power factor of the load. Dependent on the phase
phase value.
E () Total yearly energy consumption in MWh or kWh.
Conversion into P with Velander-Coefficients:
P = kvel1 E + kvel 2 E
Velander () Velander-Coefficient 1
factor 1
factor 2
P(0) SP Consumed active power in the zero system in MW or
kW.
Q(0) SP Consumed reactive power in the zero system in Mvar
or kvar.
Domestic () Number of domestic units (see below).
units
Total () Indicates the total scaling factor for the active power of
scaling the load. It is calculated by the product of the network,
factor for P of the zone, of the assigned and of the calculated
scaling factor for P: ftp=fnp*fzp*fap*fc
Total () Indicates the total scaling factor for the reactive power
scaling of the load. It is calculated by the product of the
factor for Q network, of the zone, of the assigned and of the
calculated scaling factor for Q: ftq=fnq*fzq*faq*fc
Scaled () The scaled values for Poper, Qoper, Soper, Ioper and
values Cos(phi)oper are calculated with P and Q and the
respective scaling factors:
Poper= P* ftp ; Qoper= Q* ftq
Equivalent H Defines, if R and L are connected in series or in
circuit for parallel.
harmonic
analysis
Load Balancing
Load L Indicates, if the load is variable during load balancing
variable calculation. If yes and if the option "Set calculated

values" is active in the Load flow Parameters, then the

calculated scaling factor will be written in the respective
field of the load (see below).
Calculated () Shows the calculated scaling factor after a load flow
scaling calculation with load balance if the load is variable and
factor (P,Q) if the option "Load balance - Set calculated values" in
the Load flow Parameters is active. The factor can be
modified manually after a load balancing calculation. It
will be multiplied by the effective scaling factor.
The values P, Q, I and cos(phi) will be calculated dependent on input.
Load Voltage Dependency

Voltage LDR The user may choose between two equivalent static
dependency load models, the exponential model and the composite
model model.
Exponential model
XP LDR Voltage exponential factor for active power.
XQ LDR Voltage exponential factor for reactive power.
Composite model (ZIP model)
Csp LDR constant power fraction of active load
Csq LDR constant power fraction of reactive load
Cip LDR constant current fraction of active load
Ciq LDR constant current fraction of reactive load
Czp LDR constant impedance fraction of active load
Czq LDR constant impedance fraction of reactive load.
Ua1 D Upper voltage limit for a reduction factor R(u)=1.
Ua2 D Upper voltage limit for a reduction factor R(u)=0.
Ub1 D Lower voltage limit for a reduction factor R(u)=1.
Ub2 D Lower voltage limit for a reduction factor R(u)=0.
Frequency dependency
Fp D frequency-dependence factor of active load
Fq D frequency-dependence factor of reactive load

Load Scaling Factors

Operating () Indicates if the load is working as a load or as a
Mode generator, depending on the sign of the active power P.
For the load mode, P has to be positive, for generator
mode negative.
Scaling factor () Displays the predefined scaling factors of P and Q for
of network the network. Depending on the Operating Mode, these
are the scaling factors for generation or load.
Scaling factor () Displays the predefined scaling factors of P and Q for
of zone the zone. Depending on the Operating Mode, these are
the scaling factors for generation or load. Predefined
scaling factors may be changed in Edit - Data -
Operational Data (see chapter Menu Options).
Assigned () Displays the scaling factors of P and Q, assigned to
scaling factors this load. It's a total of the assigned user defined
scaling factors.
Effective () Displays the effective scaling factors of P and Q for this
scaling factors load. It's the product of the network- the zone- and the
assigned scaling factor: fe=fn*fz*fa
This scaling factor will be multiplied by the calculated
scaling factor to get the total scaling factor. (see Load-
Parameters)
Table () The user has the possibility to assign one or more user
as follows:
p = Portion


equation:
Pfactor_t2(t) +
Qfactor_t2(t) +
Insert () Inserts in the table a time dependent scaling factor,
Remove () Removes the marked scaling factor from the table.
Define scaling () Enters in the Scaling Factors Editor, where the user
factors may define Scaling Factors and the time-dependent
characteristic curves (see chapter User Defined
Show () Shows the time dependent characteristic curves of the
characteristic Scaling Factor Type marked in the table.
Load Info
Load - Reliability
Load - User Data

Load - More


Investment Data
Mixed Load Power (Load)

The consumed power of a load consists of
a general load P and Q (input see above) and
a load due to the number of domestic units nDU.
The active power PDU and the Cos(phi), which are assigned to one domestic
unit, are entered in the load flow parameter mask. In the Scaled values of the
Params tab of the load data input dialog, the power Poper and Qoper
represent the sum of the general load and the domestic loads, multiplied by the
effective scaling factor:
Poper = fep(P + nDU PDU)

Qoper = feq(Q + nDU PDU Sin(phi) / Cos(phi))
When calculating the load flow accordingly to the voltage drop method
an other power will be set for mixed load power (see chapter "Load Flow").
Description of the Model (Load)

See chapter "Load Flow".
Description of the Model (Load) (Short circuit according to superposition

method)
For short circuit calculation, the loads are considered only, when the
superposition method is used, but not for the IEC and ANSI norm. The loads
are considered in the positive, negative and zero system when calculating
short circuit according to superposition method. Otherwise they are not
considered. The model is similar to that one of the shunt element, which
means the loads are represented by impedances:

Fig. 4.40 Model of a Load for SC-calculation with superposition methode
follows:
Positive system Zero system

R = P(1)U/(P(1)+Q(1)) R = P(0)U/(P(0)+Q(0))
X = Q(1)U/(P(1)+Q(1)) X = Q(0)U/(P(0)+Q(0))
U Calculated with a load flow. If no load flow has

been calculated, the program set U = Un (Un:
nominal system voltage).
Static load models (Voltage dependence)

The user may choose between two equivalent static load models, the
exponential model and the composite model (see Load Voltage
Dependency). For both models a frequency dependency may be defined and
for the composite model, a reduction factor can be applied additionally.
Exponential model
Traditionally, the voltage dependency of load characteristics has been
represented by the exponential model:
xP
u f
p = p0 1 + Fp
u0 f0

xQ
u f
q = q0 1 + Fq
u0 f0
The parameters of this model are the exponents xP and xQ. With these
exponents equal to 0, 1 or 2, the model represents constant power, constant
current or constant impedance characteristics, respectively. For composite
loads, their values depend on the aggregate characteristics of load
components.
p: ongoing active load

q: ongoing reactive load
p0 : initial active load
q0 : initial reactive load
u: magnitude of ongoing node voltage
uo : magnitude of initial voltage (nominal system voltage)
f0 : rated frequency
f : frequency difference from rated frequency
Composite model (ZIP model)

An alternative model which has been widely used to represent the voltage
dependency of loads is the composite model (ZIP model):
u u 2 f
p = p0 csp + cip + c zp 2 1 +
Fp
u0 u0 f0
u u 2 f
q = q0 csq + ciq + c zq 2 1 + Fq
u0 u0 f0
c zp = 1 cip csp
c zq = 1 ciq csq
The model is composed of constant impedance (Z), constant current (I) and
constant power (P) components. The parameters of the model are the
coefficients csp, cip, czp and csq, ciq, czq, which define the proportion of each
component.

Frequency dependency
The frequency dependency of the load characteristics is represented by
multiplying the exponential model or the composite model by a factor
f
1 + F , where f is the frequency deviation (f-f0).
f0
Typically, Fp ranges from 0 to 3.0, and Fq from 2.0 to 0.
Reduction factor
It is physically impossible for a load to retain its constant current or power
character at very high or very low voltages. Theoretically, for example, an
infinitely high current would have to be provided for a constant power at a
voltage of 0.
In the dynamic simulation, particularly during short-circuits, very low voltages
are encountered, at which a constant current or a constant level of power is not
plausible. In cases of this kind, there may also be convergence problems at
short-circuit inception.
As a remedy for these physical and mathematical problems, the supply current
is downsized with a reduction factor if the voltage is too high or too low.
For voltages greater than umax or smaller than umin, the reduction factor is
downsized from 1 to 0 using a continuous function.
Mathematically, the reduction factor is represented by:
u u 2
u < u b1 R( u ) = MAX 1 b1 ;0
u b1 u b 2
u b1 u u a1 R( u ) =1
u u 2
u > u a1 R( u ) = MAX 1 a1 ;0
u a1 u a 2
For the values

ub1 = 0.9 pu ; ub2 = 0.75 pu
ua1 = 1.1 pu ; ua2 = 1.25 pu
the behavior of the reduction factor is illustrated below:

Voltage dependence of the reduction factor

R(u)
ub1 ua1
1
0
0.75 0.9 1.0 1.1 1.25 u [pu]
ub2 ua2
Fig. 4.41 Voltage dependence of the reduction factor
The reduction factor is used only in the composite model. R(u) is reducing the
constant current and the constant power factors by multiplication:
u u 2 f
p = p0 R( u ) c sp + R( u ) cip + c zp 2 1 + Fp
u0 u0 f0
u u 2 f
q = q0 R( u ) csq + R( u ) ciq + c zq 2 1 + Fq
u0 u0 f0
c zp = 1 R( u ) cip R(u ) c sp
c zq = 1 R( u ) ciq R(u ) c sq

DC Load
This chapter describes the parameters of the Data Input Dialog of a DC Load
and the corresponding model.
DC Load Parameters
Type Applicable only with a load library. Pressing the button
Regulation () Type of node for load flow calculation. Possible values:
"P": P-node. Input of the values "Pset"
"I": I-node. Input of the values "I set" compulsory
(see below).
"R": R-node. Input of the values "R set"
P set () Consumed DC power at node in MW.
I set () Amount of DC load current in kA.
R set () Load DC resistance in Ohm.
DC Load Info
DC Load - Reliability
DC Load - User Data


DC Load - More
Investment Data

Line Load
This chapter describes the parameters of the Data Input Dialog of a Line Load
and the corresponding model.
There are two possibilities to assign a line load to a line. If the user wants the
line load to be represented graphically, the line load symbol has to be chosen
in the Symbol Window and pasted on the respective line. The Data Input
Dialog appears.
If a graphical representation of the line load isnt necessary, its possible to
enter the line loads in the Data Input Dialog of the respective line by pressing
the Line loads button in the More tab. In this window also the line loads,
which have been entered graphically, appear. The Input-Data is shown in
tabular form. By double clicking on the number of the respective line load, the
Data Input Dialog opens.
Also more than one line load may be entered per line.
Line Load Parameters

Type Applicable only with a line load library. Pressing the
Lf-Type () Type of node for load flow calculation. Possible values:
"IC": I,C-node. Input of the values "I" and
"PI": P,I-node. Input of the values "P" and "I"
"SC": S,C-node. Input of the values "S" and
"EC": E,C-node. Input of the values "E",
"Velander factor 1", "Velander factor 2" and
Units () Indicates if the values P, Q and I are given for low or
high voltage. Possible values:

HV: High voltage

LV: Low voltage
The default value can be given in the Edit Options
mask (see "Edit Options" in chapter "Menu Insert").
When introducing a new load the default unit will be
taken.
S () Consumed power in MVA or kVA. Dependent on the
P () Consumed active power in MW or kW. Dependent on
Q () Consumed reactive power in Mvar or kvar. Dependent
on the phase connectivity (see Info tab) the value must
be entered as phase value.
I () Amount of load current in kA or A. Dependent on the
cos (phi) () Power factor of the load. Dependent on the phase
phase value.
E () Total yearly energy consumption in MWh or kWh.
Conversion into P with Velander-Coefficients:
E = kvel1 E + kvel 2 E
factor 1
factor 2
Distance () Distance of the load in m or in % from the starting node
of the line.
Domestic () Number of domestic units (see below).
units
Total () Indicates the total scaling factor for the active power of
scaling the line load. It is calculated by the product of the
factor for P network and the zone scaling factor, the scaling factor
of the line load and the calculated scaling factor.
P: fep=fnp*fzp*fs*fc
Total () Indicates the total scaling factor for the reactive power
scaling of the line load. It is calculated by the product of the
factor for Q network and the zone scaling factor, the scaling factor

of the line load and the calculated scaling factor.

Q: feq=fnq*fzq*fs*fc
Scaling () Scaling factor of the line load for the active and reactive
factor power. This factor will be multiplied by the network and
the zone scaling factor as well as with the calculated
scaling factor.
Scaled () The scaled values for Poper, Qoper, Soper, Ioper and
values Cos(phi)oper are calculated with P and Q and the
respective scaling factors:
Load Balancing
Calculated () Shows the calculated scaling factor after a load flow
scaling calculation with load balance if the option "Load
factor (P,Q) balance - Set calculated values" in the Load flow
Parameters is active. The factor can be modified
manually after a load balancing calculation. It will be
multiplied by the network and the zone scaling factor
and by the scaling factor of the line load.
Remark:
The predefined scaling factors for the network and zones may be modified in
Data - Operational Data of the menu Edit (see chapter Menu Options).
Line Load - Info

Line Load - Reliability

Line Load - User Data


Mixed Load Power (Line Load)

The consumed power of a load consists of
a general load P and Q (input see above) and
a load due to the number of domestic units nDU.
The active power PDU and the Cos(phi), which are assigned to one domestic
unit, are entered in the load flow parameter mask. The power, which will be
taken by the load flow is correspondingly:
Pcal = P + nDU PDU

Qcal = Q + nDU PDU Sin(phi) / Cos(phi)
The powers Pcal and Qcal are multiplied by the simultaneity factor.
When calculating the load flow accordingly to the voltage drop method,
an other power will be set for mixed load power (see chapter "Load Flow").
Assignment of the Loads to the Line Load Center

The line loads are assigned to a new node on the line. During load flow
calculation this node will be generated automatically by the program in the load
center of the line. The load center is calculated as follows:
P l
l tot = (Pl ll )
ltot = (Pl ll ) P l
with
Pl Active power of the line load
ll Distance of the line load from the lines starting node
ltot Distance of the line load center from the lines starting node
The new node, which is generated in a distance of ltot from the lines starting
node, gets an arbitrary name. The sum of all loads of the line is assigned to
this node. If the load center is closer than 7m from the lines starting or ending
node, no new node will be generated. Then the line loads are assigned to
either the starting node or ending node. The position of the line load symbol
has nothing to do with the load center. To the line load symbol no results are
assigned.

Description of the Model (Line Load)

See chapter "Load Flow".
Phasing of the line loads

The line loads have the same phasing connectivity as the line itself. A single
phase line for example carries only single phase loads.

User Defined Scaling Factors
The user can define constant scaling factors and time-dependent scaling
factors for day-times, week-days, moths and years. The factors may be defined
only in the project or they can be saved to a library. There exist the following
possibilities to enter in the user defined scaling factors editor:
To define Scaling Factors and time-dependent characteristics to a library,
while the project wont be modified:
Menu Libraries Scaling Factors
To define Scaling Factors and time-dependent characteristics directly in the

project, to export them to a library or to get them from a library:
Menu Edit Data Define Scaling Factors
Data Input Dialog of an element tab Scaling Factors Define Scaling
Factors
To calculate the Effective Scaling Factors for a certain element, the User
Defined Scaling Factors are multiplied with the Predefined Scaling Factors for
the network and zones. Predefined Scaling Factors may be modified in Edit -
Data Operational Data. For more information about Predefined Scaling
Factors see chapter Menu Options.
Scaling Factors
A list of all existing Scaling Factor types appears after having selected the tab
Scaling Factors in the Scaling Factor Editor. For every type the user can
define constant scaling factors and time-dependent scaling factors. Scaling
Factor types may be added or removed.
Types Shows all existing Scaling Factors types. With New, a

type can be added; with Delete a type may be removed.
Description Description of the Scaling Factors type.
Constant factor Constant scaling factor for P and Q.
for manual
scaling
Time-dependent The time-dependent factor is composed of a "Day by
factor Hours" characteristic, a "Week by Days" characteristic, a
"Year by Months" characteristic and a "Long Term by
Years" characteristic (see below). By pressing the button
Select the characteristic curves may be selected.

The time-dependent scaling factor is used only for the

module "Load Flow with Load Profiles" and it is calculated
as follows:
Pfactor_t(t) = fd(t)*fw(t)*fy(t)*fl(t)
Qfactor_t(t) = fd(t)*fw(t)*fy(t)*fl(t)
Day by Hours Characteristics

A list of all existing "Day by Hours" characteristics appears after having
selected the respective tab in the Scaling Factor Editor. By clicking on a
characteristic type, the corresponding curve will be displayed and its values
may be modified. Characteristic types may be added or removed.
Types Shows all existing day characteristics types. With New, a

Description Description of the day characteristic type.
Time-value-table Definition table. The program interpolates linearly between
two points. In maximum 1440 time values may be entered;
for every seconde a value.
Time Time (hour and minutes), editable directly in the table.
Factors A P-factor and a Q-factor between 0 and 1 may be entered
or edited directly in the table.
Insert 1 item Inserts one time value after the marked line. If no line is
selected, the additional value will be added at the end of
the table.
Insert items Inserts the indicated amount of time values after the
marked line. If no line is selected, the additional time
values will be added at the end of the table.
Remove Removes the marked time values.
Same values for If this checkbox is active, the Q factors of the table wont
P and Q scaling be considered. Instead the Q factors will be the same as
the P scaling factors.
Week by Days Characteristics

A list of all existing "Week by Days" characteristics appears after having

Types Shows all existing week characteristics types. With New,

a type can be added; with Delete a type may be
removed.
Description Description of the week characteristic type.
Day values For all days, Monday to Sunday, a P and a Q factor
between 0 and 1 may be entered. The values will be
presented with bars in the graphic of the week
characteristics.
Year by Months Characteristics

A list of all existing "Year by Months" characteristics appears after having
Types Shows all existing month characteristic types. With New,

a type can be added; with Delete a type may be
removed.
Description Description of the month characteristic type.
Month values For all months, January to December, a P and a Q factor
between 0 and 1 may be entered. The values will be
presented with bars in the graphic of the week
characteristics.
Long Term by Years Characteristics

A list of all existing "Long Term by Year" characteristics appears after having

Types Shows all existing year characteristic types. With New, a

Description Description of the year characteristic type.
Year values For every year a P and a Q factor between 0 and 1 may be
entered.
Year Year (4 digits: e.g. 2004) for which a P and a Q factor
should be defined.
P scaling P-factor for the respective year.
Q-factor Q-factor for the respective year.
Insert Inserts a year value.
Remove Removes a year value.
Library Import / Export

If the user doesnt modify the Scaling Factors directly in the Library Menu, the
Library wont be modified. In this case it exists the possibility to export or import
Scaling Factors and Characteristics to and from the library.
Actual project The list contains all scaling factors and characteristic types
defined in the project. They may be selected, unselected
or deleted.
Selected library The list contains all scaling factors and characteristic types
defined in the active library. They may be selected,
unselected or deleted.
Open Library An existing library may be opened.
New Library A new library may be created.
>> By pressing these buttons, the selected types may be
<< copied from the project to the library or from the library to
the project.

Filter
This chapter describes the parameters of the Data Input Dialog of a filter and
the corresponding model.
Filter Parameters
Type Applicable only with a filter library. Pressing the
button "", the type may be chosen and the data
C-Filter () Idicates if the filter is a C filter.
HP-Filter () Idicates if the filter is a HP filter.
To enter the data there are two possibilities:
Type 1:
Qr () Reactive power of filter in kvar of positive sequence.

The power is given as a positive value, although the
power is capacitive.
f0 () Resonance frequency in Hz.
G () Q factor of filter in pu.
Damp.factor () Damping factor (only relevant for C-filter and HP-
filter)
Type 2:
Rv () Resistance of filter in Ohm. The losses are

represented.
L () Inductance of filter in mH.
C () Main capacitance of filter in F.
Cs () Auxiliary capacitance of filter in F (only relevant for
C-filter).
Rd () Damping resistance of the filter in Ohm (only
relevant for C-filter and HP-filter).

Filter Info
Filter - Reliability
Filer - User Data

Filter - More
Investment Data
Description of the Model (Filter)

Rv L C
a) normal filter
Rv L C
Rd
b) HP-filter
Rv L Cs C
Rd
c) C-filter
Fig. 4.42 Model of a filter
The positive sequence will be used in any case, excepted in the short circuit
calculation according to IEC. The zero sequence will be only considered in the
short circuit calculation.
If the parameters Qr, f0, G, DF are entered, the program will calculate the
parameters Rv, L, C, Rd and vice versa. The formulas are:
Calculation from Qr, f0, G, DF to Rv, L, C, Cs, Rd:

f0
n=
fn
n2 1 1
Ch = Qr
n 2
2 fn Ur 2

1
L=
( 2 fn) 2 Ch
2 f 0 L
Rv =
G
a) Normal filter:
C = Ch
Rd = 0.0
b) HP-filter:
C = Ch
L
Rd = DF DF: Damping factor
C
c) C-filter:
1 .0
Cs =
L (2 fn) 2
1.0
C=
1 1
Ch Cs
L
Rd = DF DF: Damping factor
C
Calculation from Rv, L, C, Rd to Qr, f0, G, DF:

a) Normal filter:
Ch = C
Rd = 0.0
b) HP-filter:
Ch = C
C
DF = Rd DF: Damping factor
L
c) C-filter:

1.0
Ch =
1 +1
C Cs
C
DF = Rd
L
For all filters equal:

f0
n=
fn
1
f0 =
2 L Ch
n2
Qr = Ch 2 fn Ur 2
n 1
2
2 f 0 L
G=
Rv
with fn as nominal system frequency in Hz.

Serie-R-L-C (without Earth Connection)
This chapter describes the parameters of the Data Input Dialog of a Serie-R-L-
C (without Earth Connection) and the corresponding model.
Serie-R-L-C Parameters
Type Applicable only with an RLC-Circuit library. Pressing
Rv () Resistance in Ohm.
L () Inductance in mH.
C () Capacitance in F.
Serie-R-L-C Info
Serie-R-L-C - Reliability
Serie-R-L-C - User Data

Serie-R-L-C - More


Investment Data
Description of the Model (Serie-RLC)

The following possibilities exist to enter the Serie-RLC circuit.

R L
R C
L C
R L C
Fig. 4.43 Possibilities to introduce the Serie-RLC circuit without earth connection
With this element the user will be able to model every type of filter or an other
element.
The positive and the zero sequence, which are equal, are considered.

Parallel-RLC
This chapter describes the parameters of the Data Input Dialog of a Parallel-
RLC circuit and the corresponding model.
Parallel-RLC Parameters
Type Applicable only with a Parallel-RLC library. Pressing
the button "", the type may be chosen and the
To input the data there are two possibilities:
Type 1:
Sr () Throughput power of low frequency filter in kVA.

f0 () Resonance res. stop frequency of filter in Hz.
G () Q factor of filter in pu.
P () Nominal reactance of filter in %.
Type 2:
Rv () Resistance of low frequency filter in Ohm.

L () Inductance of low frequency filter in mH.
C () Capacitance of low frequency filter in F.
Parallel-RLC Info
Parallel-RLC - Reliability

Parallel-RLC - User Data

Parallel-RLC - More
Investment Data
Description of the Model (Parallel-RLC)
Fig. 4.44 Model of a Parallel-RLC resonance circuit
The positive and zero sequence, which are equal, are considered. From Sr, f0,
G and p the program will calculate Rv, L and C. The way round is not possible.
Calculation from Sr, f0, G, p to Rv, L, C:
1 p Ur 2
L=
2 fn 100 Sr

1
C=
( 2 f 0 )2 L
Rv = G L / C
with fn as nominal system frequency.

Serie-E-RLC (with Earth Connection)
This chapter describes the parameters of the Data Input Dialog of a Serie-E-
RLC circuit and the corresponding model.
Serie-E-RLC Parameters
Type Applicable only with a Serie-E-RLC library. Pressing
Rv () Resistance in Ohm.
L () Inductance in mH.
C () Capacitance in F.
Serie-E-RLC Info
Serie-E-RLC - Reliability
Serie-E-RLC - User Data

Serie-E-RLC - More


Investment Data
Description of the Model (Serie-E-RLC)

The possibilities to enter the Serie-E-RLC circuit:

R L
R C
L C
R L C
Fig. 4.45 Possibilities to input the Serie-E-RLC circuit in serie with earth connection
With this element the user will be able to model every type of filter or an other
element.
The positive sequence will be used in any case, excepted in the short circuit
calculation according to IEC. The zero sequence will be only considered in the
short circuit calculation.

Disconnect-Switch
Its possible to enter Disconnect Switches between two nodes. This chapter
describes the parameters of the Data Input Dialog of a Disconnect-Switch.
Disconnect-Switch Parameters
Type Applicable only with a Disconnect-Switch library. Pressing
the button "", the type may be chosen and the data can
remote R Indicates, if the switch is remote controlled.
controlled
Urmax SP Maximum voltage for which the switch is designed and
upper limit of operation in kV.
Ir LM Rated current of switch in kA.
Ik" SP Max. allowable initial short circuit current or Close & latch
rating of the switch kA.
Ibmax SP Max. allowable breaking current or interrupting rating of
the switch in kA. For disconnect switch no input
necessary.
Ipmax SP Max. allowable peak short circuit current in kA.
r(1) D Positive sequence resistance in mOhm.
r(0) D Zero sequence resistance in mOhm.
x(1) D Positive sequence reactance in mOhm.
x(0) D Zero sequence reactance in mOhm.
Remark:

Disconnect-Switch Info
Disconnect-Switch - Reliability
Disconnect-Switch - User Data


Load-Switch
Its possible to enter load switches between two nods. This chapter describes
the parameters of the Data Input Dialog of a Load-Switch.
Load-Switch Parameters
Type Applicable only with a Load-Switch library. Pressing the
controlled
necessary.
R(1) D Positive sequence resistance in mOhm.
R(0) D Zero sequence resistance in mOhm.
Remark:

Load-Switch Info
Load-Switch - Reliability
Load-Switch - User Data


Circuitbreaker
Its possible to enter Circuitbreakers between two nods. This chapter describes
the parameters of the Data Input Dialog of a Circuitbreaker.
Circuitbreaker Parameters
Name O Name of element.
Type O Applicable only with a Circuitbreaker library. Pressing the
controlled
Cycles SP Interrupting time of the ANSI breakers in cycles. Possible
values: 2, 3, 5, 8 cycles
k-factor SP Ratio of rated maximum voltage Urmax to the lower limit
of the range of operation voltage in which the required
symmetrical and asymmetrical interrupting capabilities
vary in inverse proportion to the operating voltage (only
for ANSI breakers).
Cosphi test SP Cos(phi) at which the breaker was tested (only for ANSI
breakers).
necessary.
Standard SP Indicates the dimensioning of the breaker: breaker
according to IEC or ANSI/IEEE.
HV/LV SP Indicates, if the breaker is a low or a high voltage
breaker.
r(1) D Positive sequence resistance in mOhm.
r(0) D Zero sequence resistance in mOhm.

Remark:
The data of this element are also considered in the module selectivity analysis.
Circuitbreaker Info
Circuitbreaker - Reliability
Circuitbreaker - User Data


Fuse
This chapter describes the parameters of the Data Input Dialog of a Fuse.
Fuse - Parameters
Type Applicable only with a Fuse library. Pressing the button
Ir LM Rated current in A.
Element Type () Type of the element where the variable is measured.
Variable () Variable to be measured.
Modification () Option to modify the measured variable.
Element () Element to which the fuse is assigned to.
Side () The side of the element (node) the fuse is assigned to.
Characteristic O Button to choose a fuse type from a device library.
Tripping D Button to define tripping functions for transient stability
simulations.
This element will not be used for calculations. Only its allowable limits are
checked. The data are considered in the module selectivity analysis and
transient stability.
Fuse - Info
Fuse - Reliability
Fuse - User Data


Overcurrent Relay

Overcurrent Relay.
Overcurrent Relay Parameters

Name O Name of element.
Type Applicable only with an Overcurrent Relay library.
Side () The side of the element (node) the fuse is assigned to.
Characteristic O Button to choose a fuse type from a device library.
Tripping D Button to define tripping functions for transient stability
simulations.
checked. The data are considered in the module selectivity analysis and
transient stability.
Overcurrent Relay - Info

Overcurrent Relay - Reliability

Overcurrent Relay - User Data



Distance Relay
This chapter describes the parameters of the Data Input Dialog of a Distance
Relay.
Distance Relay Parameters

Type Applicable only with a Distance Relay library. Pressing
This element will not be used for calculations.
If the user has purchased the module "distance protection" the push button
"Characteristics" is available. With this option the user can enter the starting
and the tripping data as well as the grading diagram (see chapter "Distance
Protection").
Distance Relay - Info

Distance Relay - Reliability

Distance Relay - User Data


Frequency Relay
This chapter describes the parameters of the Data Input Dialog of a Frequency
Relay.
Frequency Relay Parameters

Type Applicable only with a Frequency Relay library.
the data can be transferred from the predefined library.
Relay type Type of relay(-setting range).
Side () The side of the element (node) the relay is assigned to.
Stages D Define stages and its tripping functions for transient
stability simulations.
This element will not be used for steady state calculations. The data are
considered in the module Dynamic Analysis.
Frequency Relay - Info

Frequency Relay - Reliability

Frequency Relay - User Data


Voltage Relay
This chapter describes the parameters of the Data Input Dialog of a Voltage
Relay.
Voltage Relay Parameters

Type Applicable only with a Voltage Relay library. Pressing
Voltage Relay - Info

Voltage Relay - Reliability

Voltage Relay - User Data


Power Relay
This chapter describes the parameters of the Data Input Dialog of a Power
Relay.
Power Relay Parameters

Type Applicable only with a Power Relay library. Pressing
Power Relay - Info

Power Relay - Reliability

Power Relay - User Data


Current Transformer
This chapter describes the parameters of the Data Input Dialog of a Current
Transformer.
Current Transformer Parameters

Type Applicable only with a Current Transformer library.
Ir1 P Rated current on primary side of CT in kA.
Ir2 P Rated current on secondary side of CT in kA.
Ith(1s) Thermal short circuit current in kA.
Ith Thermal steady state current in kA.
checked.
The ratio Ir2/Ir1 will be used by the module distance protection.
Current Transformer - Info

Current Transformer - Reliability

Current Transformer - User Data


Voltage Transformer
Transformer.
Voltage Transformer Parameters

Type Applicable only with a Voltage Transformer library.
Ur1 P Rated voltage on primary side of VT in kA.
Ur2 P Rated voltage on secondary side of VT in kA.
This element will not be used for calculations.
The ratio Ur2/Ur1 will be used by the module distance protection.
Voltage Transformer - Info

Voltage Transformer - Reliability

Voltage Transformer - User Data


Harmonic Current Source
This chapter describes the parameters of the Data Input Dialog of a Current
Source.
Current Source Parameters

Name H Name of element.
Type H Applicable only with a Harmonic Current Source library.
Ir H Rated current in A.
f / Harm. H Editing frequency in Hz or Number of harmonic.
I H Editing harmonic current in A or in % related to Ir.
i angle H Editing angle of harmonic current in degree.
Current i in % H Checkbox: Indicates, if the currents are entered in %.
Frequ. f in Hz H Checkbox: Indicates, if the frequency in Hz is entered,
or the number of the harmonic.
Insert H A new table entry can be made. The input values may
be modified directly in the table.
Delete H The selected table lines will be deleted.
Current Source - Info

Current Source - Reliability

Current Source - User Data


Harmonic Voltage Source
Source.
Voltage Source Parameters

Name H Name of element.
Type H Applicable only with a Harmonic Voltage Source
library. Pressing the button "", the type may be
chosen and the data can be transferred from the
predefined library.
Ur H Rated voltage in kV.
f / Harm. H Editing frequency in Hz or Number of harmonic.
U H Editing harmonic voltage in V or in % related to Ur.
u angle H Editing angle of harmonic voltage in degree.
Voltage u in % H Checkbox: Indicates, if the voltages are entered in %.
Frequ. f in Hz H Checkbox: Indicates, if the frequency in Hz is entered,
or the number of the harmonic.
Insert H A new table entry can be made. The input values may
be modified directly in the table.
Delete H The selected table lines will be deleted.
Voltage Source - Info

Voltage Source - Reliability

Voltage Source - User Data


Series Equivalent LF
This chapter describes the parameters of the Data Input Dialog of a Series
Equivalent for load flow calculation and the corresponding model. This element
will be taken into account only for load flow calculation. There exists an other
Series Equivalent element for short circuit calculation.
Series Equivalent are generated by the module Network reduction in order to
get the same load flow or short circuit calculation results for the reduced and
original network (see module "Network reduction").
Series Equivalent (LF) Parameters

Type Applicable only with a Series Equivalent LF library.
and the data can be transferred from the
predefined library.
Un1 L Nominal system voltage in kV at "from node"
Un2 L Nominal system voltage in kV at "to node"
R12(1), X12(1), L Positive sequence transfer impedance from "from
node" to "to node" in Ohm.
R21(1), X21(1), L Positive sequence transfer impedance from "to
node" to "from node" in Ohm.
Series Equivalent (LF) - Info

Series Equivalent (LF) - Reliability

Series Equivalent (LF) - User Data


Description of the Model (Series Equivalent LF)

The element Y-matrix will be calculated in per unit as follows:
Y11 Y12
[Y ] =
Y21 Y22
with
Y11 = 1.0 / Z12 Z12 = (R12 + jX12) / Zn1
Y12 = -1.0 / Z12 Zn1 = Un12 / Sn
Y21 = -1.0 / Z21 Z21 = (R21 + jX21) / Zn2
Y22 = 1.0 / Z21 Zn2 = Un22 / Sn
Un1 : Nominal system voltage primary side
Un2 : Nominal system voltage secondary side
Sn = 100MVA

Series Equivalent SC
This chapter describes the parameters of the Data Input Dialog of a Series
Equivalent for short circuit calculation and the corresponding model. This
element will be taken into account only for short circuit calculation. There
exists an other Series Equivalent element for load flow calculation.
Series Equivalent are generated by the module Network reduction in order to
Series Equivalent (SC) Parameters

Type Applicable only with a Series Equivalent SC library.
predefined library.
Un1 S Nominal system voltage in kV at "from node".
Un2 S Nominal system voltage in kV at "to node".
R12(1), X12(1), S Positive sequence transfer impedance from "from
R21(1), X21(1), S Positive sequence transfer impedance from "to
R12(2), X12(2), S Negative sequence transfer impedance from "from
R21(2), X21(2), S Negative sequence transfer impedance from "to
R12(0), X12(0), S Zero sequence transfer impedance from "from
R21(0), X21(0), S Zero sequence transfer impedance from "to node"
to "from node" in Ohm.
Series Equivalent (SC) - Info


Series Equivalent (SC) - Reliability

Series Equivalent (SC) - User Data

Description of the Model (Series Equivalent SC)

The element Y-matrix will be calculated in per unit for all three sequence
systems as follows:
Y11 Y12
[Y ] =
Y21 Y22
with
Y11 = 1.0 / Z12 Z12 = (R12 + jX12) / Zn1
Y12 = -1.0 / Z12 Zn1 = Un12 / Sn
Y21 = -1.0 / Z21 Z21 = (R21 + jX21) / Zn2
Y22 = 1.0 / Z21 Zn2 = Un22 / Sn
Un1 : Nominal system voltage primary side
Un2 : Nominal system voltage secondary side
Sn = 100MVA

Shunt Equivalent LF
This chapter describes the parameters of the Data Input Dialog of a Shunt
Equivalent for load flow calculation and the corresponding model. This element
will be taken into account only for load flow calculation. There exists an other
Shunt Equivalent element for short circuit calculation.
Shunt Equivalents are generated by the module Network reduction in order to
Shunt Equivalent (LF) Parameters

Type Applicable only with a Shunt Equivalent LF library.
predefined library.
Un1 L Nominal system voltage in kV at from node.
R1(1), X1(1) L Positive sequence shunt impedance in Ohm.
P Gen L Generated real power in MW. The sign must be
negative.
Q Gen L "Generated" reactive power in Mvar. The sign must
be negative for generation (over excited generator).
The sign must be positive for consumption (under
excited generator).
P Loa L Consumed real power in MW. The sign must be
positive.
Q Loa L "Consumed" reactive power in Mvar. The sign must
be negative for generation (over excited motor).
The sign must be positive for consumption (under
excited motor)
Shunt Equivalent (LF) - Info


Shunt Equivalent (LF) - Reliability

Shunt Equivalent (LF) - User Data

Description of the Model (Shunt Equivalent LF)

The element Y-matrix will be calculated in per unit as follows:
Y11 0.0
[Y ] = 0.0 0.0

with
Y11 = 1.0 / Z1 Z1 = (R1 + jX1) / Zn1
Zn1 = Un12 / Sn
Un1: Nominal system voltage primary side
Sn = 100MVA
( Ploa Pgen ) + j ( Qloa Qgen )

I* =
U
with
I: Nodal current in the node
U: Nodal voltage

Shunt Equivalent SC
This chapter describes the parameters of the Data Input Dialog of a Shunt
Equivalent for short circuit calculation and the corresponding model. This
element will be taken into account only for short circuit calculation. There exists
an other Shunt Equivalent element for load flow calculation.
Shunt Equivalents are generated by the module Network reduction in order to
Shunt Equivalent (SC) Parameters

Type Applicable only with a Shunt Equivalent SC library.
predefined library.
Un1 S Nominal system voltage in kV at "from node".
R1(1), X1(1) S Positive sequence shunt impedance in Ohm.
R1(2), X1(2) S Negative sequence shunt impedance in Ohm.
R1(0), X1(0) S Zero sequence shunt impedance in Ohm.
Shunt Equivalent (SC) - Info

Shunt Equivalent (SC) - Reliability

Shunt Equivalent (SC) - User Data


Description of the Model (Shunt Equivalent SC)

The element Y-matrix will be calculated in per unit for all three sequence
systems as follows:
Y11 0.0
[ ] 0.0 0.0
Y =

with
Y11 = 1.0 / Z1 Z1 = (R1 + jX1) / Zn1
Zn1 = Un12 / Sn
Un1: Nominal system voltage primary side
Sn = 100MVA
( Ploa Pgen ) + j ( Qloa Qgen )

I* =
U
with
I: Nodal current in the node
U: Nodal voltage

Earth Switch
This chapter describes the parameters of the Data Input Dialog of an Earth
Switch.
Earth Switch Parameters

Type Applicable only with a Earth Switch library. Pressing
controlled
Urmax S Maximum voltage for which the switch is designed
and upper limit of operation in kV.
Ik'' S Max. allowable initial short circuit current or Close &
latch rating of the switch kA.
Ibmax S Max. allowable breaking current in kA.
Ipmax S Max. allowable peak short circuit current in kA.
Earth switches are not considered in the calculations.
Earth Switch - Info

Earth Switch - Reliability

Earth Switch - User Data


Surge Arrester
This chapter describes the parameters of the Data Input Dialog of a Surge
Arrester.
Surge Arrester Parameters

Type Applicable only with a Surge Arrester library. Pressing
Ur Rated voltage in kV.
Uc Permanent operating voltage in kV.
E Energy absorption capacity in kJ/kVuc.
Ures(10kA) Residual Voltage in kV for 10 kA (8/20s).
Ures(1kA) Residual Voltage in kV for 1 kA (30/60s).
I Long-wave capacity 2000s in A.
Surge arresters are not considered in the calculations.
Surge Arrester - Info

Surge Arrester - Reliability

Surge Arrester - User Data


Measurement Device

Measurement Device.
Measurement Device Parameters

Type Applicable only with a Measurement Device library.
Phase values LM When activating this option, the measurement values may
be entered for all three phases independently. In case of
symmetrical calculation the phase values for active power
will be added and an average value for the current will be
taken.
If not checked, the total 3-phase active and reactive
power and a conductor current may be entered.
P LM Measured total active power in the phases in MW. This
value is only relevant when calculating with load balance
(see loadflow parameters).
If the power flows into the built-in node (see above)
the value must be entered as a negative value, if not
the value is positive.
Q LM Measured total reactive power in the phases in Mvar. This
value is only relevant when calculating with load balance
(see loadflow parameters).
If the power flows into the built-in node (see above)
I LM Measured conductor current in A. This value is only
relevant when calculating with load balance (see loadflow
parameters). The current value is only considered,
when the input fields for the active and reactive
power P and Q are set to 0.
If the current flows into the built-in node (see above)
U Phase voltage in kV, only for information.
Use behavior L The module "Load Flow with Load Profiles" uses the
behavior instead of a fixed value.

Delete L Button to delete the actual behavior.

behavior
Show L Shows the behavior graphically.
behavior
Remark
The user has to pay attention, that in the network equal measurement data (P,
Q or I) exist. If there are unequal measurement data for a region, the loads
cannot be balanced.
Measurement Device - Info

Measurement Device - Reliability

Measurement Device - User Data


Control Circuit CCT
By entering a Control Circuit CCT-symbol, a new diagram will be opened,

where the respective control circuit may be designed, using the function blocks
described in chapter Function blocks on page 4-200.
There is no difference in the diagrams, used for control circuit (function blocks)
entries and network entries. Control circuits (function blocks) and networks
could even be entered in the same diagrams.
The data input dialog of a CCT-symbol consists only of an Info and a Reliability
tab.
Control Circuit CCT - Info

Control Circuit CCT - Reliability

Control Circuit CCT - User Data

General information about control circuits

A control circuit is made up of several function blocks.
Each control circuit possesses one or more input variables and one or more
output variables.
An input variable can be any analog or binary variable of the network.
An output variable can be:
the exciter voltage of a synchronous machine
the turbine torque of a synchronous machine
the conductance of a controlled admittance
the susceptance of a controlled admittance

A control circuit can also have more than one output variable for different
synchronous machines.
Input and output variables are connected to the control circuit concerned by
means of input and/or output blocks. Note that an input block turns a variable
into a controller signal.
A controller signal is an analog or binary output of a control circuit's function
block. A controller signal can also be used for outputting on the screen, as a
list or in a file.
The function blocks of a particular control device are linked to each other via
controller signals, this link between the function blocks being "output-
controlled". An input of a particular function block is assigned to be an output of
another function block, (ie. a controller signal).
The identifier of a controller signal consists of the 16 characters of the name of
the control circuit and 8 characters of the name of the controller signal.
Initialization of control circuits

The starting values of control circuits are determined by blockwise initialization
of individual function blocks.
Initialization of function blocks takes place from left or right, so long as it is
allowed for the particular function block. In most cases initialization with this
procedure is successful.
If a blockwise initialization of a control circuit is not successful, Prost
automatically searches for starting values of those function blocks, which are
not yet initialized, to determine them by an iterative procedure. This procedure
is based on Newton-Raphson iteration method. Iterative initialization is,
however, applicable only to steady transfer functions or transfer functions
having no discontinuities. Limits will not be taken into consideration during
iterative initialization. After reaching a successful initialization, limits will be
checked and limit violations will be reported.
Should iterative initialization not yield a solution or starting values come out to
be unrealistic, it helps often to specify starting values as input for some of the
integrators.

Function blocks
In this chapter all available function blocks to build control circuits are
described.
Function Blocks, respectively Control Circuits have to be entered in diagrams.
There is no difference in the diagrams, used for function block entries and
network entries. Function blocks (which build a Control Circuit) and networks
could even be entered in the same diagrams.
In the following description of the function blocks, the transfer functions are
mentioned as well as the initial values, which have to be calculated during the
initialization process. For the user, these initial values have only importance, if
the initialization process isnt successful. It can help to find out, which variables
cant be calculated during the iteration process.
Input
Functional description:
A control circuit's input interface to other elements. A variable of the network
is converted into a controller signal.
Variable Controller signal

u1 y1
Fig. 4.46 Input block
Transfer function Initial value Remark

y1 = u1 u1 Iterative initialization permissible
Output
A control circuit's output interface to other elements. A controller signal is
converted into a variable of the network.

Controller signal Variable

u1 y1
Fig. 4.47 Output block

y1 = u1 y1 Iterative initialization permissible
Remarks:
The following operands can be specified with an OUTPUT function block:
Field voltage of a synchronous machine
Turbine shaft power of a synchronous machine
Conductance (active component) of a controlled admittance
Susceptance (reactive component) of a controlled admittance
Source
Constant signal source with a value of u0.
K
y1
u0
Fig. 4.48 Source block

Network Source
Constant signal source with a value, which will be taken from the results of
the Load flow calculation.

K
y1
u0LF
Fig. 4.49 Source block

y1 = u0LF u0LF Iterative initialization permissible
The LF value u0LF can be a voltage/voltage angle, current/current angle, active

or reactive power of a bus, bus element or branch. This value will always be
updated from the Load flow calculation.
Sum
Sum formation from two input signals u1 and u2 and a constant u0.
u0
+ y1
u1
K +
+
u2
K
Fig. 4.50 Sum block

y1 = u0 + K 1 u1 + K 2 u 2 u1, u2 or y1 Iterative initialization permissible
Type 0: Type 1:
u0 is a constant value u0 is calculated by PROST.
Iterative initialization permissible
Impermissible:
|K1| or |K2| smaller than 10-8 if corresponding entry is used
Remark:
By setting K2 = -1., for example, u2 can be subtracted from u1.

Product
Product formation from two input signals u1 and u2 and a constant u0.
u0
u1
y1
u2
Fig. 4.51 Product block

y1 = u 0 u1 u 2 u1, u2 or y1 Iterative initialization permissible
Type 0: Type 1:
u0 is a constant value. u0 is calculated by PROST.
Iterative initialization permissible
Impermissible:
|u0| smaller than 10-8 if Type 0.
Remark:
Initialization is not possible if u1 or u2 < 10-8.
Inverter
Multiplication of the reciprocal of input variable u1 with a constant K0.
K
u1 y1
f(u1)
Fig. 4.52 Inverter block

K0 u1 or y1 Iterative initialization permissible.

y1 =
u1
Impermissible:
|K0| smaller than 10-8
Remark:
If |u1| is smaller than 10-8: y1 = K0108sign(u1)
Ratio
Division of input variable u1 by input variable u2 and multiplication with a
constant K0.
u1 K
y1
f(u1,u2)
u2
Fig. 4.53 Ratio block

u1 u1 or u2 or y1 Iterative initialization
y1 = K 0
u2 Two of the variables must be given; permissible
the third variable is computed.
Impermissible:
Remark:
If |u2| smaller than 10-8: y1 = K0u1108sign(u2)
Gain - Linear
Multiplication of input variable u1 with a constant K.

K
u1 y1
K0
Fig. 4.54 Gain block - Linear

y1 = K 0 u1 U1 or y1 Iterative initialization permissible
Impermissible:
Gain - Sectionally linear

Non-linear function for simulating a sectionally linear relationship with two
points of discontinuity.
K
u1 y1
Fig. 4.55 Gain block - Sectionally linear
Transfer function Initial Remark

value
if u1 0 : y1 0 u1 or y1 Iterative
if u1 ua : y1 = K o + K a u1 initialization
permissible
if ua < u1 ub : y1 = K o + K a ua + K b (u1 - ua )
if u b > u1 : y1 = K o + K a ua + K b (ub - ua ) + K c (u1 - ub )
Impermissible:
|Ka|,|Kb| or |Kc| smaller than 10-8 or larger than 108

Gain - Tabularly non-linear
A tabular function f(u) is used as the transfer function. Data are entered into
the table in the TAB data block of the Dynamic Data file. The type of
interpolation to be used (linear, cubic or Newtonian) is likewise specified
there.
u1 y1
Fig. 4.56 Gain block - Tabularly non-linear

y1 = K 0 f(u )
1
u1 ; Under the mentioned
For strictly monotonously descending condition on the left,
or ascending tabular functions, y1 can iterative initialization
also be given as the initial value (right- is permissible.
to-left initialization).
Impermissible:
|K0| smaller than 10-8 or larger than 108
Exponential
Taking the exponent of the input variable u1.
K
u1 y1
f(u1)
Fig. 4.57 Exponential block
y1 = K 0 + K1 eK 2 u1 u1 or y1 ; Iterative initialization without

If (y1 K0)/K1 < 10-8 : limits permissible.

u1 = ln(108)/K2
Impermissible:
|K1| or |K2| smaller than 10-8
For initialization with y1 = 0: K0 and K1 not the same sign
Power
Taking the Kth power of the input variable u1.
K
u1 y1
K
U1
Fig. 4.58 Power block

y1 = u1K u1 or y1 Iterative initialization permissible
Impermissible:
|K| smaller than 10-4 or greater than 104
Absolute
Absolute value of input variable
u1 y1
u1
Fig. 4.59 Absolute value block

Limitation
Limiting the input variable u1 to a maximum or minimum value, which may
also depend on another input variable.
u2ymax
u2
K
y1
u1
1
u3
u3ymin
Fig. 4.60 Limitation

y1 = Minimum(u1,u2ymax) u1 or y1 Iterative initialization without limits
y1 = Maximum(u1,u3ymin) permissible
Limitation:
The limitation is of the "windup" type. If you want to deactivate the limitation
function, you must set ymax and ymin to equal 0. u2 and u3 can be used to
simulate dependent limit values. If the limit values concerned are constant,
then you must specify blanks for u2 and/or u3.
Rate of change limitation

Limiting the change of input variable u1 to a maximum or minimum value,
which may also depend on another input variable.

Example:
u2ymax u1, y1
Input u1
u2
K Output y1
y1
u1 1
u3
Decline ymin
Increase ymax
u3ymin t
Fig. 4.61 Rate of change limitation

see the example given u1 or y1 Iterative initialization without limits
above. permissible
Limitation:
function, you must set ymax and ymin to equal 0. u2 and u3 can be used to
simulate dependent limit values. If the limit values concerned are constant,
then you must specify blanks for u2 and/or u3.
Dead band
Dead band with gain factor.
K
u1 y1
umin
umax
Fig. 4.62 Dead band

u1 u max y1 = K 0 u1 u1 Iterative initialization not
u min < u1 < u max y1 = 0 permissible
u1 u min y1 = K 0 u1

Impermissible:
HV Gate
The larger of the two input signals, u1 and u2, is switched through to the
output. HV gate corresponding to [4].
u1 K
y1
f(u1,u2)
u2
Fig. 4.63 HV Gate
if u1 u2 : y1 = u1 u1 and u2 always possible Iterative initialization

if u1 < u2 : y1 = u2 u1 and y only if y > u1 not permissible
u2 and y only if y > u2
LV Gate
The smaller of the two input signals, u1 and u2, is switched through to the
output. LV gate corresponding to [4].
u1 K
y1
f(u1,u2)
u2
Fig. 4.64 LV Gate
if u1 u2 : y1 = u1 u1 and u2 always possible Iterative initialization

if u1 > u2 : y1 = u2 u1 and y only if y < u1 not permissible
u2 and y only if y < u2

Coordinate transformation - Polar Rectangular

Converting the variable u1 (magnitude) and the variable u2 (angle in [rad]) into
a real and an imaginary part of a complex variable, and multiplying it by a
complex constant K.
u1 y1
K
f(u1,u2) y2
u2
Fig. 4.65 Coordinate transformation - Polar Rectangular
K = K1+jK2 u1 and u2 Iterative initialization

z1 = u1cos(u2) permissible
z2 = u1sin(u2)
z = z1+jz2
y = y1+jy2 = Kz
y1 = z1K1-z2K2
y2 = z1K2+z2K1
Coordinate transformation - Rectangular Polar

Multiplying the variable u1 (real part) and the variable u2 (imaginary part) by
the complex constant K and converting the complex result into magnitude and
angle (in [rad]).
u1 y1
K
f(u1,u2) y2
u2
Fig. 4.66 Coordinate transformation - Rectangular Polar

z1 = u1K1-u2K2 u1 and u2 Iterative initialization

z2 = u1K2+u2K1 permissible
y1 = z12 + z22
z2
y 2 = arctan
z1
Excitation - Per Unit Conversion

No function, kept for compatibility reasons.
K
u1 y1
1
Fig. 4.67 Excitation - Per Unit Conversion

y1 = u1 u1 or y1 Iterative initialization permissible
Excitation - Saturated exciter machine

Exponential transfer function for simulating the feedback of saturable exciters
(KE + SE ) used as per [4] and/or [5].
K
u1 y1
f(u1)

Fig. 4.68 Excitation - Saturated exciter machine
(
y 1 = K 0 + K 1 eK 2 u1
) u
1
u1 Iterative initialization permissible
Impermissible:
|K1| or |K2| smaller than 10-8
Remark:
The constants are computed as follows from the parameters stated in [4]
and/or [5]:
V S4E 0.75 max
K 0 = R max S E max K1 = 3
E FD max S E max
4 S
K2 = ln E max
E FD max S E 0.75 max
Excitation - Static exciter

Static excitation as per IEC 34-16-1, 1991.
u1 y1

f(x)
K0 u 2
u2
u1
Fig. 4.69 Excitation - Static exciter

See block diagram above. The non- u1 and u2 Iterative initialization
linear function f(x) corresponds to not permissible

the NLF 2 function block (rectifier

regulation characteristic).
Remark:
The input and output variables correspond to the following electrical variables
of static exciter devices:
u1 = VE
u2 = IFD
y = EFD
Excitation - Rectifier controller

Non-linear function corresponding to the "rectifier regulation characteristic" in
[4].
K
u1 y1
f(u1)
Fig. 4.70 Excitation - Rectifier controller

u1 0 :y1 = 1 u1 or y1 Iterative initialization
if u1 (3)/4 : y1 = 1-(1/3)u1 permissible
2
if (3)/4< u1 < 3/4 : y1 = 3/4 - u1
if u1 3/4 : y1 = (3)(1-u1)
if u1 1 : y1 = 0
Excitation - Non-continuous controller

Non-linear function corresponding to Type DC3 in [4].

u1 K
y1
f(u1,u2)
u2
Fig. 4.71 Excitation - Non-continuous controller

if u2 > K0 : y1 = YMAX u1 and u2 Iterative initialization
if |u2| K0 : y1 = u1 not permissible
if u2 < -K0 : y1 = YMIN
Static compensators - Firing angle

Non-linear function for simulating the output of thyristor controls plotted
against the firing angle.
K0
K
u1 y1
0 1,0
Fig. 4.72 Static compensators - Firing angle
u1 or y1 Iterative initialization
y1 = K 0 u1 sin ( u1 )
1
permissible
Impermissible:

Static compensators - Step function

Step function
K
u1 y1
Fig. 4.73 Static compensators - Step function

u1 < 0 y1 = 0 u1 Iterative initialization
u1 > u max y1 = K not permissible
u max i
u1 (i s) y1 = K
n n
Note:
n: Number of intervals of the u-range
i: Ongoing interval i = 1...n
s: Position of step change 0s1
0: Step change on the right of the interval
0.5: Step change in the middle of the interval
1: Step change on the left of the interval
umax: Range for u1
Impermissible:
umax or ymax smaller than +10-8 or larger than +108
The function is defined only for positive umax or ymax
Remarks:
For the initialization of u1 from a given y1 the step function is shifted parallel to
the y-axis, such that the given y1 value exactly lies on a step.
Integrator
Integrator.

u2yma
u1 y1,0
u2 y1
f(s)
u3
u3ymin
Fig. 4.74 Integrator

K0 y1, an initial value can be given Iterative initialization
y1 = u1
s as input. permissible
Limitation:
The limitation is of the "non-windup" type. If you want to deactivate the
limitation function, you must set ymax and ymin equal to 0. u2 and u3 can be
used to simulate dependent limit values.
Time-delay block 1st-order

1st-order time-delay block
u2ymax
u2
K
y1
u1 f(s)
u3
u3ymin
Fig. 4.75 Time-delay block 1st-order

K0 u1 or y1 Iterative initialization without limits
y1 = u1
1 + sT N1 permissible

Limitation:
Derivative block 1st-order

1st-order derivative block
u2ymax
u2
K
y1
u1 f(s)
u3
u3ymin
Fig. 4.76 Derivative block 1st-order

K 0 sTD u1 Iterative initialization without limits
y1 = u1
1 + sTD permissible
Limitation:
function, you must set ymax and ymin equal to 0. u2 and u3 can be used to
simulate dependent limit values.
Remarks:
Time constants smaller than 10-5 will automatically be taken as 10-5
PI controller
PI controller

u2ymax
u2
K
y1
u1 f(s)
u3
u3ymin
Fig. 4.77 PI controller

1 + sTZ u1 or y1 Iterative initialization without limits
y1 = K 0 u1
1 + sTN permissible
Limitation:
Remarks:
If the denominator time constant equals 0, then the Transfer function
corresponds to the CONSTANT function block with limitation.
PID controller
PID controller
u2ymax
u2
K
y1
u1 f(s)
u3
u3ymin

Fig. 4.78 PID controller

(1+ sTZ1 ) (1+ sTZ2 ) u1 or y1 Iterative initialization without
y1 = K 0 u1
(1+ sTN1 ) (1+ sTN2 ) limits permissible
Limitation:
Remarks:
Time constants |TN1|, |TN2|, |TZ1| or |TN1-TN2| smaller than 10-5 will automatically
be taken as 10-5.
Rational transfer function 2nd-order

2nd-order rational transfer function
u2ymax
u2
K
y1
u1 f(s)
u3
u3ymin
Fig. 4.79 Rational transfer function 2nd-order
b o + b1 s + b 2 s 2 u1 or y1 Iterative initialization without limits

y1 = u
a o + a1 s + a 2 s 2
1 permissible
Impermissible:

|a0|, |a2| or |b0| smaller than 10-8.

Any value smaller than 10-8 will be taken internally as 10-8.
Limitation:
Rational transfer function 3rd-order

3rd-order rational transfer function
u2ymax
u2
K
y1
u1 f(s)
u3
u3ymin
Fig. 4.80 Rational transfer function 3rd-order
b o + b1 s + b 2 s 2 + b 3 s 3 u1 or y1 Iterative initialization without

y1 = u
a o + a1 s + a 2 s 2 + a 3 s3
1 limits permissible
Impermissible:
|a0|, |a3| or |b0| smaller than 10-8
Limitation:

Rational transfer function 4th-order

4th-order rational transfer function
u2ymax
u2
K
y1
u1 f(s)
u3
u3ymin
Fig. 4.81 Rational transfer function 4th-order
b o + b1 s + b 2 s 2 + b 3 s 3 + b 4 s 4 u1 or y1 Iterative initialization
y1 = u
a o + a1 s + a 2 s 2 + a 3 s 3 + a 4 s 4
1 without limits
permissible
Impermissible:
|a0|, |a4| or |b0| smaller than 10-8
Limitation:
Binary - Not
Negation of a binary variable.
u1 y1
Fig. 4.82 Binary Not


y1 = NOT (u1) u1 or y1 Iterative initialization not permissible
Remark:
A variable or a controller signal is logically TRUE if its numerical value is
larger than or equals 0.5.
Binary - And
"AND" function of two binary variables.
u1 K
y1
f(u1,u2)
u2
Fig. 4.83 Binary - And

if u1 and u2: y1 = TRUE u1 and u2 Iterative initialization not permissible
otherwise: y1 = FALSE
Remark:
larger than or equals 0.5.
Binary - Or
"OR" function of two binary variables.
u1 K
y1
f(u1,u2)
u2
Fig. 4.84 Binary - Or


if u1 or u2: y1 = TRUE u1 and u2 Iterative initialization not permissible
otherwise: y1 = FALSE
Remark:
larger or equal to 0.5.
Binary - Switch
Depending on the state of u1, the input signal u2 or u3 is switched through to
the output.
u2
K
y1
u1
u3
Fig. 4.85 Binary - Switch

u1 = TRUE y1 = u2 u1, u2 and u3 Iterative initialization not permissible
u1 = FALSE y1 = u3
Remark:
larger or equal to 0.5.
Rational function 2nd-order

Rational Function of second order.

u1 y1
A + B u1 + C u12
D + E u1 + F u12
Fig. 4.86 Rational function 2nd-order
A + B u1 + C u12 u1, y1 Iterative initialization permissible.

y1 =
D + E u1 + F u12
Impermissible:
|D| and |E| and |F| < 10-8
Remarks concerning the initialization

For a given initial value y1 and |C| or |F| > 10-8 printout of the roots is
displayed (see also Error 1). For the calculation of u1 positive root is used.
During initialization following error messages may be recorded:

a) Given initial value u1 or iterative initialization:
Error 0 : D + E u 1 + F u 12 < 10 8
Initialization continues with denominator = 10-8 .
b) Given initial value y1, if |C| or |F| 10-8:
Error 1 : ( B E y 1 ) 2 4 (C F y 1 ) ( A D y 1 ) < 0 (Printout of roots)
Error 2 : C F y1 < 10 8
c) Given initial value y1, if |C| and |F| < 10-8:
Error 3 : B E y 1 < 10 8
d) Given initial value y1, if |B| and |C| and |E| and |F| < 10-8:
Error 4 : A < 10 8

IF-THEN-ELSE Switch
Depending on the value of u1 related to a constant K, u2 or u3 is switched to
the output. The operator between u1 and K is selectable.
u2
u1 y1
u3
Fig. 4.87 IF-THEN-ELSE Switch

If u1 # K is true : y1 = u2 u1 Iterative initialization not
Otherwise : y1 = u3 permissible.
The operator # can be selected as
<, , =, , or >.

Load Flow
Load Flow
Calculation Parameters (LF)
The calculation parameters are entered with the help of a "Parameters" dialog. It
consists of the three tabs, Parameter, References and Area/Zone Control, which
are explained here.
Parameter
Calculation The Load flow can be calculated according to one of the fol-
method lowing methods (see Calculation methods and their appli-
cation on page 5-14):
Extended Newton-Raphson method
Current iteration method
Newton-Raphson method
Voltage drop (only for radial networks !)
Calculation with
Distributed slack Indicates, whether the load flow should be calculated with
distributed slack or not (see "Calculation with Distributed
Slack" on page 5-19).
Area control Indicates, whether the load flow should be calculated with
area control or not (see "Area/Zone Control (LF)" on page 5-
20).
Wheeling Option for Area control.
Option deactivated: The power exchange (calculated from
the transactions) takes place only over the elements connect-
ing the two network groups (tie elements).
Option activated: The power exchange defined for each
transaction, can involve other network groups, not participat-
ing in the transaction.
Wheeling is always allowed when calculating with the Newton
Raphson or current iteration method.
Load balance If checked, the load flow will be calculated with load balance.
The loads will be adjusted (see "Calculation with Load Bal-
ance" on page 5-19).

Load Flow
Set calculated Option for Load balance. If checked, the load will be set after
values a successful load flow calculation with load balance to the
calculated value. This is not valid for Load flow with Load pro-
file.
Transformer Indicates, whether the phase shifting of transformers should
phase shifting be considered or not. The phase shifting is always consid-
ered for asymmetrical load flow. This parameter is not yet
valid for Extended Newton Raphson Method.
Autom. trans- If checked, the taps of regulated transformers will be auto-
former regulation matically adjusted to obtain a node voltage Uset in %. If not
checked no transformers will be regulated.
Set taps to calcu- If checked, the actual transformer taps are set to the calcu-
lated values lated taps (Tap act = Tap cal).
Asymmetrical Indicates, whether the load flow will be calculated with sym-
network metrical or asymmetrical network structure. If calculating
symmetrical load flow, the asymmetrical elements are not
considered.
Control generator Indicates, whether the limits of synchronous machines are
limits controlled during LF calculation. If box is not checked, the
node type will not be changed during NR iteration (see
"Change of node type with Newton-Raphson method").
MW loss sensitiv- If the checkbox is checked, the change of the network active
ity: MW genera- power losses in respect to a change of active power in the
tion at all nodes respective node, will be calculated: dSPn=Ploss/Pn
MW loss sensitiv- If the checkbox is checked, the change of the network active
ity: MVAR gen- power losses in respect to a change of reactive power in the
eration at all respective node, will be calculated: dSQn=Ploss/Qn
nodes
Operational fre- Operating frequency in Hz. This value is considered, when a
quency load flow at a different frequency than the nominal system
frequency must be performed. The static of the generators
are taken into account (see "Synchronous Machine Data" in
chapter "Element Data Input and Models").
Result file
"" Its possible to write a result file (*.rlf) right after the calcula-
tion. Select the file destination and the file name.
This result file can be read by external programs, such as
Excel and the results can be evaluated in an arbitrary way.
Write after calcu- Check this option to write the result file right after the calcula-
lation tion.
Format 4.0 The File can be written in the old Format 4.x (checked) or in

Load Flow
a new Format for V5.x (not checked).

Iteration data
Convergence Convergence criteria for the iteration (see section "Theory of
mismatch: Load Flow Calculation" on page 5-10).
Recommended values: 1.0E-3 .. 1.0E-5.
Max. number of Maximum number of iterations. If the load flow does not con-
iterations: verge, the iteration will stop when this number is exceeded.
Check conver- Use of step control, so that the mismatch decreases in every
gence iteration.
Read initialization If this box is checked, a previous created file (extension: *.ilf)
file with the node voltages and transformer taps will be read. In
this case the load flow will not be started with U=1.0pu (flat
start). The name of the file to be read can be entered.
Write initialization If this box is checked, a file (extension: *.ilf) with the node
file voltages and the calculated transformer taps will be created.
The name of the file can be entered.
Current iteration / asymmetrical networks
Acceleration fac- Factor for handling the PV-nodes for current iteration
tor: method. The larger the factor, the faster the load flow will
converge. The load flow may diverge if a too large value is
entered. If there are no PV-nodes, this factor is irrelevant.
Possible values: 0.05 .. 0.4.
This factor is also used for asymmetrical load flow with cur-
rent iteration method as well as for Newton-Raphson method.
If the network structure is symmetrical or nearly symmetrical
the factor can be set to a value near 1.0. If the network struc-
ture is highly asymmetrical it is recommended to take a value
of 0.25. or less.
Reference values for loading check
Minimum values The user can select, whether the minimal or the maximum
Maximum values rated values of the lines and transformers has to be taken to
calculate the loading of these elements.
Switches, circuit breakers and couplers
Reduce Check this box to reduce switches, circuit breakers and cou-
plers. The calculation will be faster and the possibility of con-
vergence is higher, but no results for these elements will be
calculated. If the box is not checked, for calculation, these
elements are represented by the impedances entered in the
Data Input Dialogs.
This option is not available for the calculation method "Ex-
tended Newton Rapson". In this case these elements are

Load Flow
modeled without any impedance, so they can't provoke con-

vergence problems.
Domestic units
P Active power in kW of one domestic unit. This value is used
for loads and line loads.
Cos(phi) Cos(phi) of domestic unit. This value is used for loads and
line loads.
Kn Interlacing factor for infinite number of domestic units. This
value is used for loads and line loads.
References
Reference for Maximum loading of element in the system (only relevant for
Elements %: evaluation option). Overloaded elements are presented in the
Summary of the load flow results.
Minimum Voltage Minimum value for node voltage with respect to nominal sys-
tem voltage (only relevant for evaluations). In the table, the
reference voltages can be entered individually for each node.
Voltages out of limits are presented in the Summary of the
load flow results.
Maximum Voltage Maximum value for node voltage with respect to nominal sys-
tem voltage (only relevant for evaluations). In the table, the
reference voltages can be entered individually for each node.
Voltages out of limits are presented in the Summary of the
load flow results.
Assign voltages: By pressing this button, the default minimum and maximum
All voltages will be assigned to every node.
Assign voltages: By pressing this button, the voltage level can be chosen, to
Voltage level which the default minimum and maximum voltages will be
assigned.
Area/ Zone Control

Control type The user can chose between the following control types:
- Area control
- Zone control
- Area and zone control

Load Flow
Depending on the control type, only the respective power in-

terchanges of the table, will be considered for the calculation.
From area For area control, it has to be defined from which to which
To area area the power has to flow. By pressing the "Insert" button,
this transaction will be added to the table, where the values
may be edited.
From zone For zone control, it has to be defined from which to which
To zone zone the power has to flow. By pressing the "Insert" button,
this transaction will be added to the table, where the values
may be edited.
Losses taken During Area/Zone Control calculations, losses in the network
over by Slack are taken over by the area or zone which includes the only
slack node in the network. As every node is assigned to an
area and a zone at the same time, for the control type "Area
and zone control", it has to be defined if the area or the zone
which includes the slack node, has to take over the network
losses.
Table entries
Name Name of the transaction.
Active Check the box to activate this transaction.
Type Type of transaction, Area-Area or Zone-Zone.
From MW-power sending area or zone.
To MW-power receiving area or zone.
Psch MW-power to be transmitted.
Tolerance Only for optimal power flow. Maximum deviation from Psch
(Psch Tolerance <= Pexchange <= Psch + Tolerance).

Load Flow
Results (LF)
Select Results
The nodes and elements to be presented in the result table, may be selected
here. In the menu point Show Results, it can be indicated if all elements and
nodes should be presented in the result table or just the ones selected in this ta-
ble.
Also for the single line diagram there is an option in the Load Flow tab of the Edit
Diagram Properties dialog to indicate if the results should be assigned to all
elements and nodes or only to those, selected in this Select Results table.
Show Results
The results can be represented in different tables, each with its specifique infor-
mation.
Summary A summary of the load flow will be displayed. It contains gen-
eral information about the network, the areas and the zones
and about overloaded elements and nodes with voltages out
of the range.
Node results The results of the nodes will be displayed.
Element results General results of elements will be displayed.
Detailed element All results of the elements will be displayed.
results
All results All results mentioned above will be presented here in one ta-
ble.
Units Output units for table list output. The following units are
available: V, kV, A, kA, kVA, MVA.
Result files Its possible to export or import results to or from a *.rlf file by
selecting the file and pressing the respective button.
These result files can be read by external programs, such as
The File can be written in the old Format 4.x or in a new
Format for V5.x.
Below you find a description of the output variables in the result tables:

Load Flow
Summary:
Area/Zone Indicates the network, area or zone, for which the following results
are valid.
P Loss Active power losses in MW, in the network group
Q Loss Reactive power losses in Mvar, in the network group.
P Imp Total imported active power in MW. The imported active power for
the network represents the total Slack power.
Q Imp Total imported reactive power in Mvar. The imported reactive
power for the network represents the total Slack power.
P Gen Total generated active power in MW, in the network group, includ-
ing the Slack.
Q Gen Total generated reactive power in Mvar, in the network group, in-
cluding the Slack.
P Load Total active load power in MW, in the network group.
Q Load Total reactive load power in Mvar, in the network group.
Qc Shunt Total capacitive reactive power in Mvar, of the shunts in the net-
work group.
Ql Shunt Total inductive reactive power in Mvar, of the shunts in the net-
work group.
Q Comp Total line compensation reactive power in Mvar, in the network
group.
In the summary the nodes, which are lower than the reference voltage UminRef or
higher than UmaxRef as well as the overloaded elements are reported.
Node results:
ID Identification number (ID) of the node.
Name Node name.
U [kV] Node voltage (line-earth phasor, but as line-line value) in kV.
u [%] Node voltage in % in respect to nominal node voltage.
U ang Voltage angle in , in respect to the slack voltage.
Sens. PG Sensitivity of the network MW losses for the node, due to a fictive
change of active power generation in the respective node.
dPL/dQP
Sens. QG Sensitivity of the network MW losses for the node, due to a fictive
change of reactive power generation in the respective node.
dPL/dQG
Description Description of the node.

Load Flow
Zone Zone, the node belongs to.

Area Area, the node belongs to.
Partial net- Number of the partial network, the node belongs to.
work
Element results:
ID Identification number (ID) of the element.
Node name Node, the element is connected to (From Node).
Element name Name of the element.
Type Type of element.
P Active power flow through the element in MW.
Q Reactive power flow through the element in Mvar.
I Current flow through the element in kA.
Angle I Current angle in .
Loading Loading of the element in %.
P Loss Active power losses of the element.
Q Loss Reactive power losses of the element.
P Comp Active line compensation power in MW.
Q Comp Reactive line compensation power in Mvar.
Tap Calculated tap position of the transformer.
Ratio Calculated transformer ratio at "Tap act.".
Teta - Angle of the transformer ratio
- Firing angle or inition angle in of a HVDC
- Firing angel in of a TCSC
Overlap Overlap angle in for HVDC (Converter).
Margin Commutation margin angle in for HVDC (Converter)
B tot Total susceptance in mS of a SVC.
X tot Total reactance in Ohm of a TCSC.
U series Voltage drop in kV of a TCSC or Series voltage in kV of a
UPFC.
Ang. U series Angle of Voltage drop in of a TCSC or Angle of Series volt-
age in of a UPFC.
I shunt Shunt current in kA of a UPFC.
Ang. I shunt Angle of Shunt current in of a UPFC.
P exch Exchange active power in MW of a UPFC.

Load Flow
Q exch series Exchange reactive power (series-connected inverter) in Mvar

of a UPFC.
Q exch shunt Exchange reactive power (shunt-connected inverter) in Mvar
of a UPFC.
Slip Slip of Asynchronous Machine.
Torque Mechanical torque in Nm of Asynchronous Machine.
U OpenEnd In case that an element is connected only on one side, the
voltage is calculated at the open end in %, in respect to the
nominal system voltage of the node at the open end.
On Checked, if the element is connected (switches closed).
Description Description of the element.
Zone Zone, the element belongs to.
Area Area, the element belongs to.
Partial Network Number of the partial network, the element belongs to.

Load Flow
Theory of Load Flow Calculation
The starting-point of the load flow calculation are

- the network equation: I = Y U and
- the power equation: S = U I *.
It means:
I: Vector of node currents
U: Vector of node voltages
Y: Network admittance matrix
S: Vector of node powers
Eliminating the vector of the node currents in the power equation, it is obvious,
that the load flow problem will lead to a quadratic non-linear equation system for
the unknown node voltages and given node powers. There are several methods
to solve the problem, thus e.g. Gauss-Seidel method, Newton-Raphson method or
a fast decoupled method. The methods used in this program are / 1 /
a current iteration method with the factorised, reduced Y-matrix and
Newton-Raphson method.
Current Iteration Method with the Factorized, Reduced Y-matrix

The current iteration method consists of two steps
Calculation of node currents Ired from the given node powers Sred and the
node voltages Ured according to
I =S * U * 1 ,
red red red
whereby an estimated value is set for Ured in the first iteration step.
Calculation of the node voltages according to
U = Y 1 (I Y U )
red red red sl sl
It means:
Ured: Vector of the complex node voltages without slack nodes
Ired: Vector of the complex node currents without slack nodes

Load Flow
Yred: Admittance matrix without row and column of slack node

Ysl : Column of slack node in the Y-matrix
Usl : Complex slack node voltage
The two iteration steps starts with U=1.0pu or a predefined value (see
"Calculation Parameters (LF)" on page 5-1, "initialization file") and are done until
the convergence criteria
n Ui + 1 Ui
=
i =1 Ui

is reached (see "Calculation Parameters (LF)" on page 5-1, "Conv.mismatch"). It

means Ui+1 and Ui the voltages of node i in the iteration step (+1) res. in the
step . n represents the number of nodes in the network.
If the algorithm diverges, the iteration is stopped after the maximum number of al-
lowable iterations. This value is given in the calculation parameters, input field
"Max.iteration".
PV-nodes require an additional algorithm, which is explained in / 1 /. The speed of

this algorithm is dependent on an acceleration factor which can be introduced
through the mask of the calculation parameters (input field "Acc.factor").
The Newton-Raphson Method

The Newton-Raphson method proceeds from the error equation for the network
node i:
n
S = ( P j Q ) U Y * U *
i i i i ik k
k =1
The complex voltages Uk have to be found, thus the error Si becomes zero. Pi
and Qi are the predefined active and reactive power. Yik is an element of the Y-
matrix of the i-th line and k-th column. The solution of above error equation con-
sists of three steps:
Calculation of the power mismatch with the help of the voltages for every
node
S i = Svori Sberi

Load Flow
Calculation of the voltage variations for every node with the Jacobi-matrix J
U = J 1 S
Calculation of the node voltages
Uneui = Ualt i U i
The two iteration steps starts with U=1.0pu or a predefined value (see
"Calculation Parameters (LF)" on page 5-1, "initialization file") and are done until
the convergence criteria
n
= S
i
i =1
is reached (see "Calculation Parameters (LF)" on page 5-1, "Conv.mismatch").
The Extended Newton-Raphson Method

The Extended Newton-Raphson method is basically the same as the normal New-
ton Rapson method. In the Extended Newton-Rapson method, the modeling
equations of the elements are formulated in a different way. Additionally, the
FACTS devices and all new features like Area/Zone control are considered by this
calculation method.
Differences between Current Iteration Method and Newton-Raphson Method

The current iteration method shows in network without PV-nodes and without re-
mote control a very good convergence behavior, even in networks with very short
lines (small impedances). It is much faster than the Newton-Raphson method.
Therefore it should be used when the number of PV-nodes are small (1 to 3). This
is the case in medium and low voltage networks. When calculating transmission
networks the Newton-Raphson method should be taken. In case of divergence it
is possible to start the Newton-Raphson algorithm from a predefined voltage pro-
file (see "Calculation Parameters (LF)" on page 5-1). The predefined voltage pro-
file could have been calculated with the current iteration method.
Convergence Control with Newton-Raphson Method

The coefficient for the calculation of the new node voltages is normally = 1
(see third iteration step). If the power mismatch grows from one step to the other,
the coefficient will be optimized according to a quadratic interpolation. is than
within the range 0 < < 1.0.

Load Flow
Change of Node Type with Newton-Raphson Method

If the number of iteration is larger than three, the program checks in every itera-
tion step, if the voltage of a P,Q-node would be in the range Umin .. Umax (see
"Node Data" in chapter "Element Data Input and Models"). This is only valid, if a
synchronous machine is connected to that P,Q-node. If the voltage is outside the
range the amount of voltage will be fixed. The reactive power will be calculated
(change of node type: PQ-node to PV-node). A change of PV-node to PQ-node
happens, if a reactive power Q runs out of the range Qmin .. Qmax (see "Syn-
chronous Machine Data" in chapter "Element Data Input and Models"). The reac-
tive power is fixed and the amount of voltage will be calculated.
Remote Control with Newton-Raphson Method

The remote control of transformers and generators are only possible, when cal-
culating with the Newton-Raphson method.
Voltage Dependent Loads and Transformer Tap Dependent Short Circuit

Voltages
In the current iteration method and in the Newton-Raphson method the voltage
dependent loads as well as the tap dependent short circuit voltage (see "Trans-
former Data" in chapter "Element Data Input and Models") are taken into account
during the calculation. The equation for voltage dependent loads are (see "Line
Data" in chapter "Element Data Input and Models"):
P = P0 (U/Un)xP Q = Q0 (U/Un)xQ
Load Flow at a Frequency Unequal to the Nominal System Frequency

If the operating frequency is unequal the nominal system frequency the generator
powers are corrected according to their static (see "Synchronous Machine Data"
in chapter "Element Data Input and Models" and "Calculation Parameters (LF)" on
page 5-1).
Frequency
f0
Power P
P0

Load Flow
Evaluation in Case of Divergence

If one of the above mentioned algorithm does not converge, the program brings a
message. The program displays the iteration process and the power mismatch at
the nodes. Nodes with large power mismatch are critical nodes.
In case of divergence it is also possible to start the algorithm from a prede-
fined voltage profile instead of starting from U=1.0pu (flat start).
When the node voltages are known, the load flow, the node powers, the losses
and the mismatch can be calculated. The mismatch represents a balance of pow-
ers and is calculated as follows:
Smism = Stot + Sloss + Ssl + Sshunt
It means:
Stot: Sum of calculated node powers
Ssl: Power in the slack node,
Sloss: total network losses,
Sshunt: total shunt power.
The smaller the value for Smism, the better the load flow has converged.
Calculation methods and their application

The application fields for the several calculation methods are:
The Extended Newton Raphson should be used in
- Symmetrical transmission networks
- Area/Zone control
- Facts elements/HVDC
- Switched shunts
- Remote controls and special controls
The Newton Raphson should be used in
- Transmission and distribution networks
- Asymmetrical load flow
- Load balance
- Restricted area/zone control (only with wheeling)
The Current Iteration should be used in
- Transmission and distribution networks
- Asymmetrical load flow
- Only a few PV-generators
- Load balance
- Restricted area/zone control (only with wheeling)

Load Flow
- No remote control
The Voltage Drop should be used in
- Distribution and radial networks with domestic units (house hold)

Load Flow
Voltage Drop Calculation
The voltage drop calculation is only valid for radial networks with one in-
feeder (slack node).
The total active and reactive load power, inclusive domestic units, in the radial
network have to be calculated. The voltage of the neighbor node of the slack node
can be calculated with the slack voltage and the total power flow through the line:
Slack K1 K2 K3
S1 S2 S3
Sk1 Sk2 Sk3

20 domestic units 5 domestic units 30 domestic units
+ 20kW + 10kW
UK1 = USl - ZL S1* / USl*
with:
UK1: Voltage in node K1
USl: Slack voltage
S1: Complex power through the line from slack node to node K1
(S1 = SK1 + SK2 + SK3)
ZL: Impedance of line
The power seen from node K1 into the network has to be calculated in order to
get the voltage at node K2 (S2 = SK2 + SK3). The voltage at K2 can be calculated
with the above formula, if exchanging UK1 with UK2 , USl with UK1 and S1 with S2.
This procedure is used until all node voltages in the radial network are calculated.
Considering Variable Simultaneity Factors for Domestic Units

In the voltage drop calculation the simultaneity or interlacing factors are calculated
in function of the number of domestic units nDU according to the following formula
. Kn
10
K v = K n+
n DU
The factor Kn (default value 0.15) can be entered in the load flow parameter mask.
The powers used for calculating the voltages consists of two portions:

Load Flow
S = Sconstant + kv nDU PDU
For the above example the following powers (PDU = 8 kW) are taken to calculate
the voltages (assumption: cos(phi) = 1.0).
- Calculation of UK1: S1 = g1 20 kW + g2 10 kW + 0.265 55 8 kW

- Calculation of UK2: S2 = g2 10 kW + 0.294 35 8 kW
- Calculation of UK3: S3 = 0 kW + 0.305 30 8 kW
PDU and cos(phi) can be entered in the load flow parameter mask. The factors g1
and g2 are constant simultaneity factors, which are entered in the load data mask.
The constant powers (20 kW and 10 kW) are multiplied by these factors.
Remark
Considering variable simultaneity factors the Kirchhoff current law is not fulfilled.
The variable simultaneity factors are not considered when calculating the voltage
drops according to Newton-Raphson or current iteration method!

Load Flow
Reference voltages
To each node reference voltages UminRef, UmaxRef can be assigned in percent. To

obtain the nodes with voltage outside the range after the calculation click the
summary in the result dialog box.
Description of the Results
After the calculation the results are automatically inserted into the single line dia-
gram. For every node and element there is a box with results. The box position is
predefined by the program. The user can change the position clicking the box and
dragging the mouse. The new position will be saved.
In the menu option "Edit - Diagram Properties Load Flow Results" the variables
to be displayed can be defined, also after the calculation. In the same dialog the
user may enable or disable the result boxes.

Load Flow
Contingency (Outage) Analysis
With menu option "Analysis - Contingency Modes" the user can define all ele-
ments and nodes (single mode outage) which have to be disconnected during the
contingency analysis. Common mode outages can also be defined, that means,
that several nodes and/or several elements are disconnected at the same time.
Each element or node will be disconnected one-by-one and the load flow will be
calculated. In case of a common mode several elements/nodes are disconnected.
After the analysis the user can display the results, when selecting menu option
Analysis Contingency Analysis Show results. The number of overloaded
elements in function of the disconnected node(s)/element(s) is displayed. The
worst case is displayed at the top of list. Not only overloaded elements are taken
into account, but also all nodes with voltage outside the limits. The limits
"Max.loading", "UminRef", "UmaxRef" are entered in the parameter dialog box. Over-
loaded CTs and VTs are not considered, but the switches and the couplings.
Calculation with Distributed Slack
If the corresponding parameter is active, the load flow will be calculated with a dis-
tributed slack. With this kind of calculation the active slack power will be dis-
tributed to predefined synchronous machines. In the input mask of synchronous
machines the portion of slack power can be entered. The active slack power can
be distributed from 0 to 100%. When calculating with distributed slack only one
slack node is possible.
Calculation with Load Balance
If the corresponding calculation parameter is set, the load flow will be calculated
with load balance. With this kind of calculation the simultaneity factors of the loads
in a closed network are changed in the way that the measured active power or
current will be reached. The measured values are entered in a measurement de-
vice. The requirements are:
For a radial network one measurement device is sufficient to get load bal-
ance. Normally the measurement device is installed at the beginning of a
feeder. In a radial network there can be several measurement devices.
In closed loop networks there must be at least two measurement devices
In the balanced network there can also be infeed elements, like generators.

Load Flow
The program can handle any number of radial or closed networks. The net-
work between two measurement devices are balanced and a separate simul-
taneity factor will be calculated (see above).
The more measurements in the network, the more accurate will be the load
model.
If the measured values are given per phase, the sum of all powers or an av-
erage value for the current will be taken for symmetrical load flow.
Loads with simultaneity factor zero are not considered during the calculation.
After a successful calculation the simultaneity factor can be set automatically
by the program (see "Calculation Parameters (LF)" on page 5-1).
The accuracy of the load balance can be adjusted with the global conver-
gence criteria.
Example:
M e a s u re m e n t d e v ic e
2
1
A
B 3
In the above feeder the measurement devices 1 and 2 builds section A. All loads
in section A will be balanced in order to get the predefined powers or currents in
measurement devices 1 and 2. The same is valid for section B and C.
Area/Zone Control (LF)
With the menu option "Calculation - Load flow Parameters Area/Zone Control"
the user can enter any number of MW power interchange transactions between
network groups (areas, zones). In order to activate power interchange control the
user must check the option "Area control" in the Load Flow Parameter mask.
The Load Flow calculation module modifies the total generated power per network
group, so that the network group power flows (MW) over the tie elements (ele-
ments connecting this network group with other groups) satisfy the transactions.

Load Flow
The definition and assignment of zones and areas is explained in detail in the Tu-
torial chapter.
The following rules hold, when using Area/Zone control:
All network groups must build an interconnected network.
The user can enable or disable Wheeling: If Wheeling is allowed then the
MW power set in the transaction between network group From and network
group To can flow over other network groups. Otherwise only the elements
connecting these two groups (if any) carry the scheduled MW power.
In general there is no hierarchical structure in the definition of areas and
zones. Areas can contain more than one zones and vice versa. The only ex-
ception is in the case that the Control Type in the Area/Zone Control-tab
is set to Area & Zone Control. In this case no area overlapping is allowed
for zones (every zone must be contained entirely within one area) or vice
versa.
Only one slack node can be entered in the network. The area (zone) to which
the slack node belongs is the Slack Area (Slack Zone).
An area or zone can fulfill only one of the following tasks at the same time:
- working as a Slack Area or Zone
- controlling the total import/export (if "Wheeling" is activated) of the net-
work group or controlling the power exchange over a connection between
two network groups (if "Wheeling" is not activated).
It's also possible that an area or zone doesn't fulfill any of the tasks above,
i.e. it is not controlled.
For every node, not more than one of the two network groups (area, zone)
can be in control mode. It is not allowed for example that the area of node N1
controls MW import and its zone controls an other transaction or works as a
Slack network group. In other words, if an area fulfils a task (Control network
group or Slack Area), its zones can't have any tasks. If this rule is violated,
the user gets a relevant error message.
For every generator in a network group that is involved in a transaction, a
Slack Portion can be defined. It defines the percentage, with which the gen-
erator takes part in the import/export power regulation of its network group.
The Slack Portions of all generators of a network group are assumed to add
up to 100% (see respective field in the Synchronous Machine and Network
Feeder Parameters). If all slack portions in a controlled network group are
equal to zero, the program assumes equal slack portions for all generators in
this group.
The user must be aware of certain differences in the calculation depending on

whether "wheeling" is allowed or not.

Load Flow
Wheeling not allowed (option disabled)

If Wheeling is not allowed, then the scheduled power flows directly over the tie
elements between the two network groups involved in the transaction. If a
transaction is entered between network groups that are not directly connected a
relevant error message appears.
Every network group may fulfill only one task. That means that it can control one
power flow transaction between two network groups by controlling the power flow
over the tie lines (tie flow) or it's working as a Slack Area/Zone. The tie flows be-
tween network groups not involved in a transaction are not controlled. Every con-
trolling network group behaves as one variable generation that should satisfy one
power interchange between network groups. E.g. if zone control is activated and
the network has n zones, there are at most n-1 independent variables that can
specify at most n-1 power interchanges between network groups. That imposes a
maximum on the number of different transactions that the user can specify. The
Load Flow calculation will give an error message if the number of specified con-
trols for the network groups (based on the transactions) exceed this maximum
limit.
The principle of Area/Zone control without wheeling is illustrated in the following
example.
Example:
Schedule:
From To Power in MW
Zone 1 Zone 2 150
Zone 1 Zone 2 50
Zone 2 Zone 1 100
Zone 3 Zone 2 50
Zone 3 Zone 4 100
Network with its power flow:

Load Flow
100MW Slack
T12 Zone
Zone 1 Zone 2
controls T12
50MW
T32
Zone 3
Zone 4 100MW controls T32
controls T34 T34
As you see in the example, several transactions between the same two zones will
be added algebraically. The first one of these transactions defines which one of
the two zones is the "From network group".
During the calculation process, for each transaction a "control network group" will
be set. The algorithm is following the order of the schedule table and tries for
each transaction to set the "From network group" as the control group for the re-
spective power transmission. If the "From network group" has already been as-
signed to another task, the "To network group" will be set as the control group. In
case that the "To network group" is occupied as well by an other task, a network
group which is not involved in a transaction and which is connected to the "From
network group" or the "To network group" will take over the control of the power
transaction. If such a "free" network group doesn't exist, the Load Flow will not
start and the user has to change the transaction definitions (e.g. invert the "From
network group" with the "To network group", enter the transaction lines in an other
order etc.).
Avoid entering transactions with the slack area or slack zone in the From column.
This will result in an error of Node: Area and Zone controlled not allowed.
The transaction power in the connection lines between two network groups is con-
trolled next to the "From network group".
If a network group is connected to the Slack network group without transaction be-
tween them, then the Slack group will overtake its losses. Otherwise the network
group has to take over its own losses.
For "Area and Zone control", area overlapping of zones is not allowed. Transac-
tions can be entered between two areas or/and between two zones.

Load Flow
Wheeling allowed (option enabled)

When wheeling is allowed, the power exchange defined for each transaction, can
involve other network groups, not participating in the transaction. That means, that
a power flow defined between two network groups doesn't need to be transported
over the tie elements between the two network groups. The power can also flow
through other network groups.
That's why the active power of the generators in the different network groups are
set to values that fulfill the import/export values calculated and not the individual
transactions.
Example:
Schedule:
From To Power in MW
Zone 1 Zone 2 250
Zone 1 Zone 5 50
Zone 2 Zone 5 100
Zone 3 Zone 1 50
Network with its power flow:

210MW Slack
Zone 2 Zone
Zone 1 150MW +
-250MW tie losses
90MW
30MW
40MW
Zone 3
Zone 5 -50MW
150MW
Zone 4
0MW 20MW
20MW
In the example above the transmitted power over the tie elements between two
zones doesn't correspond to the transaction defined. Since wheeling is allowed,
the power flows can take also other ways than the direct connection. In this case

Load Flow
the total import/export of each network group is controlled to a value that corre-
sponds to the defined transactions.
With wheeling, also network groups can be involved in the power transmission,
which don't participate in the transaction, as it does zone 4 in our example.
The power control of each area or zone is working different, if the control type is
Area control or Zone control or if it is Area and Zone control.
Area control or Zone control

All areas (zones) are in Import Control mode apart from the area (zone) that
contains the system Slack. That means that all areas (zones) apart from the Slack
Area (Slack Zone) control their own import/export power, even those, which are
not involved in any transaction. The areas (zones) without any power transactions
are controlled to 0MW import/export power.
The Slack Area (Zone) takes over the losses in the tie elements. The losses in
each network group are taken over by the network group itself.
The areas (zones) can extend to more than one zone (area), since the areas and
zones are not controlled simultaneously.
Area and Zone control

In this mode area overlapping of zones is not allowed. Transactions can be en-
tered between two areas or/and between two zones.
Each network group (areas and zones) involved in the transaction is controlling its
import/export power. The import/export power of Areas or Zones without any
power transactions is not controlled. The import/export power of Areas containing
zones that are involved in a transaction are not controlled as a transaction be-
tween zones of different areas could be in conflict with a transaction involving one
or both of these areas. The Slack Area or Slack Zone takes over the losses of all
tie elements and of the areas/zones which are not controlled. It's up to the user to
define whether it's the Slack Area or the Slack Zone that takes over the MW
losses (relative option above the transactions table has to be checked).

Load Flow
Asymmetrical Load Flow
If the menu option "Calculation-Load flow-Asymmetrical Load flow" is checked an

asymmetrical load flow calculation will be started with "Calculation-Load flow-
Calculation" or "Calculation-Load flow-Partial network" or "Calculation-Load flow-
Contingency Analysis".
The asymmetrical load flow can handle both asymmetrical loads and asymmetri-
cal network structure. In the element's input mask there is a field "Phases" were
the user can enter the phasing of the element or load.
The asymmetrical load flow has the following characteristic.
Theory of Asymmetrical Load Flow

The same equations and solution algorithm as for the symmetrical load flow are
used. Because of asymmetry the models in the negative and zero system are
considered like for short circuit analysis. The Y matrix for the positive, negative
and zero system will be created. It is assumed that only the lines, the loads and
load impedances are asymmetrical. For these elements there is a coupling be-
tween the three component system. These couplings will be considered by node
current respectively node power injections / 7 /. The phase shifting are always
considered.
In the load flow calculation parameter mask there is an acceleration factor. This
factor allows to tune the asymmetrical load flow for both methods (Newton-Raph-
son and current iteration). If the network is highly asymmetrical the factor should
be set to 0.25 or less.
Restrictions of Asymmetrical Load Flow

The restriction are:
- Area Control not available
- Distributed Slack not available
- Voltage drop solution method not available
- Remote control for generators.
Network Structure for Asymmetrical Load Flow

If an asymmetrical load flow will be calculated all elements are considered. In
case of a symmetrical load flow only the symmetrical elements and the asymmet-
rical 3-phase line are considered. With the menu option "Edit-Topology/Mask-
Topology check" the user can check the topology in respect of the symmetrical
network or in respect of a single phase.
It is recommended to enter lines in a compact way. A 3-phase line from node A to
B can theoretically be entered as three single phase lines, which are coupled be-
tween each other. In this way the program will work not only with the current cir-

Load Flow
cuit resp. the series impedance matrices but also with the coupling matrices. This
increases the calculation effort. The better way is to represent the 3-phase line
with one 3-phase line. The same is valid for a 2-phase line.
Output for Asymmetrical Load Flow

If an asymmetrical load flow will be calculated the results are displayed and stored
for all existing phases.

Load Flow
Load Flow with Load Profiles
Calculation Parameters
Time
1 Load flow cal- The actual time is determined by the fields "Year", "Month",
culation Day" and "Time".
Year Year
Month Month
Day Day
Daytime Time of day
Load flow time The corresponding fields "from" and "to" determine the inter-
simulation val for the time simulation.
Year Year range
Month Month range
Day Day range
Daytime Time of day range
Time increase Increase in minutes, if field "Time" is active.
It is possible to combine several time ranges ("Year", "Month", "Day", and "Time")
in one time simulation. The increase for the ranges "Year", "Month" and "Day"
amounts to 1, for the range "Time" it must be determined by the user.
Options
Calculation
Apply scaling Determine, if the time-dependent characteristics should be
factors combined with the constant scaling factors.
Results: select nodes / elements
All nodes / Ele- Determination if the results of all elements/nodes have to be
ments calculated and stored or if the selection list has to be used.
According to list
Edit list... Selection of elements/nodes
Results: select variables to be stored

Load Flow
Network: MW If active, active power losses of the network are calculated

losses and stored during a time simulation.
Network: Energy If active, energy losses of the network are calculated and
losses stored during a time simulation. Only possible if the field MW
losses is active.
Nodes: U If active, magnitudes of node voltages are calculated and
stored during a time simulation.
Elements: P If active, active power of elements is calculated and stored
during a time simulation.
Elements: Q If active, reactive power of elements is calculated and stored
during a time simulation.
Elements: I If active, current magnitudes of elements are calculated and
stored during a time simulation.
Elements: Load- If active, element loadings are calculated and stored during a
ing time simulation.
Result Files
It is possible to export the results into a text file if the last calculation was success-
ful.
Export-file
File name File name
Build after calcu- If active, the text file is automatically created after a success-
lation ful calculation.
Build Export File The text file is created, if this button is pressed.
Results
Summary
A short summary of the last calculation is displayed, if the menu option Calcula-
tion Loadflow with Load Profiles Summary... is choosen.
Graphical Results
To open the graphical result window choose "Analysis - Load Flow with Load Pro-
files Results Charts...".

Load Flow
Subchart settings
Subchart type Select time behavior or value range to be displayed.
Add curves manu- If checked, curves have to be added using the tab
ally Curves. If not checked, tab Curves isnt visible and
curves of the actual variant are automatically added ac-
cording to the following 4 subchart settings.
Variables to be displayed
Element type Type of element can be selected
Variable Type of variable in function of selected element type can
be chosen.
Nodes / Elements to be displayed
Select Select if all elements of the selected type are displayed or
only these defined in the list. The list can be defined by
pressing push button Edit list.
Axis properties
Select axis Select axis whose settings have to be displayed / changed.
Title Axis title. Only enabled if the corresponding check box
Automatic is not checked.
Resolution Specifies the resolution of the steps in between labels.
Only enabled if the corresponding check box Automatic is
not checked.
No of digits Number of label digits. Only enabled if the corresponding
check box Automatic is not checked.
Min Sets the axis minimum value. Only enabled if the corre-
sponding check box Automatic is not checked.
Max Sets the axis maximum value. Only enabled if the corre-
sponding check box Automatic is not checked.
Grid If checked grid lines are displayed.
Legend
Show legend If checked, legend will be displayed
Height Height of legend in % of subchart size
The tab Curves is visible only if Add curves manually is checked. Press the
Add Curve button to add a new curve to the subchart. Press the Edit Curve
button to change the settings of the selected curve.

Load Flow
Theory
The module Load Flow with Load Profiles makes a single load flow calculation
(forecast) or a sequence of load flow calculations (time simulation). The active
and reactive power of consumers and generators with assigned profile types or
measurement data are determined before each load flow calculation. The formula
for P(t) and Q(t) can be found in the corresponding element documentation (e.g.
synchronous machine).

Optimal Power Flow (OPF, Transmission)
Optimal Power Flow (OPF,

Transmission)
Calculation Parameters (OPF)
The parameters can be entered after having chosen "Calculation - Optimal Power
Flow - Parameters". In this dialog box there is also a link to the load flow
parameters.
Parameters
Options
Slack Bus: Fix the bus voltage (complex) to the value given in the
Fix V to scheduled slack element(s) dialog(s).
value
PV Generators: Fix the bus voltage magnitude to the values given in the
Fix V to scheduled PV generators dialogs.
value
PV Generators: The limits of the active power of the PV Generators are
P Limits: Max, Min taken from the mask (Pmin..Pmax).
PV Generators: Fix the active power of PV Generators to the operating

Fix P to to Poper value given in the PV generator dialogs.
PV Generators: If the nonnegative r is entered, the active power limits of
Relax P by .. PV Generators are:
%Poper (1-r/100)*Poper <= P <= (1+r/100)*Poper
PQ Generators: The limits of the active and reactive power of the PQ
P,Q Limits: Max, Min Generators are taken from the generator dialog
(Pmin...Pmax, QminQmax).
PQ Generators: Fix the active and reactive power generation to the
Fix P,Q to Poper, operating values given in the PQ generator dialogs.
Qoper
PQ Generators: If the nonnegative r is entered, the limits for the active
Relax P,Q by .. and reactive power of PQ Generators are:
%Poper, Qoper (1-r/100)*Poper <= P <= (1+r/100)*Poper

(1-r/100)*Qoper <= Q <= (1+r/100)*Qoper
HVDC Converters Indicates the tolerance of the scheduled value for the
Relax Control by ..% variable (power, current, voltage) to be regulated by the
converter.
Regulating Keep the tap of regulating transformers constant to the
Transformers: Tap act value during the optimal power flow.
Constant tap
Regulating Indicates the tolerance of the scheduled value for the
Transformers: voltage or power to be regulated by the regulating
Relax Controls by.. transformer.
Variable Limits
Open Voltage Limits Indicates, whether the node voltage limits Umin and Umax
are checked during the optimization.
Open Branch Flow Indicates, whether the current Irmax or power voltage limits
Limits Srmax are checked during the optimization.
Shut down If activated, the program shuts down generators of any
Generators at Pmin type, which produce an active power equal or lower than
Pmin.
Shut down PQ-Gen. If activated, the program shuts down generators of the type
at Pmin PQ, which produce an active power equal or lower than
Pmin.
Optimal Solution
Set Values Indicates, if the optimization results concerning the control
variables of generators and transformers should be
assigned.
Discretize Variables If checked, there is a post-optimization step that
discretizes all non-continuous variables (taps, switched
shunt capacitor-blocks etc.)
Run Load Flow for Indicates, whether a load flow should start for initialization
initialization (recommended).
Calc. Sensitivities of If checked, the sensitivities of the objective functions will
Fobj. be calculated for each node and each line due to a change
of active or reactive power in a node or a change of the
capacitive reactance of a fictive serial line compensation.
The calculated sensitivities are:
dFObj/dPGj; dFObj/dQGj; dFObj/dXcj
Solver Solution File

Save It is possible to write a solver solution file (*.osf) right after

a successful optimization case. This file can help to
provide a good starting point when running similar cases of
this network.
Import Before running an optimization case it is possible to import
a solver solution file (*.osf) created from a similar case.
This will provide a good starting point that will assist
convergence. If the created solver solution file (*.osf) is
imported in a non-similar case (different options activated)
then the user receives a warning that the file was not
successfully imported.
LF-Parameters Press this button to enter in the LF-Parameters dialog.
Objective Function
Min/Max Choose if the objective type should be minimized or
maximized.
Objective Type Choose the objective type to be optimized. It may be
selected one of the following types.
- MW Losses
- Mvar Losses
- Generation costs
- MW Import
- Mvar Import
Network/Group Choose the network group, which should be optimized with
the defined objective function.
Insert By pressing the Insert-button the defined objective function
will be added in the table. The table may contain several
objective functions, which will be consider in the same
optimization process, if the checkbox Active is checked.
Active The objective function will be considered in the
optimization process if the checkbox is active.
Weight It's possible to have multi-objective optimization by
assigning nonzero weighting factors for the individual
objectives. The relative values of the weighting coefficients
usually correlate with the relative importance of the
individual objectives as well as with their relative
magnitude. For example the weighting coefficient of the
MW-losses objective is usually larger than the weighting

coefficient of the production-cost objective.
Limits
Default References
Loading of Elements Indicates the maximum loading of all elements in the
network. The loading will be checked during the
optimization unless the option "Open Branch Flow Limits"
in the Parameters tab is checked.
Minimum Voltage Default reference minimum voltage for nodes in the
network. This restriction will be checked during the
optimization unless the option "Open Voltage Limits" in the
Parameters tab is checked.
Maximum Voltage Default reference maximum voltage for nodes in the
network. This restriction will be checked during the
optimization unless the option "Open Voltage Limits" in the
Parameters tab is checked.
Relax Voltage Limits Indicates the tolerance in % of the maximum and minimum
by voltage limits.
Assign Voltages
All By pressing this button, the values inserted in the
(reference) Minimum Voltage and Maximum Voltage fields
are copied to the corresponding values of all nodes in the
table below.
Voltage level After pressing this button, a voltage level of the actual
network may be selected. The minimum and maximum
voltages of the nodes will then be updated by the
reference voltage values.
Remark: In the table below of the Default References, all the nodes are listed,
with their minimum and maximum reference voltages. They can also be edited
independently.
Setting of the Voltage Bounds

If the option OpenVoltageLimits is not active, the voltage bounds at the nodes
will be considered during optimization.
The upper and lower bounds can be entered individually at each node by opening
its input dialog. In the field Usoll the voltage can be fixed to the corresponding

value. If this field remains empty values for a lower and an upper bound of the
voltage magnitude can be entered in the fields Umin and Umax.
The minimum and maximum values of the node voltages can also be edited in the
Limits tab of the optimal power flow calculation parameters dialog.
A further possibility to modify the voltage bounds are provided by the input dialogs
of the network elements network feeder and synchronous machine. Here the input
fields Uoper and Ureg respectively provide the possibility to fix the voltage at the
corresponding node. However, this works only if the field Lf-Type is set to PV or
SL which corresponds to a voltage regulating element or a slack element respec-
tively. This way of initializing a fixed value of a nodal voltage overwrites the one
described first.
If there is a slack element (SL) and a voltage regulating element (PV) at the same
time connected to the same node the fixed voltage defined by the slack element
overwrites the fixed voltage of the PV element.
These overwrite actions are reported in the log-file.
Setting the Bounds for the Power and Current Flow

If the option OpenFlowLimits is not active, the bounds of the power flows and the
current flows of the branches can be set in the input dialogs of the corresponding
element. The bounds of power flow of the elements will be multiplied with the
factor "Loading of Elements" in the Limits tab of the optimal power flow calculation
parameters dialog.
An upper bound for the maximum current magnitude can be defined for trans-
mission lines by writing a value in the input field Ir-max or Ir-min. An empty field
means there is no current constraint. Which one of the values from Ir-max or Ir-
min will be chosen as the limitation can be selected by activating the correspond-
ing check box from the window of the load flow parameters.
To define the upper bound for the power flow or the current flow of 2-winding
transformers there exits a sub mask Limits of the input mask for 2-winding
transformers. It is possible to choose between a constraint of the maximum power
flow, a constraint for the maximum current flow or none. Again the selection
between one of the values X-max or X-min will be made by activating the corre-
sponding check box from the dialog box of the load flow parameters. If the current
flow magnitude is limited it is possible to define a value for the primary side of the
transformer and one for the secondary side of the transformer. Empty input fields
mean there is no upper bound for the flow variables.

Setting the Bounds for the Power Injection in OPF

The upper and the lower bound for the injection values of the active and reactive
power of generators can be defined in the corresponding input mask for syn-
chronous machines. Empty input fields for the upper and the lower limit means,
it is not possible to optimize the injection power of the corresponding generator.
The values for the active and reactive power of the generator are kept constant.
The values are taken from the input fields Poper and Qoper respectively. If the
values for the upper and lower bound of the power are defined in the correspond-
ing fields Pmin, Pmax, Qmin and Qmax, the OPF can vary them to optimize the
objective function.
Setting the Regulated 2-Winding Transformers in OPF

To define the bounds for the tap settings of a 2-winding transformer, there is a
sub mask TapSettings of the input mask for 2-winding transformer. If the selec-
tion Transformer Regulated is set to yes the tap will be set to an optimal position
by the OPF, otherwise the tap setting remains constant.
Actually there are two OPF runs if there are regulated 2-winding transformers in
the input data set. First the tap settings are considered as continuous variables
and optimized. For a second run of the OPF they are fixed to the next possible
discrete value. The solution of the second run might be not feasible even if the
first run converges. In this case the OPF outputs the solution of the first run and
prints a warning message to the log-file.
Solver Parameters
Major Iterations If the optimization exits with the message Too many
iterations then increase this parameter.
Minor Iterations Normally should not be modified.
Total Iterations If the optimization exits with the message Too many
iterations then increase this parameter.

Results (OPF)
Select Results
The nodes and elements to be presented in the result table, may be chosen here.
In the menu point Show Results, the user can decide by clicking a checkbox, if
he wants to see all elements and nodes in the table or only the ones selected
here.
Also its possible to assign the results to every element and node of the network
plan, or only to the elements and nodes chosen here. In the menu point Edit
Diagram Properties Labels, a respective box may be checked.
Show Results
The results can be represented in different tables, each with its specifique
information.
Summary A summary of the load flow will be displayed. It contains
general information about the network, the areas and the
zones and about overloaded elements and nodes with
voltages out of the range.
Node results The results of the nodes will be displayed.
Element results General results of elements will be displayed.
Detailed element All results of the elements will be displayed.
results
All results All results mentioned above will be presented here in one
table.
Result files Its possible to export or import results to or from a *.rlf file by
selecting the file and pressing the respective button.
Format for V5.x.
Below, the output variables in the result tables are described:
Summary:

Area/Zone Indicates the network, area or zone, for which the following results
are valid.
P Loss Active power losses in MW, in the network group
Q Loss Reactive power losses in Mvar, in the network group.
P Imp Total imported active power in MW (total Slack power).
Q Imp Total imported reactive power in Mvar (total Slack power).
P Gen Total generated active power in MW, in the network group,
including the Slack.
Q Gen Total generated reactive power in Mvar, in the network group,
including the Slack.
P Load Total active load power in MW, in the network group.
Q Load Total reactive load power in Mvar, in the network group.
Qc Shunt Total capacitive reactive power in Mvar, of the shunts in the
network group.
Ql Shunt Total inductive reactive power in Mvar, of the shunts in the
network group.
Q Comp Total line compensation reactive power in Mvar, in the network
group.
Node results:
Name Node name.
U [kV] Node voltage in kV.
U ang Voltage angle in , in respect to the slack voltage.
Sens. PG Sensitivity of the objective function, due to a fictive change of
active power generation in the respective node. The objective
function is defined in the corresponding tab of the calculation
parameters.
Sens. QG Sensitivity of the objective function, due to a fictive change of
reactive power generation in the respective node. The objective
function is defined in the corresponding tab of the calculation
parameters.
Partial Number of the partial network, the node belongs to.
network

Element results/ Detailed element results:

Node name Node, the element is connected to (From Node).
P Active power flow through the element in MW.
Q Reactive power flow through the element in Mvar.
I Current flow through the element in kA.
Angle I Current angle in .
Loading Loading of the element in %.
P Loss Active power losses of the element.
Q Loss Reactive power losses of the element.
P Comp Active line compensation power in MW.
Q Comp Reactive line compensation power in Mvar.
Tap Calculated tap position of the transformer.
Ratio Calculated transformer ratio at "Tap act.".
Sens. Xser Sensitivity of the objective function, due to a change of the
capacitive reactance of the fictive serial compensation. The
objective function is defined in the corresponding tab of the
calculation parameters. The sensitivity "Sens. Xser" will be
calculated for all passive 2-port elements.
Teta - Angle of the transformer ratio
- Firing angle or initial angle in of a HVDC
- Firing angel in of a TCSC
Overlap Overlap angle in for HVDC (Converter).
Margin Commutation margin angle in for HVDC (Converter)
B tot Total susceptance in mS of a SVC.
X tot Total reactance in Ohm of a TCSC.
U series Voltage drop in kV of a TCSC or Series voltage in kV of a
UPFC.
Ang. U series Angle of Voltage drop in of a TCSC or Angle of Series
voltage in of a UPFC.
I shunt Shunt current in kA of a UPFC.
Ang. I shunt Angle of Shunt current in of a UPFC.

P exch Exchange active power in MW of a UPFC.

Q exch series Exchange reactive power (series-connected inverter) in Mvar
of a UPFC.
Q exch shunt Exchange reactive power (shunt-connected inverter) in Mvar
of a UPFC.
Slip Slip of Asynchronous Machine.
Torque Mechanical torque in Nm of Asynchronous Machine.
U OpenEnd In case that an element is connected only on one side, the
voltage is calculated at the open end in %, in respect to the
nominal system voltage of the node at the open end.
On Checked, if the element is connected (switches closed).

Description of the Program
The Optimal Power Flow (OPF) problem is formulated as a nonlinearly

constrained optimization problem with a scalar nonlinear in general objective
function.
The load flow (or power flow) calculation (with no optimization) calculates the bus
voltages and currents of all network elements, according to a fixed set of values
for the power injections and loads, the voltage settings of the PV generators and
the tap settings of regulated transformers. There is no degree of freedom in a load
flow calculation.
In reality, however, the active power injection of a generator is a controllable

parameter (control variable) that can be adjusted to meet certain objectives. The
consideration of the network control variables as free variables within limits adds
additional degrees of freedom to the problem. The optimal power flow will
calculate the control variable settings and the network state (complex variables,
line currents) that optimize the objective set by the user.
The constraints of the OPF consist of

Linear and nonlinear equality constraints: these are mainly the power flow
equations (component modeling equations, Kirchhoff equations etc.) and
other network-related equations.
Linear and nonlinear inequality constraints: Most state and control variables
are not allowed to exceed certain limits. These restrictions are represented
with this type of operating constraints.
These considerations lead to the following description of the OPF program. The
OPF optimizes (minimizes or maximizes) an objective function subject to a set of
equality and inequality constraints. The objective function as well as the
constraints can be formulated as non linear equations.
The OPF is fully integrated into the NEPLAN program environment. The
component of the high voltage power system are interfaced like in the power flow
calculation. The OPF results are written to result boxes of the graphical user
interface of the NEPLAN program as well as in a separate text file. In the following
this file will be called the result file.

Objective Function
In the actual program version of the OPF the objective function is

- the minimization of the active power losses and
- the minimization of the total generation costs.
The minimization of the active power losses can be formulated as a sum of the
active power losses of the passive network elements. The active power losses of
an element is the total of the active power flow which flows into the element.
Figure 1 shows the calculation of the losses of a transmission line.
Pji
Pij
i Line j
Plosses = Pij + Pji
Figure 1: Active power losses of a transmission line
All elements connecting a bus bar with the earth potential (shunt elements, loads,
generators, etc.) and the reduced elements (series and shunt equivalents) are
excluded from the objective function. Excluding the network equivalents from the
objective function provides the possibility to apply the objective function only to a
limited region of the network, which is of interest to the user.
To obtain a minimization of the total generator costs a quadratic curve for each
generator must be entered. The quadratic curve
C ( P) = a P 2 + b P + c
with P: active power produced by the generator

a: quadratic factor in unit of currency (e.g. US$) to MW2
b: linear factor in unit of currency to MW
c: constant factor in unit of currency
represents the production costs of a generators. According to these cost curves it
will be possible to minimize the generation costs. The factors a, b, c are entered
in the dialog boxes of the generators.

Running the OPF Program
The menu command "Calculation - Optimal Power Flow - Calculation" starts the
OPF. The optimization might take a few minutes when applied to networks with
several hundreds of nodes. After termination the user receives one of the
following messages:
OPF has found an optimal/near-optimal solution:

Optimal Solution Found
Near optimal solution found
The current point cannot be improved
An optimal solution has not been found. OPF terminated because:

The problem is infeasible
The problem is unbounded (or badly scaled)
Too many iterations
The solution has not changed for a large number of iterations
The solver solution file is very ill-conditioned
Error in solver solution file
Contact program developers
In case a first run of the program does not find an optimal solution (and perhaps
an infeasible problem is indicated) the upper and lower bounds of the voltages
and flows might be set too tight. The user can select between different options for
the next trials: The option Open Branch Flow Limits ignores the constraints
dealing with the limitation of power flows and current flows of the branches. The
option Open Voltage Limits ignores the constraints dealing with the limitations of
the nodal voltage magnitude, except the voltage magnitude at slack nodes.
Alternatively the user can relax the above mentioned limits by increasing the
Loading of elements and/or setting a nonzero Relax Voltage Limits tolerance.
After a successful run, the listing can be activated with "Result - List - Last
calculation".
Similar to the power flow calculation it is possible to calculate a part of the network
only. The menu command "Calculation - Optimal Power Flow - Calculation of par-
tial network" starts this option.

Short Circuit
Short Circuit
Calculation Parameters (SC)
The calculation parameters are entered with the help of a Parameters dialog. It
consists of the three tabs, Parameter, Faulted Nodes, Faulted lines, Special Fault,
which are explained here.
Parameter
Fault type Type of fault at faulted nodes. Possible faults are:

- 3-phase fault
- 1-phase to ground fault
- 2-phase fault
- 2-phase to ground fault
- Special fault
- Fault at all existing phases
When selecting the option Special fault, the program calcu-
lates the fault type, which was predefined by the user. The
user can define an arbitrary fault type in the Special fault tab of
the Short Circuit Parameters dialog.
Calculation Following calculation methods are possible:
method IEC60909 2001
Calculation of Ik" according to IEC 60909.
IEC909 1988
Calculation of Ik" according to IEC 909.
Superposition without Loadflow
Calculation according to superposition method without pre-
fault voltages from the Load flow. The EMF are 1.1*Un.
Superposition with Loadflow
Calculation according to superposition method with pre-fault
voltages from the Load flow. A Load flow calculation will be
done before Short circuit calculation.
ANSI C37.10
Calculation according to ANSI/IEEE C37.010-1979 will be per-
formed.
ANSI C37.13
Calculation according to ANSI/IEEE C37.013-1997 will be per-

Short Circuit
formed. This standard calculates the generator current accord-

ing to the formula mentioned below.
Ik" max Indicates, if the maximum short circuit current Ik" (if checked)
calculation or minimum short circuit current Ik" (if not checked) should be
calculated. The same is valid for the steady state current cal-
culation.
Asymmetrical If this box is checked, all unsymmetrical elements, like unsym.
network lines, unsym. transformers, unsym. shunts, etc., are consid-
ered in the calculation.
Load flow be- This parameter should always be active, when calculating ac-
fore Short cir- cording to superposition method with load flow. There are
cuit calculation cases where no load flow is desired before the short circuit
calculation.
Fault distance The fault distance is the distance of a node from a faulted
node for which the results should be displayed or saved. A
value of "0" means that the results will only be displayed or
saved for faulted nodes.
Calculation according to IEC909
Automatic se- If the box is checked, the program takes the c-factor according
lection of c- to IEC. Otherwise, the user has to define the c-factor by him-
factor self (see below).
Reduced toler- If checked, a voltage factor c of 1.05 instead of 1.1 will be used
ance in low for low voltage systems. This option should only be activated if
voltage system the voltage tolerance of the low voltage system is not higher
than +6%. (only for IEC60909 - 2001)
R/X at fault lo- If checked, the R/X ratio used for the calculation of the peak
cation for ip short circuit current ip at fault location is also used for the cal-
branch calcula- culation of the peak short circuit currents in the branches.
tion If not checked, the branch peak short circuit currents will be
calculated with the R/X ratio of the branches and the current ip
at fault location will be calculated with its R/X ratio.
Fault duration Duration of short circuit in seconds for calculation of thermal
in s for thermal short circuit current Ith.
current calc.
Fault duration Duration of short circuit in seconds for calculation of DC-
in s for DC cur- component of short circuit current iDC and of asymmetrical
rent IDC calcu- breaking current Iasy.
lation
Time delay of Minimum time delay tmin of circuit breakers in seconds. tmin is
CB in s for the shortest time between the beginning of the short circuit and
breaking cur- the first contact separation of one pole of the breaker. Possible
rent calc. Ib options are according to IEC: 0.02, 0.05, 0.10, 0.25 s and lar-

Short Circuit
ger. If entering a value in between a linear interpolation will be

done. tmin is necessary only for the calculation of the breaking
current Ib.
Calculation according to ANSI
Number of cy- When performing short circuit calculation according to
cles for DC cur- ANSI/IEEE the number of cycles for the calculation of the DC
rent IDC calcu- component of the short circuit current can be entered. Typical
lation values are: 3, 4, 5, 8.
Number cycles When performing short circuit calculation according to
for breaking ANSI/IEEE the interrupting time of the high voltage breakers
current calcula- can be entered. The breaking current Ib will be calculated for
tion Ib this interrupting instant. Typical values are: 3, 4, 5, 8.
E operating Highest operating voltage at all fault locations in pu with re-
spect to nominal system voltage. This value is relevant only for
calculation according to ANSI/IEEE.
Reduce switches, circuit breakers and couplers
Reduce Check this box to reduce switches, circuit breakers and cou-
plers. The calculation will be faster, but no results for these
elements will be calculated. If the box is not checked, for calcu-
lation, these elements are represented by the impedances en-
tered in the Data Input Dialogs.
Result File
The result file and its location can be chosen.
Write after cal- If checked, the result file will be written after calculation
culation
Format 4.x The result file format of version 5 is different from the format of
version 4. Check this box to save anyway in the format of ver-
sion 4.x.
Reference for Allowable limit for bus bar and element stress in %. During SC-
element load- calculation the CTs/VTs, the protection devices and the
ing switches are evaluated.
Faulted nodes
The user can define faults at any nodes in the network. In this tab, the nodes
where a short circuit should take place, can be selected from a list of all existing
nodes. The type of fault has to be chosen in the Parameter tab.

Short Circuit
Depending on the selected short circuit standard additional data must be

entered for a fault location:
IEC909:
Input of the network type for calculating Ik" (see also "Theory of Short Circuit Cal-
culation" on page 9-15).
The Network type for Ik"-calculation can be changed in the list of the selected
fault nodes. For every fault node, a short circuit calculation will be made. Thats
why the network type has to be defined for every fault node.
The following network types are possible :
Automatic The program will determine the network type automatically.

Meshed The program calculates the short circuit current Ik" in a meshed
network
Non meshed The program calculates the short circuit current Ik" in a non-
meshed network.
For short circuit calculation in a single-fed network the input "Automatic" should be
selected.
ANSI/IEEE
Input of the interrupting time in cycles of the circuit breakers, which are built in at
fault location. This value is used to calculate circuit breaker characteristic factors
for the short circuit calculation. The interrupting time will be taken from the input
data of the circuit breaker at faulted node. If there is no breaker explicitly built in at
faulted node, the interrupting time can be entered respectively changed here.
The number of cycles as well as the type of short circuit can be changed in the list
of the selected nodes. The following cycles and short circuit types can be entered:
Cycles
Number Number of cycles. Possible values: 2, 3, 5, 8
Short circuit
Automatic: The program determines the type of short circuit: generator
near or generator far fault.
Generator near: The program calculates the interrupting current for a
generator near short circuit. The multiplying factor is taken
from the tables in fig. 8 and 9 of the ANSI/IEEE standard
C37.010-1979.
Generator far: The program calculates the interrupting current for a gen-
erator far short circuit. The multiplying factor is taken from
the table in fig. 10 of the ANSI/IEEE standard C37.010-

Short Circuit
1979.
Faulted lines
The user can define faults on any line in the network. In this tab, the lines where a
short circuit should take place, can be selected from a list of all existing lines. The
type of fault has to be chosen in the Parameter tab.
In the same manner as described for the Faulted nodes, the network type respec-
tively the number of cycles for an ANSI/IEEE short circuit calculation has to be en-
tered for every faulted line. Additionally the distance in percentage (%) from the
"From node" (starting node of line) has to be indicated. At this fault distance, a fic-
titious node will be created internally. The whole length of the line is 100%, but the
value 100% can not be entered, because this node has already been given as "To
node". Analogous is valid for distance 0%.
Remark:
If a line is faulted, the starting and ending nodes may not be faulted too. In the
single line diagram the results of a line fault are attached to the starting or to the
ending node depending of the fault distance. In the output listing a line fault is
treated as a normal faulted node.
Special fault
The "Special fault" tab in the short circuit parameters dialog allows the input of
special fault types. The definition of special faults is based on the following idea:
Given are at maximum 3 faulted nodes (node 1, node 2, node 3) with each 3
phases L1, L2, L3 (3x3 poles). An additional and independent node is the earth
(node 0). The user can connect arbitrary poles through an impedance (Rf, Xf),
which can also be zero. It is also possible to connect a pole to earth. Examples
are given below.
Fault description
Insert With this button, a new table line, respectively a new fault defini-
tion may be inserted. An arbitrary number of connections can be
entered.
Delete With this button, the marked table lines, respectively fault defini-
tions may be deleted.
Export to Li- The fault definitions entered in the table can be exported to a li-

Short Circuit
brary brary.
Fault type Arbitrary name of the fault type. If the fault definitions will be im-
ported from a library, the fault type may be chosen, by pressing
the button .
Fault de- Description of the fault type.
scription
Table entries
From Node Starting node of the connection. Possible values are: "1", "2", "3".
Phase From Phase of the starting node of the connection. Possible values
are:"L1", "L2", "L3".
To Node Ending node of the connection. Possible values are: "0", "1", "2",
"3". "0" means earth.
Phase To Phase of the starting node of the connection. Possible values
are:" ", "L1", "L2", "L3". " " means earth.
Rf Real part of the connection impedance between the poles in
Ohm.
Xf Imaginary part of the connection impedance between the poles in
Ohm.
Assignment of the faulted nodes to network nodes
Node 1 Network node, which corresponds to faulted node 1 of the Fault
description. Pressing "" all network nodes are listed.
description.
description.
Examples of special fault types with there definition:
Fault type A: 1-phase-to-ground fault (phase L3) at node 1 with impedance Zf
Node 1
L1
L2
L3
Zf = 2.0 Ohm
Fault definition in NEPLAN:

From Phase To Phase Rf Xf
Node From Node To Ohm Ohm

Short Circuit
1 L3 0 2.0 0.0
Fault type B: Double earth fault at node 1 (phase L2) and node 2 (phase L3)
Node 1 Node 2
L1
L2
L3

1 L2 0 0.0 0.0
2 L3 0 0.0 0.0
Fault type C: 1-phase fault between all three nodes. The nodes can be from dif-
ferent networks and/or from different voltage levels.
Node 1 Node 2 Node 3

L1
L2
L3

1 L1 2 L2 0.0 0.0
2 L2 3 L3 0.0 0.0
3 L3 0 0.0 0.0
Remark 1:
If the user will calculate an open conductor series line fault (e.g. phase L1), he
must proceed as follows:

Short Circuit
1) Disconnect the line (A to B) at the fault location by inserting two new nodes
(H1 H2).
Fault: open conductor

A B
L1
L2
L3
A H1 H2 B
L1
L2
L3
2) Make a load flow calculation with the original line.
2) Perform a short circuit calculation according to the superposition method with

Load flow. The calculation parameter Load flow before Short circuit should
be deactivated. The special fault definition is:

1 L2 2 L2 0.0 0.0
1 L3 2 L3 0.0 0.0
The faulted node 1 corresponds to network node H1 and the faulted node 2 to
network node H2.
When calculating a special fault on a line, a new node has always to be inserted
in the line at the moment.
Remark 2:
It is advisable to choose the superposition method when performing special faults.
In this case the fault voltages are correct.

Short Circuit
Results (SC)
After the calculation the results are automatically inserted into the single line dia-
gram. For every node and element there is a box with results. The box position is
predefined by the program. The user can change the position clicking the box and
dragging the mouse. The new position will be saved. The abbreviations are given
below.
Show Results
Fault currents Short circuit results of the nodes and elements in the defined
fault distance will be presented.
Currents at fault Only short circuit results of the faulted nodes will be pre-
location sented.
Node voltages Voltages of the faulted nodes are displayed.
Result files Its possible to export or import results to or from a file by se-
lecting the file and pressing the respective button.
Format for V5.x.
Results selection The values or quantities, which have to be displayed in the
result tables can be selected here.
Fault currents and currents at fault location:

ID Identification number (ID) of the faulted node, or of the element
for which the fault current is displayed.
Fault location Element/Node at fault location or "From node" of the element, for
From node which the fault data is given.
To node "To node" of the element, for which the fault data is given.
Distance from Distance from the fault location to the element, for which the fault
fault data are presented in this row.
Element Name of the element, for which the fault data is presented in this
name row.

Short Circuit

Un System nominal voltage for nodes.
UL-E (RST) Fault voltage (line to earth). (Phase system)
Ang U (RST) Angle of fault voltage. (Phase system)
Ik'' (RST) Initial short circuit current in the phase system.
Ang Ik'' (RST) Angle of Ik'' in the phase system.
Ik'' (012) Initial short circuit current in the symmetrical components system.
Ang Ik'' (012) Angle of Ik'' in the symmetrical components system.
ip: Peak current Ip in magnitude (kA) (Phase system). Not available
when calculating according to ANSI/IEEE.
Ib: Breaking current or ANSI interrupting (x cycles) current Ib in
magnitude (kA) (Phase system).
Ik: Steady state current or ANSI steady state (30 cycles) current Ik in
magnitude (kA) (Phase system).
Ith: Thermal short circuit current Ith in magnitude (kA) of the phases.
Not available when calculating according to ANSI/IEEE.
iDC: D.C. component of the short circuit current in magnitude (kA)
(Phase system).
Iasy: Asymmetrical breaking current or ANSI asymmetrical 0.5 cycles
current in magnitude (kA) (Phase system).
Sk": Short circuit power Sk" (Phase system). Not available when cal-
culating according to ANSI/IEEE.
E/Z Symmetrical current according to ANSI/IEEE without considera-
tion of the AC and DC decrement. Not available when calculating
according to IEC.
Zf: Network impedance at faulted node in Ohm of positive, negative
and zero sequence. Output sequence: Zero, Positive, Negative
sequence. In case of symmetrical faults only the impedance of
positive sequence is displayed.
Fault type Type of short circuit fault used for the calculation.
Method Calculation method (Standard).
Maximum Indicates the node or the element with the maximum current of
current one fault calculation.
Network type Type of the network.
Calculation according to IEC:
- SING.FED: Simple fed sc
- MULT.FED: Sc fed from non-meshed sources
- MESHED: Sc in meshed network

Short Circuit
Calculation according to ANSI:

- GEN.NEAR: Generator near fault
- GEN.FAR: Generator far fault
CB delay time Time delay of CB in s for breaking current calculation Ib.
SC duration Duration of short circuit in s for calculation of thermal short circuit
for Ith current Ith.
SC duration Duration of short circuit in s or in cycles for calculation of DC-
for Idc component Idc and of asymmetrical breaking current Iasy.
Description Description of the node or the element.
Zone Zone to which the element belongs to.
Area Area to which the element belongs to.
Partial net- Partial network to which the element belongs to.
work
Results only at faulted node

Only the currents at fault locations are displayed in the table.
ID Identification number (ID) of the faulted node, for which the re-
sults are indicated.
Fault location Name of the faulted nodes, for which the results are indicated.
Un Nominal system voltage Un in kV of the faulted node
.. Selected results
Node-oriented display of the results

The results are displayed node oriented. The following blocks are displayed for
each faulted node:
Block 1: Voltages and currents at faulted node

ID Fault To Distance Element Type Un Results
location node from fault name Voltages/
Currents
1236 TWO Faulted 0 65.00
Abbreviations:
ID Identification number (ID) of the faulted node

Short Circuit
Fault location Name of faulted node.

To node Faulted. Indicates that the nodes is faulted.
Distance Distance from the faulted nodes: 0.
Un Nominal system voltage of faulted node in kV.
Results Fault currents and voltages at faulted nodes.
Block 2: Results in the elements connected with the faulted node

ID From To Distance Element Type Un Results Cur-
node node from fault name rents
1374 TWO ONE TRA1-2 2W Tra
1300 TWO THREE LIN2-3 Line
Abbreviations:
ID Identification number (ID) of the element connected with the
faulted node.
From node Name of From node (faulted node).
To node Name of To node.
Element Name of the element.
name
Type Type of the element, e.g. line, 2W-Transformer, generator,
Results Currents, which flows from From node to To node caused by
the fault in node of block 1.
Block3: Voltages at nodes, which are connected through elements with the
faulted node
ID From To Distance Element Type Un Results
Node node from fault name Voltages
1236 ONE 1
220.00
Abbreviations:
ID Identification number (ID) of the node, which is connected
through elements with the faulted node.
From node Name of the node, which is connected through elements with the
faulted node.

Short Circuit
Distance Gives the distance of the node in respect of the faulted node.
Un Nominal system voltage of the node in kV, which is connected
through elements with the faulted node.
Block 4: Results in the elements connected with the node of block 3

ID From To Distance Element Type Un Results Cur-
node node from fault name rents
1374 ONE TWO TRA1-2 2W
Tra
1400 ONE SIX LIN1-6 Line
Abbreviations:
ID Identification number (ID) of the elements, which are connected
with the node of block3.
From node Name of From node.
To node Name of To node.
Element Name of the element.
name
Type Type of the element, e.g. line, 2W-Transformer, generator,
Results Currents, which flows from From node to To node caused by
the fault in node of block 1.
Blocks 1 and 2 are always displayed. The number of blocks 3 and 4 depends on
the Fault Distance entered in the Calculation Parameters.
Node voltages:
ID Identification number (ID) of node, for which the voltages are in-
dicated.
Name Name of node.
Faulted Indicates the faulted node.
Un System nominal voltage of node.
UL-E (RST) Fault voltage (line to earth). (Phase system)
Ang U L-E Angle of fault voltage (line to earth). (Phase system)
(RST)
UL-L (RST) Fault voltage (line to line). (Phase system)

Short Circuit
Ang U L-L Angle of fault voltage (line to line). (Phase system)

(RST)
U (012) Fault voltage (symmetrical components system).
Ang U (012) Angle of fault voltage (symmetrical components system).
U0 Pre-fault voltage, may depend on the load flow. If the calculation
is performed according to IEC or ANSI/IEEE the pre-fault volt-
ages are zero
Ang U0 Angle of pre-fault voltage, may depend on load flow.
Fault type Type of short circuit fault used for the calculation.
Method Calculation method (Standard).
Maximum Indicates the node with the maximum current of one fault calcula-
current tion.
Zone Zone to which the node belongs to.
Area Area to which the node belongs to.
Partial net- Partial network to which the node belongs to.
work
For asymmetrical faults all results (phases L1, L2, L3) can be displayed, for sym-
metrical faults only results of phase L1 are displayed.
Phase-to-phase voltages are calculated as:
UL1,L2 = UL2 - UL1

UL2,L3 = UL3 - UL2
UL3,L1 = UL1 - UL3
The output sequence is UL1,L2, UL2,L3 and UL3,L1.
Only the voltages of the 0.5 cycles network will be reported when calculat-
ing according to ANSI/IEEE.

Short Circuit
Theory of Short Circuit Calculation
The behavior of a power system during short circuit can be represented by a net-
work equivalent consisting of a prefault voltage source U0k and the network im-
pedance Zkki for the positive, negative and zero sequence system at the faulted
node. The infeed elements such as network feeders, generators and asynchro-
nous motors are modeled by an impedance Ze and their source voltage (EMF).
During calculation they will be changed to equivalent current sources.
Assuming symmetrical structure and supplying of the power system the symmetri-
cal components are only interconnected at the fault location. The interconnection
will be defined by the fault equations. The equations are dependent on the fault
type:
- 3-phases short circuit:
U0
Ik " = k
1 Zk
1
Ik " = 0
2
Ik " = 0
0
- 1-phase to ground short circuit:
U0
Ik " = k
1 Zk + Zk + Zk
1 2 0
Ik " = Ik "
2 1
Ik " = Ik "
0 1
- 2-phases short circuit:
U0
Ik " = k
1 Zk + Zk
1 2

Short Circuit
Ik " = Ik "
2 1
Ik " = 0
0
- 2-phases to ground short circuit:
(
U 0 Zk + Zk )
Ik " =
( )
k 2 0
1 Zk Zk + Zk + Zk Zk
1 2 0 2 0
Zk
Ik " = Ik " 0
2 1 Zk + Zk
2 0
Zk
Ik " = Ik " 2
0 1 Zk + Zk
2 0
It means:
U0k: Operating voltage or prefault voltage at faulted node k.
Zkki: Network impedance at faulted node of positive (i=1), negative (i=2) and
zero (i=0) sequence system.
Iki": Initial short circuit current at faulted node of positive (i=1), negative (i=2)
and zero (i=0) sequence system.
Depending on the calculation method the prefault voltage U0k will be

calculated with the help of current sources res. the currents of infeed elements
Ie (superposition method)
set per definition (IEC909, ANSI/IEEE).
The currents of the infeed elements Ie for the superposition method are calculated
as Ie = EMF / Ze. Ze is the internal impedance of infeed elements. The prefault
voltages U0 may be calculated from the network equation U = Y-1 Ie. The pre-
fault voltage of the node k is U0k. The internal voltage (EMF) of the infeed ele-
ments are
of the node's nominal system voltage as a set value (the parameter "calculation
method" must be set to "superposition without LF") or
calculated from the load flow results. The calculation will be done with the help
of the complex voltages and powers at the nodes. The load flow calculation
must have been calculated before and the parameter "calculation method"
must have been set to "superposition with LF".

Short Circuit
The IEC909 method set the prefault voltage at faulted node per definition to
U0k=cUn, whereby the currents of infeed elements Ie are set to zero. The voltage
factor c is dependent on the nominal system voltage at fault location and is de-
fined by the standard. The factor c will be set automatically by the program.
The ANSI/IEEE method set the prefault voltage at faulted node per definition to
U0k= Eoper and the currents of infeed elements Ie are set to zero. The value Eoper
is an input value (see "Calculation Parameters (SC)" on page 9-1) and is the
highest operating voltage in pu at fault location. For calculating the interrupting
duty of a breaker the current will be multiplied by a factor, which is a function of
the X/R ratio at fault location.
The network impedances Zkk1, Zkk2 and Zkk0 can be computed from the net-
work equations U = Y-1I of positive, negative and zero sequence system.
Depending of the used method the Y-matrix looks different:

All elements are considered in the calculation according to the superposition
method. The models are described in section Element data input and de-
scription of the models.
The IEC method prescribes to neglect all shunt admittances of the positive se-
quence system. Additionally the impedances of the infeed elements will be
corrected (see "Synchronous Machine Data", "Asynchronous Machine Data",
etc. in chapter "Element Data Input and Models").
The ANSI/IEEE-standard tells that there must be built up three different Y-
matrices for the positive system in order to be able to calculate the currents
Ik" (0.5 cycles), Ia (x cycles) and Ik (30 cycles). The impedances of the gen-
erators and motors must be corrected for all three matrices. In section 5.4.1
of ANSI/IEEE C37.010-1979 these factors are described. The loads are ne-
glected. The impedances of the negative and zero system will not be cor-
rected. For getting the X/R-ratio two separate nodal admittance matrices
(positive and zero system) with only the resistive part of the network were
built up.
Typical quantities of the short circuit current are the peak current, the breaking
current, the steady state current and the thermal current. The IEC or ANSI/IEEE
gives the method how to calculate these quantities from the initial short circuit cur-
rent.
A Comparison of the Methods:

The superposition method is the more accurate method assuming that the prefault
voltages are known. It is difficult to know the voltages before short circuit espe-

Short Circuit
cially in a planning state, where the load flow can only be approximated. Moreover
the load flow which will lead either to a maximum or to a minimum short circuit
current at the different locations of the system is hard to find.
This module provides a simplified superposition method. The internal voltage

sources (EMF) are set to 110% of the nominal system voltage of the infeed ele-
ments. Thereby a voltage drop of 10% between the terminal voltage and the in-
ternal voltage is assumed for normal operating. For the exact superposition
method a load flow has to be calculated before calculating the short circuit.
The IEC or ANSI/IEEE method is a simplified method which can be used to calcu-
late short circuit currents. It has the advantage that the prefault voltages have not
to be known to get accurate results. The calculated currents are on the safety
side. The calculation is performed according to an international standard.
It is advisable to calculate the short circuit currents according to the IEC or

ANSI/IEEE method, especially when the peak currents, the breaking cur-
rents and the steady state currents should be calculated. To calculate the
voltages during short circuit (post fault voltages) the superposition method
should be used.
Network Type IEC

For the calculation according to IEC the supply of the short circuit is of impor-
tance:
Simple fed short circuit:

The short circuit is supplied by only one network feeder or one generator or
identical parallel generators (see fig. 9.1). The current at fault location corre-
sponds to the current of the infeed element.
Short circuit fed from non-meshed sources:
The short circuit is supplied parallel by several active elements (see fig. 9.2).
The current at fault location is calculated as the sum of the partial currents.
The size of the partial currents are independent of each other.
Short circuit fed from non-meshed sources over a common impedance:
The short circuit is supplied by several active elements over a common im-
pedance (see fig. 9.3). The current at fault location is calculated as a super-
position of the partial currents (see point d).
Short circuit in an intermeshed network:
The short circuit is supplied by several active elements in an intermeshed
network (see fig. 9.4). The current at fault location is calculated as a super-
position of the partial currents.

Short Circuit
G
3~ F
Fig. 9.1 Simple fed short circuit
Q B
G
3~
M
3~
F
Fig. 9.2 Short circuit fed from non-meshed sources
Q B
Z
~
G F
3~
M
3~
Fig. 9.3 Short circuit from non-meshed sources over a common impedance
G
3~
M M M
3~ 3~ 3~
Fig. 9.4 Short circuit in an intermeshed network

Short Circuit
For the calculation of the initial short circuit current Ik" and of the peak current Ip
the results are independent of the network type.
The Initial Short Circuit Current Ik"

This current will be calculated according to IEC or the superposition method. The
fault currents in the phases are calculated by desymmetrizing the currents in the
component system. With the module Short circuit the minimum and maximum ini-
tial short circuit current Ik"min res. Ik"max can be computed. The selection is
made in the dialog of the calculation parameters, field "Ik"maximal" (see
"Calculation Parameters (SC)" on page 9-1). The user gets the maximum initial
current when the parameter is set to "YES", otherwise the minimum current is
computed. In this case the minimum short circuit power of all network feeder are
taken, the asynchronous machines are neglected and the resistance of the lines
are taken by increased temperature.
The Initial Short Circuit Power Sk"

The initial short circuit power is calculated dependent on the kind of fault:
symmetrical fault: Sk " = 3 Un Ik "

asymmetrical and special fault: Sk " = Un Ik " / 3
Un means the nominal system voltage.
The Peak Short Circuit Current Ip

The peak current Ip is the highest possible instantaneous value of the short circuit
current and is dependent on the ratio R/X. It can be calculated according to IEC
as:
ip = 2 Ik "
with kappa = 1.02 + 0.98e-3R/X.
To compute the ratio R/X the method of the equivalent frequency is used, that
means that the following term is used R/X=Rc/Xc(fc/f). Rc and Xc are the equiva-
lent resistance and reactance at fault location with the equivalent frequency fc.
Zc=Rc+j2PifcLc is the impedance as seen from the fault location if an equiva-
lent voltage source as the only active voltage is applied with the frequency
fc=20Hz (for f=50Hz system frequency) or fc=24Hz (for 60Hz system frequency).

Short Circuit
To compute the branch currents the ratio R/X of the branches or the ratio R/X at
fault location are used, depending on the Calculation Parameter entry.
When calculating special faults (e.g. double earth faults) the factor kappa is calcu-
lated in the same way as for symmetrical 3-phase short circuits and if several
faulted nodes are involved, the largest kappa-value is taken.
The Short Circuit Breaking Current Ib

The breaking current Ib for a synchronous machine will be calculated as:
Ib = Ik "
The factor (mue) will be calculated according to IEC and is a function of the ratio
Ik"/IrG and of the minimum time delay tmin of the circuit breakers (Ik": initial short
circuit current; IrG: rated current). The minimum time delay is an input value and
will be introduced in the dialog of the calculation parameters (see "Calculation
Parameters (SC)" on page 9-1).
For motors the breaking current Ib is
Ib = q Ik"
The factor can be computed analogous to above. The factor q is a function of

the ratio m=P/p (P: rated resistive power; p: number of pole pairs) and of the
minimum time delay of the breakers.
Depending on the network type the breaking current at fault location is computed
as:
- SC in a meshed network:
3
Ib = Ik"
i
( i
)
UG " 1 IkG " UM " 1 q IkM "
c Un i i j j j j
j
with
cUn/3: Equivalent voltage source at fault location
Ik": Initial short circuit current
UG"i, UM"j: Initial voltage differences at the connection point of synchro-
nous machine i and of asynchronous machine j
IkG"i, IkM"j: Initial short circuit currents of synchronous machine i and
asynchronous machine j

Short Circuit
- SC fed from non-meshed sources:
Ib = Ibi
i
Ibi represents the breaking current of the active element i, which is connected to
the faulted node.
- Single fed SC:
Ib = Ibi
Ibi represents the breaking current of the active element i, which is connected to
the faulted node.
When calculating asymmetrical and special faults it is set: Ib = Ik".
Remark: The type of network is determined by the program.
The Steady State Current Ik

The steady state current will be computed dependent on the type of network:
SC in a meshed network:
Ik at faulted node: Ik = Ik "OM ,
Ik"OM is the initial short circuit current without considering the motors
SC fed from non-meshed sources:
Ik at faulted node: Ik = Iki ,
i
Iki is the steady state current of the element i which is connected to the
faulted node.
Simple fed short circuit:
Ik at faulted node: Ik = Iki
Iki is the steady state current of the element i which is connected to the
faulted node.
When calculating asymmetrical and special faults it is set: Ib = Ik".

The steady state current of a synchronous machine Ik will be calculated for a sin-
gle fed network as:
Ik = IrG
The factor lambda is a function of Xdsaturated, Ufmax/Ufr, Ik"/IrG and the type of
machine (turbo or salient pole). These parameters are input values, except the ini-
tial sc current Ik" (see "Synchronous Machine Data" in chapter "Element Data In-
put and Models"). IrG is the rated current of the machine. A minimum or a maxi-

Short Circuit
mum -factor can be calculated. Depending on the input in the field "Ik"maximum"
of the calculation parameter dialog the minimum res. maximum initial short circuit
current and the steady state current are calculated.
For calculation of the minimum steady state current compound excited generators
are treated different.
The Thermal Short Circuit Current Ith

The thermal short circuit current Ith is calculated as:
Ith = Ik" m + n
The factor m takes into account the thermal influence of the aperiodic component
of short circuit current and the factor n the thermal influence of the alternating
component of short circuit current. The factor m is a function of kappa and short
circuit duration Tks. The factor n is a function of ratio Ik"/Ik, factor kappa and short
circuit duration (see "Calculation Parameters (SC)" on page 9-1, input field
"Tshort Ith").
The D.C. Component of Short Circuit Current iDC

The D.C. component of the short circuit power is calculated as:
2f t R / X
i = 2 Ik" e
DC
with f as frequency, t as short circuit duration and R/X as ratio of real- to imaginary
part of the impedance. The R/X-ratio is calculated according to the equivalent fre-
quency method (see above, calculation of peak current Ip). The short circuit dura-
tion t is input value, input field "Tshort iDC" (see "Calculation Parameters (SC)"
on page 9-1).
When calculating special faults (e.g. double earth faults) the factor R/X is calcu-
lated in the same way as for symmetrical 3-phase short circuits and if several
faulted nodes are involved, the smallest R/X-value is taken.
The Asymmetrical Breaking Current Iasy

The asymmetrical breaking current is calculated according to:
I = Ib 2 + i 2
asy DC
with Ib: breaking current and iDC: D.C. component of short circuit current.

Short Circuit
The ANSI/IEEE-currents
According to ANSI/IEEE the currents are calculated in order to be able to select a
circuit breakers. There are three different currents:
Symmetrical 0.5 cycles current Ik"
Asymmetrical 0.5 cycles current Iasy
Symmetrical x cycles (interrupting) current Ia (x: input value, e.g. 3, 4, 5, 8)
Steady state (30 cycles) current Ik
For all three times (0.5, x, 30 cycles) a separate network must be built up. All fault
voltage are reported for the 0.5 cycles network.
The symmetrical 0.5 cycles current

The current will be calculated as follows (3 phase sc):
E
" oper
Ik =
1 Zk
1
The impedance at fault location Zk1 will be found from the complex Y-matrix of the
positive system. The Y-matrix is different than the one of IEC909.
The asymmetrical 0.5 cycle current

E E
oper oper
Iasy " = 1.0 + 2 e 4 f t R / X = 1.0 + 2 e 2 R / X
1 Zk Zk
1 1
The impedance at fault location Zk1 will be found from the complex Y-matrix of the
positive system same as for Ik". The X/R ratio will also be found from the Y-matrix.
f is the network frequency, t = 0.5 / f the time.
The symmetrical interrupting current (x cycles current)

E
oper
Ia = f SC
Zki
1
The impedance at fault location Zki1 will be found from the complex Y-matrix of
the positive system, which is different to that one for calculating Ik". The factor fSC
will be calculated with the help of X/R- resp. Zki1/R-ratio, the type of network

Short Circuit
(generator near or far) and the type of short circuit (symmetrical or asymmetrical
fault). The value for the resistance R will be found from a separate Y-matrix, which
contains only the resistive part of the network. The value for fSC can be found from
figures 8, 9 and 10 of ANSI-standard C37.010-1979. The program reports the
value E/Z as well:
E
oper
Ia =
Zki
1
The symmetrical steady state (30 cycles) current

E
oper
Ik =
Zkk
1
The impedance at fault location Zkk1 will be found from the complex Y-matrix of
the positive system, which is different to that one for calculating Ik" and Ia.
ANSI Standard C37.013

In this Standard, the short circuit calculation is carried out, concerning the genera-
tors in the network with there current. These currents are calculated by the follow-
ing formulas:
Generator source symmetrical short-circuit current

P 1 1 t / T 1 1 t / T 1
I gen _ source _ sym _ rms = '' ' e + ' e +
'' '

d
X
d

3 V X d X d d Xd X d
Generator source asymmetrical short-circuit current

P 2 1 1 t / T 1 1 t / T 1 1 t / T
'' ' e + ' e
'' '
I gen _ source _ asym = d
+
d
cos t e a

V 3 X d X d d
X X d X d
X ''
d
With P = rated power, V= rated maximum voltage and the reactance values of the
generator in pu.

Short Circuit

Short Circuit
Calculation of Partial Networks (SC)
In case of a large network, which consists of several partial networks, it is possible

to select the partial network(s) to be calculated. A partial network is a network,
which is not connected to an other network, because of e.g. open lines. The pro-
gram displays all partial networks in a list box and the user can select the net-
work(s) to be calculated. Making the calculation with only a part of a large network
has the advantage of saving a lot of computing time.

Selectivity Analysis
The selectivity module
Installation
The following files belong to the selectivity module:
Program files :
D_SelModul.exe German program version
E_SelModul.exe English program version
SelDevic.dll Protection devices
SelInter.dll Interface to the interactive graphic
Mfc42d.dll, Microsoft program libraries
Msvcrtd.dll
Mcontr32.dll Control functions
Libraries :
*.sd1 Characteristics
*.sd2 Protective modules
*.sd3 Protection devices
Project files :
*.sel Protection devices and diagrams
Functions of the independent E_SelModul.exe module
The program contains the following components/functions:

Editor for characteristic libraries (*.sd1)
Editor for protection module libraries (*.sd2)
Editor for protection devices libraries (*.sd3)
Editor for protection project files (*.sel) with protection devices and selectivity
diagrams
All objects can be documented in page view and printing.

The program registers itself in the registry the first time it is launched. This permits
standard Explorer features to be used such as double-clicking on files to open, file
dragging, and opening or printing files from the Explorer context menu.
A file format change was required; files created with the previous module (up to
version 4.1) can be read and edited. Back conversion is not possible without a
partial loss of data.
The customary file backup mechanism has been implemented: existing files are
saved with a modified extension (*.s_1 or *.s_2 ...).
Functions of the interactive graphic E_E32.exe

The program loads the protection device file (*.sel) with the project data (*.mcb), if
available, i.e. if both files have the same name. The following functions are
available:
Editing of protection device data with the graphic or list editor
Editing of selectivity diagrams with the list editor
Simulation of the response characteristics in short-circuit and load flow
calculations;
the response time is documented in the graphic.
Automatic creation of selectivity diagrams according to calculations

General
The user interface and handling of the program corresponds to current standards.
Launching the program does not create a new empty document as in Word or
Excel, for example. The user uses the menu to determine the type of library
(characteristics, protection modules...) or the project file to be created/opened.
Multiple files (*.sd1, *.sd2...) can be opened and edited; files can also be merged.
Access to the contents of the file is realized via the list of elements; double-
clicking on an element opens the editing dialog.
If different file types are to be associated, for example to transfer characteristics to
modules, the "?" function always applies to the library that last had the focus. For
users, this means that they must open and focus on the required library in time
when entering data (before inserting the new element).
The menus and icons

Actions are performed using menus and a tool bar. Both are self-explanatory as
they correspond to standards and feature "ScreenTips", i.e. bubble help and
explanations in the status bar.
Context menus can be accessed via the right mouse button in many dialog fields.
The list of elements

The contents of the open file are displayed in a list field. A variety of views are
available in a manner similar to that of the Explorer. See "View" menu and tool
bar. An icon containing information about the type of device belongs to each
element in the list.
One or more elements can be selected in the list; the action is then selected via
the menu or tool bar. If multiple elements have been selected for editing, the data
masks will appear consecutively. The selection of specific elements for
documentation is also possible.
In the case of libraries, the type name and an optional description appears in the
list. This information can be entered in the data mask after clicking the "Type Info"
button. The type name may have up to 24 characters, the description up to 64
characters. Descriptions are not available in old libraries.
Topological information and the device type appears in the list for the protection
devices of a project file.

System parameters
The system parameters that are stored in a user-specific manner in the registry
include the user ID for the table header and the settings of folders for data and
libraries. The dialog is opened via the "Tools System Parameters..." menu.
Project information
Each project file contains project-specific information which is important for the
documentation. The dialog is opened via the "Tools Project Information..."
menu.
The table header can be taken over from the system parameters with the "read in"
button.
The following output languages are currently available:
German - with decimal comma

German (CH) - with decimal point

English
French
Integration in the interactive graphic
General
The selectivity analysis module must be enabled for access to the "advanced"
protection device data; see "Info Modules..." and activation of the menu option
"Calculation Current-Time Protection".
The protection device data is stored in a separate file with the extension *.sel. The
program automatically loads this file together with the project data (*.mcb). This
requires both files to have the same name.
The data is associated through the unambiguous element name and an internal
ID. The protection device data that was previously managed separately (up to
V4.1) can be used without changes. Preparatory processing with the SelModul
may be necessary to update the protection device data.
Editing of protection device data

Access to the "advanced" protection device data is realized via the standard data
mask and the "Characteristic" button. The dialog field for advanced data is then
displayed.

Alternatively, a list of protection devices can also be used for access. The list can
be called up using the "Calculation Time Overcurrent Protection Protection
Devices..." menu. This list contains all protection devices, i.e. also those that are
not shown in the graphic.
The data can be accessed with a double-click.

Protection device response

The response of protection devices is always checked in short-circuit and load
flow calculations. The response time is shown in the graphic, provided
the device responds and
is visible.
The basis for determining the response time from the characteristic is the branch-
circuit current in the branch to which the protection device is assigned. After the
calculation, this current is also shown in the protection device dialog.
As a rule, short-circuit current calculations should be made with only one
fault location and large fault distance !
Creating selectivity diagrams

After a short-circuit calculation has been performed, the program can create a
selectivity diagram in which all protection devices affected by the projected fault
are shown with their characteristics.
A diagram can also be created after a load flow calculation, but the short-circuit
current calculation generally provides the better results.
To create a diagram, use the "Calculation Current-Time Protection Evaluation
Last Calculation..." menu. A diagram with the following contents will appear:
(1) All affected protection devices
(2) The characteristics of these protection devices
(3) The currents "measured" by the protection devices

(4) The identification of the currents in the diagram
The decision as to whether a protection device is included in the diagram is based

on the number of protection devices found:
1. Initially all protection devices that have registered more than half the
nominal current are included
2. If more than 10 devices were found in step 1, only those devices will be
included that have responded
3. If the number of devices still exceeds 10, an error message is issued
4. If less than 3 devices were found in step 1, the limit is reduced to 0,1*In
The diagram can be edited normally, for example by adding or deleting protection
devices. When the dialog is closed with "OK", the diagram is saved and can be
called up using the list.

Editing selectivity diagrams

Existing diagrams can be edited via a diagram list that can be called up using the
"Calculation Current-Time Protection Diagrams..." menu. Double-click on a
diagram in the list to open it.
The results of a new calculation - specifically the new current values of the
protection devices shown in the diagram - can be applied to the list of currents in
this manner, and thus to the diagram. It can be called up with the "new results"
button.
Parameters
A dialog for the parameters of the protection device file can be called up using the
"Calculation Current-Time Protection Parameters..." menu. The headlines
entered here and the output language will become effective in the documentation
(see chapter Project information on page 16-4).

The current-time diagrams
General
The response of the current-time protection devices are visualized in the current-
time diagrams. The response time is shown in dependence upon current. The
characteristics must always slope downward, i.e. the response time becomes
shorter (or remains the same) as the current rises.
1000 s
100 s
10 s
1,0 s
0,100 s
0,010 s
0,100 Ir 1,0 Ir 10 Ir 100 Ir
Such diagrams are used in a variety of dialog windows, as well as in the

documentation of the data.
The time axis covers the range from 10 to 1000 s (approx.16 min.). This axis is
preset and cannot be modified by the user.
The current axis can be marked in relative units (Ir), in A or in kA. The calibration
of the current axis and the number of decades to be displayed is determined by
the program. It is set to ensure that all information will be visible at all times.
Diagram properties
The appearance and properties of the diagrams can be altered. This can be done
using the context menu that can be called up with the right mouse button. The
context menus vary according to the diagram types, but generally contain the
following options:

- Mark supporting points yes/no

- Display axis legends yes/no
- Open "Diagram Properties" dialog
The "Diagram Properties" dialog contains a variety of display options. These

settings not only affect the on-screen display of the diagram, but are also effective
when the diagram is placed on the clipboard or saved as a metafile.
The diagram properties are stored in the Windows registry.
The display of the axis legends can also be toggled here, as in the context
menu.
The fonts for the axis legends can be selected using a standard dialog. The
same font is used for all diagrams!
The display of the dashed lines for each decade can be toggled. This option
is also available in the context menu.
Enabling "Grid detailed" results in a complete divisioning of the decades by
tens.

The marking of the characteristic supporting points can also be toggled

quickly using the context menu, as this may permit easier verification of the
characteristic.
The size of the point markings also corresponds to the mouse-click snap
setting and thus affects the editing process.
The line thickness of the curves and the color settings only become effective
when editing the characteristics.
Saving the diagram or copying to the clipboard

All diagrams can be saved to a Windows meta file via the context menu (see
above). A "Save File" dialog is displayed which contains a file name generated
from the current date and time.
The "Clipboard" option also uses the meta file format, ensuring that the graphics
thus transferred remain easily scalable.

The characteristic editor
The dialog window

The graphical editing of the point-by-point characteristics is performed in the
following dialog window. The window can be enlarged, but cannot be displayed
any smaller.
Activating the "Insert, Move, Delete Points" option (1) enables the direct graphical
editing of the characteristic with the mouse. A variety of cursor shapes are used.
The mouse coordinates are displayed dynamically in both editing fields (2). When
a point of a characteristic has been marked (3), the coordinates of that point are
statically displayed and can be edited. Precise numerical values can thus be
entered. New characteristic points can also be entered using the input fields.
The processing of the characteristic has been substantially improved over the old
program version. "Reversed" characteristics no longer occur. A complex algorithm
corrects the points as required to ensure a continuously declining characteristic.
Functions to simplify the creation and editing of characteristics:

Any characteristics from the current file can be selected as a "template" (4).
The old characteristic is used as a template by default when editing existing
characteristics, thus ensuring that changes are immediately visible.
Standard characteristics (5) can serve as the basis of a new curve.
Moving complete characteristics using factors permits the simple generation
of suitable tolerance curves (6)
The buttons for global function are now marked with icons instead of text:
"Undo" (7) and "Redo" (8)
"Copy" (9) and "Load" (10)
All processing steps can be undone; the redo function, i.e. to undo an undo
operation, does not work yet.
Diagram properties
The appearance and properties of the diagrams can be altered. Ensure that no
points are selected when calling up the context menu with the right mouse button
(see Diagram properties on page 16-10). The diagram properties are stored in
the Windows registry.
Editing of fuse characteristics

The following special features must be observed when editing fuse
characteristics:
The "Template" and "Standard Characteristic" buttons are not enabled.
The current axis and value display indicates ampere values. The current axis
is automatically adapted to the required current range.
Graphical input and editing of characteristics

The "Insert" function in the menu or on the tool bar can be used to create a new
characteristic. Alternatively, the "New Type" element in the list can be used.
Characteristic points may be entered either graphically or numerically. The action
can be selected by activating one of the checkboxes:
Insert..points
Point and click with the mouse in the diagram; the displayed coordinates
simplify the input. The points are sorted into the characteristic using the
current value as the sorting criterion. Time values are corrected as required
to prevent reversals of the characteristics.
Move..points
Click on a point to select it and drag the point. The point is "lost" when
leaving the valid range. In difficult cases, use numerical inputs for
corrections.

Delete..points
Click on a point with the mouse.
The checkbox of the function will remain activated until it is unchecked or an input
is made in an input field.
Alternatively, the point can be selected with a mouse click; the right mouse button
will then bring up the following context menu:
Numerical input of characteristic points

The numerical input of characteristic points in the current and time value input
fields permits precise values to be entered.
Entering new points
Enter the current and time values in the input fields above the diagram, click
"Apply". Note: Ensure that no point is currently selected, otherwise it will be
moved.
Moving a point
First select a point. The input fields will now display the exact values. The
values can now be changed and applied.
The points are also sorted into the characteristic when the input is made
numerically, with the current value serving as the sorting criterion. The time
values may be corrected as required to avoid reversals of the characteristics.
Specifying standard characteristics

The specification of standard characteristics can be a good basis for the input of a
specific characteristic. The following characteristics are available:

Creating tolerance characteristics

Use the "Move" button to open the following dialog.
An existing characteristic can be easily moved to create a suitable tolerance

characteristic.

The module editor
Editing of protection modules

A "protection module", also known as a "protective function" or "protective stage",
is the smallest functional unit of a protection device. Protection modules have their
own library type.
The essential properties of the module are defined in one main and several
additional data masks. A reduced data mask can be used to change the settings
of the module at a later time (see Setup of protection modules on page 16-23).
(1) Type name and description

(2) Load the module data from the library
(3) Copy and load the module data
(4) Selection field for the protective function; available options are:
- Overload
- Overcurrent
- Directional overcurrent
- Earth fault
- Directional earth fault
(5) Selection field for the characteristic

(6) Definition of the possible options for (5), see Characteristics on page 16-
18.
(7) Selection field for the reference value of the current setting; available
options are:
- Rated current Ir
- Basic current Ib
- Total current I0
- Basic current Ib0
- Setting I1 of 1st protection stage
(8) The type name will be displayed here if the module contains current-time
characteristics that have been defined point-by-point, i.e. if "i/t
characteristic" has been defined as a possible option under (6); The "..."
button calls up the dialog for the selection/input of characteristics (see
Characteristics and tolerances on page 16-21).
(9) Definition of the current and time setting ranges; see Coding of the setting
ranges on page 16-22.
(10) Input of positive and negative tolerances; see Tolerances on page 16-22.
(11) Input of the "basic time" tb of the characteristic or the factor for the sloping
of corners in the case of definite-time overcurrent-time modules.The rate
of rise of a current-dependent characteristic, i.e. the response time of the
relay, can be set with the time setting "t /p.u.". A value of t = 1.0 p.u. (if
tb=1s) results in the original characteristic.
A number of manufacturers specify the response time at a multiple of the
current setting (generally a factor of 6 or 10) for the time setting. In this
case the time reference value can be entered as "tb /s"; the original
settings should then be entered under "t /p.u.".
Characteristics
The selection field for the characteristic of the protection module (5) contains only
those characteristics that have been defined as selectable. The "..." button (6)
opens the following dialog for this purpose:

As a rule, 3 groups of characteristics must be distinguished:

1. I-t characteristics in which the curve which has been defined point-by-point
is modified by setting values.
2. Definite-time overcurrent-time protection, in which the current and time
settings are implemented directly as a right-angle characteristic.
3. Current-dependent characteristics (inverse time) defined by rules and
internally calculated on the basis of formulas; the multiplication of these
standard characteristics with the time and current settings result in the
effective characteristics.
I-t characteristics
The "i-t characteristic" option for the characteristic is further subdivided in the
options (1), (2) and (3). The different processing of the characteristics is shown in
the following graphics.
i-t characteristic (1):

The processing corresponds to the previous handling of i-t characteristics, i.e.
both the i and t values are multiplied by the settings.

Settings i = 2* Ir, t = 1 p.u. Settings i = 1* Ir, t = 2 p.u.

1000 s 1000 s
100 s 100 s
10 s 10 s
1,0 s 1,0 s
0,100 s 0,100 s
0,010 s 0,010 s
0,100 Ir 1,0 Ir 10 Ir 100 Ir 0,100 Ir 1,0 Ir 10 Ir 100 Ir

The sloping part of the characteristic corresponds to a constant it value
dependent on the time setting; the current setting only affects the left-hand
section of the characteristic.
1000 s 1000 s
100 s 100 s
10 s 10 s
1,0 s 1,0 s
0,100 s 0,100 s
0,010 s 0,010 s

The sloping part of the characteristic also corresponds to a constant it value in

this case; however, it is dependent on the current setting; the time setting only
affects the bottom section of the characteristic.
1000 s 1000 s
100 s 100 s
10 s 10 s
1,0 s 1,0 s
0,100 s 0,100 s
0,010 s 0,010 s
Characteristics and tolerances

If "i/t characteristic" is a possible option, the Characteristics bay in the dialog is
enabled. At least one characteristic must be defined. The following small dialog
field is designed for this purpose, which can then lead onto the editing window for
characteristics (see The dialog window on page 16-13):
Two characteristics can be specified to depict the tolerance band of the protective
function. If only one characteristic is stated, the information pertaining to the

tolerance band becomes effective and the program calculates the minimum and
maximum characteristics on he basis of the basic characteristic.
Coding of the setting ranges

The coding of the setting ranges is relatively complex when entering protection
module data. The most realistic possible depiction of the module's possible
settings should be achieved; this will facilitate the subsequent setup of the
protection devices significantly, however.
The following convention should be observed (the following examples apply for
the "comma decimal separator" regional settings) :
only one setting value, i.e. cannot be set effectively "1" or "1,0"
several different setting values "1;2;3" or
"0,150;0,3;0,45"
Setting range in step width,
e.g. variable from "2" in steps from "2" to "10" "2-2-10"
any combination of the codes above separated by "1-1-3;4-2-8;12" or
semicolons (e.g. 1,2,3,4,6,8,12 can be set) "1-1-4;6;8;12" or...
The following coding is generated using the settings when loading old data that
only contains the upper and lower limits of the setting ranges. Subsequent editing
is generally required.
No minimum value (min): min = setting (act)
No maximum value (max): max = act
min = max = act (=1) "1"
min < max: the range is divided into 5 sections, i.e. 6 "1-1-6"
valid settings are available
Setting value between minimum and maximum value: "1-1-6;8-0,4-10
the overall range is divided into two sections, "min..act"
and "act..max"
e.g. min=1 act=8 max=10
Very large setting ranges with small steps (e.g. "0,010s to 300s in 0,010s
increments"), such as those that occur with new electronic relays can lead to
storage problems. It would be necessary to save 30000 setting values in the
example. To prevent this, the program does not accept any increments smaller
than 1%.
Tolerances
Protection devices, and thus also protection modules, always have 2
characteristics in the new program version, a minimum ("warm") and maximum

("cold") characteristic. As a result, characteristics are always displayed as an area

in the selectivity diagrams.
In the case of fuses, 2 characteristics are definitely stated. For protection

modules, i.e. relays and tripping devices, tolerances are input directly. The
positive and negative tolerances are stated in good technical documentation.
Setup of protection modules

A special dialog which has been reduced to essential information is available for
the setup of a protection module within the predefined limits. The effective
characteristic is displayed during the setup procedure. The following items can be
set up:
"locked" yes/no
The module is disabled; unlike the earlier version, information pertaining to
the actual function (overcurrent...) is no longer lost.

Characteristic
Especially in the case of inverse time relays, the characteristic can be
switched simply between the possible options.
Current and time settings
Only those settings that were previously coded in the setting range are
possible. The setting can either be changed using the "+" and "-" buttons or
by directly entering the setting in the editing field.

The device editor
General
Unlike the previous versions of the program, the protection devices are now
organized in various types:
Fuses
Circuit-breakers (similar to fuses)
Overcurrent releases for low-voltage power circuit breakers
Overcurrent-time relays, secondary relays with transformer connections
Protection object for the illustration of threshold values, motor starting
currents, etc.
Protection device types can be stored in device libraries (*.sd3) independently of
the device type. In addition, "type series" libraries will be available later with the
function "Find suitable fuse for indicated rated current, etc."
Adding new protection devices, wizards

Adding new protection devices via the interactive graphic (see Editing of
protection device data on page 16-5) can be realized in two ways:
The user enters a protection device typ contained in the allocated library into
the first data mask.
The program loads the device data from the library and displays the normal
dialog.
The user does not enter a protection device type.
The program will launch a wizard to guide the user through the required
dialogs in several steps.
The addition of a protection device with the independent program requires the
protection device type to be established first. This can be done via the menu
("Edit Add New Device Fuse...") or a small dialog box:

The program will then launch a wizard to guide the user through the required
dialogs in several steps.
Editing of protection devices

The input and editing of data is performed on several tabbed dialog fields. The
following tabs are available:
Info / View (not for library data)
- Display / input of topological information
- Definition of color and pattern of characteristic
Text (not for library data)
Input of text information, comments for the documentation
Technical Data (depends on the protection device type)
Input of rated and reference current, etc.. In the case of library elements, the
type name is also entered here.
Characteristic(s) (depends on the protection device type)
display of the effective characteristics; make adjustments as required
Let-trough Energy (depends on the protection device type)
Information on the let-trough energy of the protection device not
implemented yet!
Not only the data required for the selectivity studies has been recorded, but also
that required for cable dimensioning.

"Info / View" tab:
The editing fields for node names, etc. are disabled when the protection device
has been called up via the interactive graphic. The data is displayed but cannot be
modified.
The fixed assignment of the color and pattern of characteristics ensures the
consistent display of the characteristics in the selectivity diagrams.
"Text" tab:
The text information entered here only appears in the documentation, i.e. in the
relay setup tables.

"Technical Data - General" tab:

This tab is used for all protection device types:
(1) Type information; a unique type name is required for library elements.
(2) Button to transfer data from the library; only library elements of the same
protection device type are available.
(3) Button to copy the complete technical data of the device, including
characteristics.
(4) Button to load the data copied with (3).
The following input fields are available on this tab for protection device types in
which the self-impedance of the device has been taken into account in the cable
dimensioning:
"Technical Data Fuses and Circuit-Breakers" tab:

The additional data for fuses and circuit breakers only amounts to:
the rated current Ir

the high test current (I2) related to the rated current
"Technical Data Tripping Devices and Relays" tab:

The additional data for releases and relays relates to the various currents:
Release Relay
Ir Rated current of the power circuit- Primary transformer nominal
breaker current
Ib Rated current of the release Basic current (reference current)
I0 Rated current of the release for Primary transformer nominal
earth fault detection current, summation current
transformer (cable-type current
transformer)
Ib0 Reference current for earth fault Basic current for earth fault
detection detection
"Technical Data Protection Object" tab:
Protection objects permit limit values or limit curves to be displayed. The program
features functions to generate limit curves.
The rated current Ir (1) of the protection object should always be stated.
Thermal limit curves of cables

The value It (2) to be determined on the basis of the permissible short-circuit
current density is converted to a limit curve (t=0...5s) by clicking (3).

1000 s
100 s
10 s
1,0 s
0,100 s
0,010 s
0,100 Ir 1,0 Ir 10 Ir 100 Ir 1000 Ir
The curve generally exceeds the current range up to 100Ir. The rated current is
not taken into consideration in the curve, as it applies to a time value of >>1000s.
The curve can be supplemented as required.
Motor starting currents

Clicking button (5) creates a simple acceleration curve (4) if Ian/Ir > 2.0 (red
curve).
1000 s
100 s
10 s
1,0 s
0,100 s
0,010 s
0,100 Ir 1,0 Ir 10 Ir 100 Ir
Current flow from result file

The button (6) can be used to apply any current line from a motor acceleration
result file (*.rmh) as a characteristic.
Note:

The result file is searched for the element name of the protection object. If the
required element name is not found, a selection list of the available results is
displayed.
Voltage can only be checked in the case of motors.
If the acceleration process does not start at the time 0,0 s, the starting condition
will be suppressed to ensure that no reversed characteristics result.
"Characteristic(s) - General" tab:

This tab contains a graphical representation of the various device characteristics
for all protection device types. For information on the diagram, see The current-
time diagrams on page 16-10.
The representation of the characteristics on the tabs always shows the discrete
minimum and maximum characteristics. In the selectivity diagram (see The
diagram editor on page 16-35) on the other hand, the characteristics will appear
as a tolerance area; exception: only individual characteristics are shown for
protection objects.
"Technical Data Fuses, Circuit-Breakers and Protection Objects" tab:

The tab shows the characteristics in the diagram; the high test direct current I2 to
be entered on the "Technical Data" tab will also be shown as required.
Characteristics can be loaded from an open library using the "?" buttons. The
dialog described in chapter The dialog window on page 16-13 should be called
up to edit the characteristics; the diagram is then calibrated in ampere values and
current values can be processed without conversion.

"Characteristic(s) - Tripping Devices and Relays" tab:

The tab shows all of the characteristics active in the diagram, i.e. the
characteristics of blocked protective functions do not appear. In addition to the
type of module, the list of protective functions (1) also contains the module's
function:
I> Overload
I>> Overcurrent
-> I>> Directional overcurrent
I0>> Earth fault
-> I0>> Directional earth fault

Button (2) adds new protection modules to the protection device.
The program responds as follows to the selection of a module in the list:

The (partial) characteristic of the module is highlighted in red in the diagram.
The button (3) to delete the module is enabled.
If it is possible to set up the module, the setup buttons (4) are enabled. The
setting changes become visible in the diagram immediately.
The button (5) to edit the module is enabled. This button opens the dialog
described in chapter Editing of protection modules on page 16-17.
The button (6) to set up the module is enabled. This button opens the
advanced setup dialog described in chapter Setup of protection modules on
page 16-23.

"Let Through Energy" tab:

Information related to let through energy is not yet currently processed.

The diagram editor
The selectivity diagram dialog window
Editing in the selectivity diagram dialog window is mainly done using context
menus. The dialog window itself contains the following elements:
(1) Current-time diagram to display protection device characteristics
- the current axis is automatically determined by the program
- the axis legend applies for the basic voltage Ub1
- the characteristics of the protection devices are all converted to the basic
voltage
(2) List of the displayed protection devices
- when selecting a protection device, the characteristic is marked in the
diagram
- double-clicking a protection device opens it for editing
(3) List of the entered currents
- when selecting a current value, the value is marked in the diagram
- double-clicking a current value opens it for editing

(4) Input fields for a maximum of 2 basic (reference) voltages

- the input of a second basic voltage will result in a second current axis in
the printout.
(5) Display of mouse cursor coordinates
(6) The "Text Info" button opens a dialog for the input of a picture number and
title
(7) The "Current Results" button only appears when calculation results are
available when working with the interactive graphic (see Creating
selectivity diagrams on page 16-7).
Editing selectivity diagrams
General
A suitable short-circuit current calculation simplifies the creation of a selectivity
diagram considerably. The application of current values from calculation results
can also be realized with ease (see Creating selectivity diagrams on page 16-7).
Adding, editing and deleting protection devices

A context menu for editing the displayed protection devices can be called up with
the right mouse button while the mouse cursor is either over a characteristic in the
diagram, or in the protection device list. The options are:
Edit Calls up the device editor (alternatively, double-click),

Insert Adds a further protection device to the diagram.
A selection list is displayed.
Delete The selected protection device is removed.
Overcurrent etc. Selection of one of the characteristics of the selected
protection device.

Adding, editing and deleting current values

Current values are displayed as vertical lines in the diagram; selecting a value in
the list highlights it with a red line and its text.
A context menu for editing the current values can be called up with the right
mouse button while the mouse cursor is in the list. The options are:
Edit Calls up the current dialog (alternatively, double-click).

Copy Copies the current value.
Insert Adds a new, empty current value to the diagram.
The current dialog is displayed.
Delete The selected current value is removed.
Text Positioning of the descriptive text top/bottom.
The current dialog permits the editing of values and enables the "Copy" and
"Load" functions (editing of time-dependent currents and loading from result files
have not yet been implemented):

Documentation, print output
General
The documentation of protection device data, selectivity diagrams, etc. is currently
only possible using the separate SelModul application. The standard options
"Printer Setup..." and "Page Setup..." are available in the file menu.
Margins and a font for the tables can be specified in the "Page Setup" dialog. The
font for the diagram axes is linked to the setting for the screen display of the
diagrams (see Diagram properties on page 16-10).
The print command from the File menu or tool bar generates the documentation
for those elements selected in the element list. If nothing has been selected, all
elements will be printed. The results can be checked with the page view.

Library data
All library elements can be documented. The documentation on one page
contains the data in tables and in some cases in diagrams.
The documentation of the library elements will only contain the table header with
user information and text lines if a project file is open at the same time.
Protection device setting tables and selectivity diagrams

The proven design of the project data documentation has not been changed
significantly.
The list of current values in the selectivity drawings has been dropped. Instead,
the text is output directly in the diagram. The position of the text must be
determined when editing the diagrams (see Adding, editing and deleting current
values on page 16-37).

Distance Protection
Distance Protection
Overview
The module distance protection allows the user

to enter distance protection relays with their settings respectively character-
istics,
to get all voltage, current and impedance values (primary or secondary) seen
by a relay due to a short circuit,
to check the relay settings and
the automatic generation of the tripping schedules.
All impedance values shown in the module are calculated with a short circuit
calculation according to the superposition method (see chapter "Short Circuit").
The module distinguishes two types of relays

user-defined or general relay (relay type given by the user)
predefined relay type (relay type predefined by the program)
The characteristic of a general relay can be entered with the mouse in a R/X- or
U/I-diagram or with an input mask. In the mask the characteristic is entered with
coordinate pairs. The type of the relay can be entered by the user in the distance
protection mask.
When selecting the relay type from a predefined list, the user will be able to enter
the relay dependent setting parameters in a special input mask. The characteristic
will be built up by the program. The predefined list will be displayed, when press-
ing "relay type ?" in the distance protection mask.
The input of relay data is possible after having selected the button
"Characteristics" in the distance protection mask. The evaluation respectively the
check of the relay settings can be done with option "Calculation - Distance
Protection - Evaluation" in the main menu.

Distance Protection
Menu Options for Relays
A distance protection relay (DP-relay) must be first entered graphic- or list-

oriented with the option "Input - Switch/Protection - Distance Relay" to determine
the relay location. The relay specific data can be entered after having entered the
relay type and after having pressed the push button "Characteristics". The relay
window will be opened with a menu bar. The data can be entered with the mouse
or in masks (dialog boxes). The following menu options are available:
Relay
Starter
Tripping
Tripping Time
View
Parameter
Tripping schedule.
With the menu option "view" the user can select if the starter or tripping character-
istic or the tripping schedules should be displayed.
Under the menu option "Relay", the following options are available:
Copy / Paste
All relay data except the tripping schedules are copied into a buffer. Selecting
"Paste" the data are transferred from the buffer to the relay.
Old State
After having pressed the button "Characteristics" in the DP-relay mask all data are
saved into a separate buffer. In case of erroneous input the user can get the old
data from the buffer with this option. This function corresponds to the "Cancel"
function in the element input mask.
Print
This option is to print the contents of the relay window. The printer setting is made
in the main menu.
Clipboard
This option is to save the contents of the relay window on to the clipboard.

Distance Protection
Documentation
This option is to make a documentation of the present relay or of the pre selected
relays. The relays to be documented can be selected from the list (see "Relay -
Documentation - Relay selection").
Exit
This option is to exit the relay window.
In the relay window the following information are displayed:

relay name
relay type
relay location
protected element
nominal system voltage Un
statement, whether the impedance are primary or secondary values
ratio Ki/Ku (current transformer ratio to voltage transformer ratio)
complex ratio k0 (amount and angle) of the elements zero sequence imped-
ance and the positive sequence impedance,
k0 = (Ze(0) - Ze(1)) / (3*Ze(1))
This value appears only, when the asymmetrical fault type is set in the global
parameters
statement, whether line-line or line-earth faults are examined.
The fault type can be set in the global parameters
During entering data with the mouse the mouse position is displayed (see "Starter
Characteristic L-L" on page 10-6).
Remark
Before opening the relay window, the program checks, if the tripping schedules for
the relay have already been built up (see "Tripping Schedules" on page 10-27). If
the schedules exist already, the message "After topology change: build up the
tripping schedules!" will appear. Pressing "Yes", the tripping schedules for the
selected relay and for all other relays, which are in the schedules of the selected
relay will be rebuilt. This is only significant, when in fact the topology or the
element data has been changed.
Further menu option are explained below.

Distance Protection
Starter
This menu option is available, when the option "View - Starter" is activated. The
following starter systems can be entered:
overcurrent
under impedance
characteristic L-L for line-line faults
characteristic L-E for line-earth faults
The starter system can be selected with the last 4 menu options. The corre-
sponding menu option will be checked. Additionally to the above mentioned
starter system the user can define an earth fault detection system. Below all input
data for the different starters are explained. The values can be entered with the
mouse or in masks.
Overcurrent
The input data are:
Io L (*Ir): Phase current limit related to the current transformers primary
current Ir. Value for line-line and line-earth faults. Starting condition:
Ik"(L1) >= Io L or Ik"(L2) >= Io L or Ik"(L3) >= Io L.
Io S (*Ir): Total current limit related to the current transformers primary
current Ir. Value for line-earth faults. Starting condition: (Ik"(L1) +
Ik"(L2) + Ik"(L3)) >= Io S.
The entered data are displayed in a U-I diagram.
Under Impedance
The data are entered according to fig. 10.1:

Distance Protection
U / Ur
U limit max
U limit min
Starting area
I / Ir
I limit Io1
Fig. 10.1a Phase-independent under impedance starter
U / Ur
U limit min =
U limit max
Starting area
I / Ir
I limit Io 1 Io 2
Fig. 10.1b Phase-dependent under impedance starter
The input data are:

I limit (*Ir): Phase current limit related to the current transformers primary
current Ir. Value for line-line and line-earth faults.
Io 1 (*Ir): 1. overcurrent limit in a phase related to the current transformers
primary current Ir. Value for line-line and line-earth faults.
Io 2 (*Ir): 2. overcurrent limit in a phase related to the current transformers
primary current Ir. Value for line-line and line-earth faults.
U limit min Minimum voltage limit between line-earth or line-line (see below)
(*Ur): related to the voltage transformers primary voltage Ur.
U limit max Maximum voltage limit between line-earth or line-line (see below)

Distance Protection
(*Ur): related to the voltage transformers primary voltage Ur.

Phi min, Minimum and maximum phase angle for a phase-dependent
Phi max: starter in degree. In case of a short circuit and if the angle
between phase current and phase voltage is between Phi min and
Phi max, the current limit Io 2 is considered instead of Io 1.
I sum (*Ir): Total current limit related to the current transformers primary
current Ir. Value for line-earth faults. Starting condition: (Ik"(L1) +
Ik"(L2) + Ik"(L3)) >= I sum.
UL-L, UL-E Dependent on the activated check box, the program takes the line-
line or the line-earth voltage to compare with the limit values "U
limit min" and "U limit max".
The value "Io 2" should not be entered or set to zero for phase-independent under
impedance starters. The input of "Phi min" and "Phi max" is then unimportant.
The value "Io 2" must be defined for a phase-dependent under impedance starter.
The values "U limit min" and "U limit max" must be set equal.
Starter Characteristic L-L

With this option the user can enter
a polygon or
a circle
as starter characteristic for line-line faults in the R/X-diagram. The values can be
entered with the mouse or in a mask. If the measured impedance is inside the
polygon or inside the circle the relay will start. Dependent on the relay type (user-
defined or predefined relay) and the input mode (mouse or mask) the following
menu options are available:
Setting Parameters
This menu option is only available when working with predefined relay type. The
setting parameters of the predefined relay are shown in section "Tripping" on
page 10-10.
Limit Current
Additionally to the starter characteristic the user can enter a limit current I limit. If
a value is entered, the relay starts only when the following conditions are valid
Ik"(L1, L2, L3) >= I limit and
impedance Z inside polygon respectively circle.

Distance Protection
The value I limit must be entered related to the current transformers primary
current Ir.
Entering the settings with the mouse
Input
After having selected the option a polygon or a circle (dependent on the activated
option in the menu) can be entered. A polygon can be entered with mouse clicks
in the R/X-diagram. The input terminates after a double click. The program
connects the first and the last entered point to a closed polygon. During the input
the mouse position is given:
mouse positition: X / Ohm

Rp =
Beta
Xp =
Xp
Phi = P
Beta =
Phi
Rp
R / Ohm
Fig. 10.2 Mouse position
In addition to the mouse position (R, X, and Phi) the angle Beta is also given. The
angle Beta represents the angle between the last entered section and the section,
which would be built with the next entered point. In the mask for dimensions the
drawing area (minimum and maximum values in vertical and horizontal direction),
the grid, etc. can be defined. The mouse position will also be displayed in the Z/T-
and X/T-diagram.
A circle will be defined with the input of a center (mouse click). With dragged
mouse the radius can be entered.
Delete, Undo
After having selected this option the characteristic can be deleted. Option Undo
undeletes the last deletion.

Distance Protection
Entering the settings with the mask

With menu option "Starter - Characteristic - Mask" the mask for entering the
starter-characteristics appears. This mask appears also, when selecting the menu
option "Tripping - Characteristic - Mask". The following input is possible:
Characteristic for Starter / Tripping

Dependent on this input a starter or a tripping characteristic is entered.
Displayed Stage
The stage, which characteristic is entered or displayed, must be defined. For
starter this input is meaningless.
Fault Type
Gives the fault type the input values are for (L-L: line-line, L-E: line-earth faults).
Characteristic Type
The user has to define the characteristic type (circle or polygon). Dependent on
the activated radio button different input fields are available. A circle is defined by
a center and the radius. A polygon is defined by the input of a sequence of x,y-
points. The polygon can be changed with the push buttons "Insert" and "Delete".
The polygon points are displayed in a list. The first point must be different than
the last point. The polygon will be closed by the program itself.
Earth Faults Detection

This starter type is only for earth faults. The input values are:
Earth current IE(*Ir) Earth current related to the current transformers primary
current Ir. Starting condition: (Ik"(L1) + Ik"(L2) + Ik"(L3))
>= IE.
Earth voltage UE(*Ir) Earth voltage (displacement voltage) related to the
voltage transformers primary voltage Ur. Starting
condition: (Uf(L1) + Uf(L2) + Uf(L3)) >= UE.
Uf: Fault voltage line-earth.
If there is no earth faults detection, no values may be entered here. The earth
faults detection works additionally to other starter systems.

Distance Protection
Starter Characteristic L-E

a polygon or
a circle
as starter characteristic for line-earth faults in the R/X-diagram. The values can
be entered with the mouse or in a mask. If the measured impedance will be inside
the polygon or inside the circle the relay will start. The menu options are the same
as in section "Starter Characteristic L-L" on page 10-6.

Distance Protection
Tripping
This menu option is available, when the option "View - Tripping" is activated. The
tripping can be entered for user defined relay
with impedance values (settings) or
as a characteristic (polygon or circle) for line-line or line-earth faults and
for predefined relay directly with its setting parameters
The kind of input can be chosen under the menu option "Tripping". Additionally an
overcurrent-time function with 2 stages as back-up protection can be defined.
The tripping stages can be automatically set by the program.
The characteristics can be displayed in the R/X-, Z/T- or X/T-diagram (see "Relay-
Specific Parameters" on page 10-26).
Impedance Stages for User Defined Relay

The setting values can be entered as primary or secondary values (see "Relay-
Specific Parameters" on page 10-26). The transformer ratio and the impedance of
the protected line or the impedance to the next relay node are displayed.
The input values are:
Stage 1, 2, 3, 4: Threshold impedance or reactance value of 1., 2., 3. and 4.
Stage in Ohm per phase. The value can be entered in per
cent related to the line impedance or impedance to the next
relay node/station. If the relay has only 3 stages, the value for
the 4. stage may not be entered.
Transition stage Threshold impedance or reactance value of the transition
stage in Ohm. The value can also be entered in per cent
related to the line impedance.
Backward stage Threshold impedance or reactance value of the backward
stage in Ohm. The value can be entered in per cent related to
the line impedance. The backward stage shows always in the
opposite direction of the 1. stage.
The values are for line-line and line-earth faults.

After quitting the mask the settings are shown in the R/X-, Z/T- or X/T-diagram.

Distance Protection
Tripping Characteristic L-L

a polygon or
a circle
as tripping characteristic for line-line faults in the R/X-diagram. The values can
be entered with the mouse or in a mask. The input can be done for 4 stages, 1
transition stage and 1 backward stage in the same way as for the input of the
starter characteristics (see "Tripping Characteristic L-E" on page 10-11). The only
difference is the deletion of a stage. After having selected "Delete" the character-
istic, which has to be deleted, can be clicked. Undo undeletes the last deleted
characteristic.
In the Z/T and X/T-diagram no characteristics can be entered.
Tripping Characteristic L-E

a polygon or
a circle
as tripping characteristic for line-earth faults in the R/X-diagram. The values can
be entered with the mouse or in a mask. The input can also be done for 4 stages,
1 transition stage and 1 backward stage (see "Tripping Characteristic L-L" on
page 10-11).
Setting Parameters for Predefined Relays

The following relay types are predefined
ABB REL316
Siemens 7SA511/7SA513
AEG PD551/PD531 and SD36
The input mask will appear when selecting "Characteristic L-L faults" or
"Characteristic L-E faults" in the "Starter" or "Tripping" menu. The parameters for
starting and tripping can be entered in the mask. The documentation and the
automatic setting of the relay can be done directly in the mask. For automatic
setting the fault type should be set to asymmetrical fault in the global
parameter mask. In this case the impedances of the zero sequence are also
calculated.

Distance Protection
If there is a overcurrent or under impedance with U/I-characteristic starter function

the input has to be done according to the section above (see "Starter" on page
10-4). The setting parameters are explained in the corresponding manual.
ABB REL316
Starter characteristic:
X
XA
RLoad
RB R
AngleLoad RA
-RLoad
XB
Tripping characteristic (only for 1st stage)

X
X
7
27
-X / 8 RR R
27 RRE
-RR / 2
-RRE / 2
For each stage the k0-factor has to be entered (amount and angle):
k0 = (Zst(0) - Zst(1)) / (3*Zst(1))

Distance Protection
Siemens 7SA511, 7SA513

Starter characteristic:
X
X+A
RAE RA2 RA1 RA2 R

RA1 PHIA RAE
X-A
Tripping characteristic (only for 1st stage)

X
X1
R1 RE1 R
RE1 R1 45

Distance Protection
AEG PD531, PD551, SD36

Starter characteristic (only for PD551):
X
110
Xv
Zv
R
Beta Rv L-E
Rv L-L
Zr
70
Tripping characteristic polygon (only for 1st stage)
-135
-RL-E Alpha R
RL-L
-RL-L
RL-E
-X
Tripping characteristic circle with or without arc compensation (only for 1st stage)

Distance Protection
Delta
-135 Arc compensation
Alpha
Phi R
The function to get the arc compensation circle is:
Delta is in the range -45 < phi < alpha:

delta = alpha - phi
and in the range 135 < phi < (alpha + 180):
delta = alpha - phi + 180
For the overreach stage the factor ku for L-L and L-E faults must be entered.
Back-up Protection
The distance protection relay can also be defined as an overcurrent relay. The
input values are:
1. stage I (*Ir) Current setting value of 1. stage related to the current
transformers primary current Ir.
1. stage t Tripping time of 1. stage in seconds.
2. stage I (*Ir) Current setting value of 2. stage related to the current
transformers primary current Ir.
2. stage t Tripping time of 2. stage in seconds.
Earth current Ie (*Ir) Current setting value for line-earth faults related to the
current transformers primary current Ir. Tripping condition
(Ik"(L1) + Ik"(L2) + Ik"(L3)) >= Ie.
t (earth current) Tripping time for line-earth faults in seconds.

Distance Protection
When evaluating the relay settings and if the relay has not been started by the
distance protection relay, the values of the back-up protection are checked (see
Relay evaluation). If there is no overcurrent functionality in the relay no values
have to be entered here.
Automatic Impedance Setting

The threshold impedance values or the characteristics of the stages 1 to 4 are
automatically calculated by the program with the help of the automatic generated
tripping schedules. The program generates all possible schedules, that the relay
would see in forward and backward direction independent of the network type
(unmeshed or meshed). The generated schedules can be changed by the user.
Deleting and inserting nodes, he can build up his own schedules (see menu
option "Tripping schedule - Edit"). Starting from the correct tripping schedules
(network impedances) the program will automatically set the threshold impedance
values or the characteristics. The user has to decide by itself, which tripping
schedules have to be taken. Not important schedules must changed or deleted!
The arbitrary number of schedules are reduced to a single schedule with the
smallest impedances. For the setting, only the relay nodes are considered.
Relay location A
R
R
Generated schedules
1. 2. 3. Stage
R Resulting schedule
B C D
Z / Ohm
Fig. 10.3 Getting the minimum impedance path in meshed networks
With the minimum impedance path the relay in location R will be set. The setting
of the stages are made according to the following rules:

Distance Protection
1. stage: RRI = p1 RAB

2. stage: RRII = p2 (RAB + p1 RBC)
3. stage: RRIII = p3 (RAB + p2 (RBC + p1 RCD)
1. stage: XRI = p1 XAB

2. stage: XRII = p2 (XAB + p1 XBC)
3. stage: XRIII = p3 (XAB + p2 (XBC + p1 XCD)
with:
RAB, XAB Impedance between station A and B
RBC, XBC Impedance between station B and C
RCD, XCD Impedance between station C and D
RR, XR Stages 1 to 3 of the relay R
p1, p2, p3 Parameter for setting the stages (p = 0.85 .. 0.9).
The parameters p can be entered in the global calculation parameters. If only 3

stages should be automatically set, the parameter p4 for the 4. stage should not
be entered. The same is valid for the overreach stage. The backward stage will
not be set.
The minimal impedance path can be displayed in the R/X-diagram with

menu option "View-Minimum impedance path". In the documentation of a
relay these impedance values are also shown (see "Relay Documentation" on
page 10-30).
Dependent on the activated menu option in "Tripping" the calculated setting

values are the threshold impedance values or the characteristics. The character-
istics can be polygons or circles. The type of characteristic can be entered in
"Tripping - Characteristic". The points of the polygon (rectangle with 1 point in the
origin 0;0) are calculated with the help of the line impedance. With ZR as calcu-
lated impedance, the polygon points in the R/X-diagram are calculated as follows:
P1 = 0.0, 0.0 (R, X)
P2 = 0.0, XR
P3 = RR, XR
P4 = RR, 0.0
The calculated impedance values are corrected with the arc resistance and the
resistance for tower footing path. These values can be entered in the relay
specific parameters.

Distance Protection
Correction for line-line faults:

RR = RR + RfL-L / 2
Correction for line-earth faults:

RR = RR + RfL-E + RM
with:
RfL-L Arc resistance for line - line faults
(see "Relay-Specific Parameters" on page 10-26)
RfL-E Arc resistance for line - earth faults
RM Tower resistance for tower footing earth path
The calculated setting values are rounded to the snap entered in the mask
for dimensions.

Distance Protection
Tripping Time
The user can enter the tripping time of each stage.
Input
The input values are:
Stage 1, 2, 3, 4: Tripping time of 1., 2., 3., 4. stage in seconds for line-
line faults and line-earth faults.
Measuring direction: Measuring direction of the stages 1 to 4 and of the
end times. The check boxes are for:
pos: positive measuring direction
neg: negative measuring direction
block: corresponding stage is blocked
If a stage is bi-directional then both checkboxes
("pos" and "neg") must be activated.
Backward stage: Tripping time of backward stage in seconds.
Directional end time: Directional end time of relay in seconds.
Bi-directional end time: Bi-directional end time of relay in seconds. Is only
valid, if no value for directional end time is entered.
Automatic Time Setting

After having selected this option the tripping times are calculated by the program.
The tripping values are taken from the default values given in the global calcula-
tion parameters. If a node in the tripping schedule is a distribution pole with at
least one out leading branch, which is protected by an overcurrent-time relay or
fuse, then the tripping time will be corrected. The tripping time of the overcurrent-
time relay (fuse) in the out leading branch can be entered in the node mask, input
field "t dp" (see "Node Data" in chapter "Element Data Input and Models"). The
fastest tripping time of the distance protection relay is set in order to have a
tolerance time between the tripping time of the overcurrent relay (fuse) and the
fastest tripping time of the distance protection relay. Nodes without distance
protection relay are also considered. The tolerance time can be entered in the
global calculation parameters.

Distance Protection
View
With this option the user can decide, if

the starter characteristic
the tripping characteristics
the tripping schedules in forward and/or backward direction or
the network impedances (impedance path)
have to be displayed in the relay window. Additionally the dimensions can also be
entered.
Starter
The overcurrent starting values, the under impedance starting values or the char-
acteristic is shown in the U/I-diagram respectively R/X-diagram.
Tripping
The tripping characteristics are displayed in the R/X-, Z/T- or X/T-diagram,
dependent on the input in the relay-specific parameters. The input of characteris-
tics can only be done in the R/X-diagram. The calculation of the impedance
values from the R/X- to Z/T- or X/T-diagram is done with the help of the complex
line impedance. The crossing points of the line impedance and the characteristics
(polygon or circle) are taken in the Z/T- or X/T-diagram. The distance of these
crossing points to the origin (0,0), represents the impedance, which is shown in
the Z/T-diagram:

Distance Protection
X/Ohm
Line
1. Stage
P2 P3
R/Ohm
Phi L P4
P1
t/s
1. Stage
Z/Ohm
Fig. 10.4 Calculation of the impedance values from the R/X- to the Z/T-diagram
If working with the X/T-diagram, only the reactance will be taken instead of the
impedance.
Tripping Schedule
After having selected this option a list of tripping schedules is displayed. These
are automatically generated by the program. It is advisable to build up the tripping
schedules with "Tripping Schedules - Build-up" and to look at these with "Tripping
Schedules - Edit". The distance of the nodes from the relay location, which should
be considered in the schedules, can be entered in the global parameters, input
fields "Fault distance positive direction" and "Fault distance negative direction".
A tripping schedule can be selected when double clicking a schedule or pressing

"Select" in the list. Clicking the push button "D.backward" the tripping schedules in
backward direction (negative impedances) are displayed. It is possible to display
one schedule in forward direction and one in negative direction. The schedules
must be selected one by one with this option. Pressing "Close" no schedule will
be displayed in the corresponding direction.
The time step characteristics are always displayed in the Z/T- or X/T-diagram.
Additionally to the time step characteristics of the relays in the tripping schedule,
the node impedances are displayed (vertical lines). The characteristics of the
current relay are in the same color as the node impedances, which are seen by
the relay. The vertical lines are dashed. The characteristics of the other relays are
drawn in other colors. If a relay see an already drawn node with a different imped-

Distance Protection
ance, the node (vertical line) will be drawn again with the same color as the relay
characteristics. This can happen in meshed networks or when there are one or
several feeders in that part of the network, which is represented by the schedule.
Network Impedances (Impedance Path)

This option is to display in the R/X-, Z/T- or X/T-diagram all impedances
(dependent on the fault distance!), which are seen by the relay, in case of a short
circuit in the nodes of the tripping schedules. The voltages and currents seen from
the relay are also displayed in the U/I-diagram. The user can select the following
options:
Selection impedance path. The user can select an arbitrary impedance path
(tripping schedule)
Display impedance path. If checked, the impedance path is displayed.
All impedances. All impedance paths are displayed.
Only relay nodes. If checked, only the impedances of the relay nodes are
displayed
Minimal impedance path. If check the minimal impedance path is shown (see
"Automatic Impedance Setting" on page 10-16)
It is also possible to select only one schedule in positive and/or one in negative
direction. In this case only the nodes of the selected schedule are displayed.
Dimensions
For the representation of the starter and tripping characteristics the following
values can be entered:
Xmin: Minimum value for the x-axis resp. horizontal direction. It could be for
a current value I/Ir or an impedance or reactance value in Ohm.
Xmax: Maximum value for the x-axis resp. horizontal direction. It could be for
a current value I/Ir or an impedance or reactance value in Ohm.
Ymin: Minimum value for y-axis resp. vertical direction. It could be for a
voltage value U/Ur, an impedance or reactance value in Ohm or a
time value in seconds.
Ymax: Maximum value for y-axis resp. vertical direction. It could be for a
voltage value U/Ur, an impedance or reactance value in Ohm or a
time value in seconds.
Scaling: Scaling of x- and y-axis.
Grid: Mouse grid for the input of characteristics in the R/X-diagram.

Distance Protection
The quantities to be displayed in the x- and y-axis could be entered in the mask
for relay-specific parameters.
For the representation of the tripping schedules the following values can be
entered:
Zmin: Minimum impedance value in Ohm for x-axis resp.

horizontal direction.
Zmax: Maximum impedance value in Ohm for x-axis resp.
horizontal direction.
Tmax: Maximum time value in seconds for y-axis resp. vertical
direction.
Z scaling: Scaling of x- respectively z-axis.
t scaling: Scaling of y- respectively t-axis.
Number of char.: The number of characters for relay, node and element
description can be entered. This input is important, when the
schedule is dense.
Number of pages: The tripping schedule can be displayed and plotted on
different pages. The number of pages can be entered here.
Scrolling forward and backward can be done with the menu
options "Tripping schedule scroll".

Distance Protection
Parameter (DP)
With this menu option the global and the relay-specific parameters can be
defined.
Global Parameter (DP)

The mask for global parameters can also be called with "Calculation - Distance
Protection - Parameter" in the main menu. The calculation parameters are:
Project descr: The project description is only displayed. It can not be
changed. See menu option "Project-Info" in chapter "Menu
Options".
Variant: Description of the variant.
Kind of fault: Type of fault at faulted nodes. Possible faults are:
* 3-phase SC: 3-phase short circuit.
* 1-phase GND: 1-phase to ground short circuit.
* 2-phase SC: 2-phase short circuit.
* 2-phase GND: 2-phase to ground short circuit.
This input influence the calculation of the impedances, the
relay documentation as well as the relay settings (line-line
or line-earth).
Calc.method: Following calculation methods are possible:
* Superpos. w.out LF:
The fault current Ik", the impedances and the voltages are
calculated according to superposition method without
prefault voltages from the Load flow. The EMF are 1.1*Un.
* Superpos. with LF:
The fault current Ik", the impedances and the voltages are
calculated according to superposition method with prefault
voltages from the Load flow. A Load flow calculation must
have been performed, before setting the DP-relays (Short
circuit calculation).
F. distance forw.: The fault distance is the distance of the nodes, which are
considered when generating the tripping schedules, from
the relay location in forward direction. The input is also
valid for the evaluation of the relay settings.
F. distance backw.: The fault distance is the distance of the nodes, which are
considered when generating the tripping schedules, from
the relay location in backward direction. The input is also
valid for the evaluation of the relay settings.

Distance Protection
Tolerance time: Tolerance time in seconds is the time between the tripping
time of a overcurrent-time relay or fuse (in an out leading
branch) and the fastest tripping time of the DP-relay. This
input is only for the automatic settings of the tripping times
(see "Automatic Time Setting" on page 10-19).
ZfL-L(R,X): Fault impedance (resistance and reactance) in Ohm for
line-line faults. These values are only for the evaluation,
not for automatic impedance setting.
ZfL-E(R,X): Fault impedance (resistance and reactance) in Ohm for
line-earth faults. These values are only for the
evaluation, not for automatic impedance setting.
Text file: Name of result text file (*.TXT-file). This file will be needed
to list the results of the evaluation (see "Checking the
Relay Settings" on page 10-33).
Result file: Name of ASCII-file (*.RDS-file). This file can be read by
external programs such as Excel for evaluation purposes.
The generation of this file can be prevented. The
description of the fields can be activated with checkbox
"Description". They are the same as in section "Checking
the relay settings".
Description: The fields in the result file are described.
Phases: Gives the phases (L1 or L123 or 120) of the results to be
listed in the text file. For symmetrical faults only the results
of phase L1 will be given.
Time / Impedance For the automatic relay setting the default values can be
values: entered here. Section Automatic impedance setting shows,
how the relay stages are set in dependence on the here
entered parameters (percentage values). If a stage should
not be set automatically, the corresponding values must
not be entered. It is not allowed to leave out one stage, that
means e.g. to enter the values for stage 1 and 3 without
entering the values for stage 2.
Tripping The impedance values in the tripping schedules can be
schedules: primary or secondary values. The input can be done here.
Header: The header in the listing can be activated or deactivated.

Distance Protection
Relay-Specific Parameters
The parameters are:
Relay type: Type of relay. The same input can be done in the mask of
section "Distance Relay Data" in chapter "Element Data Input
and Models".
Description: Relay description.
RfL-L Arc resistance in Ohm for line-line faults in order to make an
automatic setting of the impedance stages (see "Automatic
Impedance Setting" on page 10-16).
RfL-E Arc resistance in Ohm for line-earth faults in order to make an
automatic setting of the impedance stages (see Automatic
impedance setting).
Rm Tower resistance in Ohm for tower footing earth path in order
to make an automatic setting of the impedance stages (see
"Automatic Impedance Setting" on page 10-16).
Impedance The impedance values can be entered or displayed as
values: primary or secondary values. The network impedances are
also displayed according to this input.
Tripping Dependent on this input, the relay settings and the network
characteristic: impedances are displayed in the following diagrams:
R/X: x-axis: resistance R in Ohm
y-axis: reactance X in Ohm
Z/T: x-axis: impedance Z in Ohm
y-axis: tripping time in seconds
X/T: x-axis: reactance X in Ohm
y-axis: tripping time in seconds
The input for Z/T and X/T is also valid for the representation
of the tripping schedules.

Distance Protection
Tripping Schedules
Build-up
This function generates automatically the tripping schedules for the selecting relay
in dependence on the fault distance in positive and negative direction. The fault
distances are entered in the mask for global parameters. The tripping schedules
of all relays, which are in the schedule of the selected relay, are also built.
When opening the relay window (clicking "Characteristics" in the DP-relay mask),
the program asks, whether the tripping schedules should be rebuilt or not, if the
schedules have been built already. The schedules must be rebuilt, when the
network data or the topology has been changed.
Edit
The tripping schedules of the selected relay can be edit. After having selected this
option the generated schedules are listed. All nodes are listed, which are
connected with the ending node of the protected line. The relay location is not
displayed, because it will always be the first node in the schedules. The available
options are:
D.backward, D.forward
Pressing this option the schedules in forward or backward direction are displayed.
Edit
With this option the selected tripping schedule can be edit. All nodes of this
schedule (incl. relay location and ending node of the protected line) are listed.
With the functions Delete the marked node can be deleted from the schedule. The
first two nodes can not be deleted.
With function Append a new node can be appended in the schedule. The program
lists all possible nodes, which can be appended. These are nodes, which are
connected through an element with the last node in the schedule. The element is
also displayed. In general only the nodes, which are in the predefined fault
distance in positive and negative direction from the relay location are listed
respectively can be appended. A node (in the predefined distance from the relay)
will no more be listed, if this node has been deleted from all schedules. Therefore
it is advisable to build-up first the desired schedule and afterwards to delete nodes
or whole schedules.

Distance Protection
Append
This option appends a new schedule. With "Edit" the desired schedule can be
built-up (see above).
Delete
A tripping schedule can be deleted with this option.
Scrolling forward/backward
This option scrolls the pages of the tripping schedule, if the schedule is displayed
in different pages (see number of pages in section "Dimensions" on page 10-22).

Distance Protection
Procedure for Entering a Relay
For the input and setting of a relay the following procedure has to be done:
Step: Insert all distance protection relay in the network. This can be done
graphic- or list-oriented. Each relay has an identifier.
Step: Insert to each DP-relay current (CTs) and voltage transformers (VTs).
The VTs are also assigned to an element and not to a node. If several
elements leads to a node, it is sufficient, to insert one VT to one of these
elements.
Step: Select a relay (mask and afterwards relay window) and look at the
parameters. In the global parameters the input values "fault type" and "fault
distances" are important. In the relay-specific parameters the user can
choose, whether he likes to work with primary or secondary impedance
values.
Step: Let the program generate the tripping schedules. Check the tripping
schedules and if necessary change or delete them. It is important that the
relay location will not appear twice in a schedule. This can happen in
meshed networks. With the delete function the relay location and/or
undesired nodes can be eliminated.
Step: With correct tripping schedules, the starter and tripping characteristics
can be entered. Especially for the automatic relay setting, a correct tripping
schedule is important.
When generating the tripping schedule, all nodes, which are reducable, are
not considered (see "Node Data" in chapter "Element Data Input and Models").
Remark:
A DP-relay, which is located in a node (sleeve) between a disconnect/load switch
and a line, will be relocated to the correct bus bar by the program, if the sleeve
respectively the switch will be reduced.
A B
H1
DP
DP

Distance Protection
Relay Documentation
With the menu option "Relay - Documentation - Present relay" the documentation
of the present relay can be done. To get zero sequence impedances set the fault
type to asymmetrical fault in the global parameters. The documentation consists
of three pages.
Relay settings
**************
Relay name : DSR-41
Description :
Relay type : ABB-REL316
Relay location : ONODE 1
Branch : L-002
Line length /km : 5.0
Network impedances(primary):
----------------------------
1.stage 2.stage 3.stage 4.stage
X(1)tot /Ohm : 1.088 2.169 (see below)
R(1)tot /Ohm : 3.202 7.383
Z(1)tot /Ohm : 3.382 7.695
Phi(1) /G : 18.763 16.370
----------------- Zero impedances ------------

X(0)tot /Ohm : 5.748 20.702
R(0)tot /Ohm : 7.064 24.143
Z(0)tot /Ohm : 9.107 31.804
Phi(0) /G : 39.137 40.612
----------------- Earth factors -------------

k0 : 0.597 1.082 (see below)
phi(k0) : 31.590 31.506
RE/RL : 0.402 0.757 (see below)
XE/XL : 1.428 2.849
Parameters: (Input values)

-----------
Voltage transfor.: Ur1 /V: 20000
Ur2 /V: 100
Current transfor.: Ir1 /A: 20000
Ir2 /A: 100
Ratio : Ki/Ku : 0.25
Arc resistance Ph-Ph RfLL /Ohm :

Arc resistance Ph-E RfLE /Ohm :
Tower earthing resistance RM /Ohm :
Distributed reactance X'(sec)/Ohm/km : 0.272

(distributed line reactance)

Distance Protection
Relay location
Z / Ohm
1. 2. 3. Stage
Impedance Impedance Impedance

stage 1 stage 2 stage 3
The impedance values of stage 1 represent the line impedance or the impedance
to the next relay node. The impedance values are given for the positive and zero
system. To get the values of the zero the fault type in the global parameters
must be set to an asymmetrical fault.
In order to get the line impedance between stage 1 and 2 a subtraction of the
impedance values of stage 2 and 1 must be done. The following values for each
stage are also given:
k0 = (Z(0) - Z(1)) / (3*Z(1))
RE/RL = 1/3*(R(0)/R(1) - 1)
XE/XL = 1/3*(X(0)/X(1) - 1)
The second page shows the set values for a general relay, that means independ-
ent of its type.
Set values (relay independent):

-------------------------------
primary secondary Time(L-L, L-E)
1.stage
X1 /Ohm : 0.925 0.231 0.100 0.100
R1 /Ohm : 2.722 0.680
R1+RfLL/2 /Ohm : 2.722 0.680
R1+RfLE+RM /Ohm : 2.722 0.680
X0 /Ohm : 4.886 1.222
R0 /Ohm : 6.004 1.501
2.stage
X1 /Ohm : 2.098 0.525 0.600 0.600
R1 /Ohm : 6.195 1.549
R1+RfLL/2 /Ohm : 6.195 1.549
R1+RfLE+RM /Ohm : 6.195 1.549
X0 /Ohm : 4.886 1.222
R0 /Ohm : 6.004 1.501
Overreach stage
X1 /Ohm : 1.305 0.326
R1 /Ohm : 3.842 0.961
R1+RfLL/2 /Ohm : 3.842 0.961
R1+RfLE+RM /Ohm : 3.842 0.961

Distance Protection
X0 /Ohm : 6.898 1.724

R0 /Ohm : 8.477 2.119
Direct. final stage /s : 4

Non-dir. final stage /s :
Starter (type of starter)

-------
Overcurrent starter : IL(*Ir1) : 2

IS(*Ir1) :
The third page will only be displayed when working with the predefined relay
types. The values for the setting parameters are shown, e.g. ABB REL316.
Set values (primary):

---------------------
1.stage 2.stage 3.stage Ov.stage Bw.stage

X /Ohm : 0.925 2.098 1.305
R /Ohm : 2.722 6.195 3.842
RR /Ohm : 2.722 6.195 3.842
RRE /Ohm : 2.722 6.195 3.842
k0 : 0.597 1.017
k0Ang : 31.590 33.065
Time /s : 0.100 0.600
Starter
-------
XA /Ohm : 9
XB /Ohm : -8
RA /Ohm : 8
RB /Ohm : -6
Rload /Ohm : 5
AngleLoad /G : 45.0
Remarks:
--------
............................................................
............................................................
............................................................
............................................................

Distance Protection
Checking the Relay Settings
After having set all relays, the settings can be checked. Several variants (different
fault locations, faults on lines, arbitrary fault types) can be calculated now and the
program calculates the tripping times of the relays. The evaluation can be done
according to:
fault location
relay location.
The above described options can be selected from "Calculation - Distance

Protection" in the main menu.
Fault Locations
The input of fault locations is described in chapter "Short Circuit".
Line Faults
See chapter "Short Circuit".
Evaluation According to Fault Locations

After having selected this option short circuits are calculated in all faulted nodes.
All relay in the predefined fault distances from the faulted node are checked. The
results are listed in a text file, which name has to be entered in the mask for global
parameters. The list is node-oriented and is shown below:

Distance Protection
+-----------------------------------------------------------------------+
| |
| Fault location: AU_BB12 |
| |
|-----------------------------------------------------------------------|
|DP-Relay (prim.)|Di| I/kA | AI/D | U/kV | AU/D | Z/Ohm | AZ/D | t/s |
| | |L1,2,3 | |L1,2,3 | | 120 | 120 | |
|-----------------------------------------------------------------------|
|DSR-5 | 1| 0.247| 75.3| 4.205| 110.6| 5.08| 18.7|0.600|
| | | 0.022| -69.6| 37.680| 198.9| 5.08| 18.7| |
| | | 0.026| 233.4| 43.799| 143.1| 19.93| 43.7| |
| | |- 120 -|------|- 120 -|------| X/Ohm | R/Ohm|-----|
| | | 0.096| 76.6| 22.433| -3.1| 1.62| 4.81| |
| | | 0.083| 74.6| 0.874| -78.9| 1.62| 4.81| |
| | | 0.068| 74.4| 24.792| 165.9| 13.78| 14.40| |
|-----------------------------------------------------------------------|
|DSR-41 | 2| 0.158| 77.6| 5.647| 109.8| 11.07| 17.1|1.200|
| | | 0.045| -71.3| 37.783| 198.4| 11.07| 17.1| |
| | | 0.051| 237.0| 44.241| 143.1| 40.91| 40.3| |
| | |- 120 -|------|- 120 -|------| X/Ohm | R/Ohm|-----|
| | | 0.079| 80.2| 22.348| -2.0| 3.26| 10.58| |
| | | 0.055| 75.7| 0.554| -75.2| 3.26| 10.58| |
| | | 0.024| 73.6| 25.281| 164.8| 26.45| 31.21| |
|-----------------------------------------------------------------------|
|DSR-42 | 2| 0.086| 74.1| 5.647| 109.8| 21.69| 21.7|3.000|
| | | 0.024| -69.5| 37.783| 198.4| 21.69| 21.7| |
| | | 0.029| 226.3| 44.241| 143.1| 71.96| 44.1| |
| | |- 120 -|------|- 120 -|------| X/Ohm | R/Ohm|-----|
| | | 0.044| 76.7| 22.348| -2.0| 8.01| 20.16| |
| | | 0.028| 70.7| 0.554| -75.2| 8.01| 20.16| |
| | | 0.014| 73.3| 25.281| 164.8| 50.06| 51.70| |
|-----------------------------------------------------------------------|
Fig. 10.5 Evaluation according to fault location

Distance Protection
Fault location: Name of fault location

DP-Relay: Name of relay, whose results are listed.
Di: Distance of the relay location from the fault location.
I: Current (phase and symmetrical component values) in kA,
which flows through the relay when short circuit occurs in the
fault location.
AI: Angle of current in degree, which flows through the relay when
short circuit occurs in the fault location.
U: Voltage (phase and symmetrical component values) in kV at
relay location when short circuit occurs in the fault location.
AU: Angle of voltage in degree at relay location when short circuit
occurs in the fault location.
Z: Impedance (symmetrical component value) in Ohm, which is
seen from the relay when short circuit occurs in the fault
location.
AZ: Angle of impedance in degree, which is seen from the relay
when short circuit occurs in the fault location.
R: Resistance (symmetrical component value) in Ohm, which is
location.
X: Reactance (symmetrical component value) in Ohm, which is
location.
t Tripping time of the relay.
All values are given as primary values.

Distance Protection
Evaluation According to Relay Location

The same is to say as in the previous section. The list is relay-oriented and is
shown above:
+-----------------------------------------------------------------------+
| |
| Relay : DSR-41 |
| Relay location : ONODE 1 |
| To node : ONODE 2 |
| Branch : L-002 |
| |
|-----------------------------------------------------------------------|
|Fault location |Di| I/kA | AI/D | U/kV | AU/D | Z/Ohm | AZ/D | t/s |
| | |L1,2,3 | |L1,2,3 | | 120 | 120 | |
|-----------------------------------------------------------------------|
|ONODE 1 | 0| 0.230| 86.3| 0.000| 0.0| 0.00| 0.0|0.100|
| | | 0.040| -61.1| 38.391| 207.1| 0.00| 0.0| |
| | | 0.042| 236.9| 39.723| 148.1| 0.00| 0.0| |
| | |- 120 -|------|- 120 -|------| X/Ohm | R/Ohm|-----|
| | | 0.100| 86.9| 22.428| -1.8| 0.00| 0.00| |
| | | 0.076| 85.7| 0.506| -63.7| 0.00| 0.00| |
| | | 0.053| 86.0| 22.671| 177.0| 0.00| 0.00| |
|-----------------------------------------------------------------------|
|ONODE 2 | 1| 0.149| 85.4| 1.344| 115.9| 3.38| 18.8|0.100|
| | | 0.045| -64.9| 38.320| 205.0| 3.38| 18.8| |
| | | 0.047| 241.0| 40.852| 147.0| 9.11| 39.1| |
| | |- 120 -|------|- 120 -|------| X/Ohm | R/Ohm|-----|
| | | 0.076| 86.6| 22.412| -1.9| 1.09| 3.20| |
| | | 0.051| 84.7| 0.515| -66.2| 1.09| 3.20| |
| | | 0.022| 82.9| 23.319| 174.1| 5.75| 7.06| |
|-----------------------------------------------------------------------|
|AU_BB12 | 2| 0.158| 77.6| 5.647| 109.8| 11.07| 17.1|1.200|
| | | 0.045| -71.3| 37.783| 198.4| 11.07| 17.1| |
| | | 0.051| 237.0| 44.241| 143.1| 40.91| 40.3| |
| | |- 120 -|------|- 120 -|------| X/Ohm | R/Ohm|-----|
| | | 0.079| 80.2| 22.348| -2.0| 3.26| 10.58| |
| | | 0.055| 75.7| 0.554| -75.2| 3.26| 10.58| |
| | | 0.024| 73.6| 25.281| 164.8| 26.45| 31.21| |
|-----------------------------------------------------------------------|
Fig. 10.6 Evaluation according to relay location

Distance Protection
Relay: Name of relay, whose results are listed.

Fault location: Name of fault location
Di: Distance of the relay location from the fault location.
I: Current (phase and symmetrical component values) in kA,
which flows through the relay when short circuit occurs in the
fault location.
AI: Angle of current in degree, which flows through the relay when
short circuit occurs in the fault location.
U: Voltage (phase and symmetrical component values) in kV at
relay location when short circuit occurs in the fault location.
AU: Angle of voltage in degree at relay location when short circuit
occurs in the fault location.
Z: Impedance (phase and symmetrical component values) in Ohm,
which is seen from the relay when short circuit occurs in the
fault location.
AZ: Angle of impedance in degree, which is seen from the relay
when short circuit occurs in the fault location.
R: Resistance (phase and symmetrical component values) in Ohm,
fault location.
X: Reactance (phase and symmetrical component values) in Ohm,
fault location.
T Tripping time of the relay.
All values are given as primary values.
Additionally the relay location, the protected element and its ending node are
listed. The branch impedance in Ohm is also given. The factor k0 (amount, angle)
gives the complex ratio between the branch impedances of the zero sequence
and the positive sequence system.

Distance Protection

Harmonic Analysis
Harmonic Analysis
Calculation Parameters (HA)
The calculation parameters are entered with the help of a "Parameters" dialog. It
consists of the three tabs Frequency Scanning, Harmonic Level Calculation and
Options, which are explained here.
Frequency scanning
Frequency scanning
Frequency Indicates, if Frequency scanning will be done when selecting the
scanning calculation.
Frequency Starting frequency for the calculation in Hz.
start
Frequency Ending frequency for the calculation in Hz.
end
Frequency Frequency step for the calculation in Hz
step (see "Theory of Harmonic and Audio Frequency Analysis" on
page 11-3).
Variable step If active, the frequency step will be adjusted automatically
length control during impedance calculation if large impedance changes
occur. If not active, the impedances are calculated with given
and constant step.
Scanning Frequency scanning can be done according to
according to Z: Scanning a node impedance
I: Scanning a current of one harmonic current source (only
one must be present and active in the network)
U: Scanning a voltage of one harmonic voltage source (only
one must be present and active in the network).
Harmonic Load flow
Harmonic Indicates, if a Harmonic Load flow will be done when selecting
load flow the calculation.
calculation
Harmonic for The harmonic for which the load flow must be calculated.
Harmonic
load flow

Harmonic Analysis
Harmonic Level Calculation

Harmonic Indicates, if Harmonic level calculation will be done when
Level selecting the calculation.
calculation
Harmonic limit All harmonics in the harmonic current and voltage sources are
considered up to the given limit.
S for THDi Apparent power in MVA for calculating the nominal current of
calculation the elements. The nominal current of the elements are used for
calculation the distortion factor THDi.
Sum of harmonic values
Vectorial If there are several harmonic sources in the network the sum of
harmonics will be calculated vectorial (see below).
Geometric If there are several harmonic sources in the network the sum of
harmonics will be calculated geometrically (see below).
IEC 1000-2-6 If there are several harmonic sources in the network the sum of
harmonics will be calculated according to IEC 1000-2-6 (see
below).
Arithmetic If there are several harmonic sources in the network the sum of
harmonics will be calculated arithmetically (see below).
Options
Reduction of switches circuit breakers and couplers
Reduce If this option is checked, all switches, circuit breakers and
busbar couplers are reduced.
Result file
File File name, which can be selected.
Write after If checked, the result file will be created after the calculation.
calculation
Format 4.x If checked, the result file will be created as in program version
4.x.
Select To select the nodes and elements, whose variable should be
stored and displayed.

Harmonic Analysis
Theory of Harmonic and Audio Frequency Analysis
The operating behavior of the networks at frequencies above 50/60 Hz has to be

simulated in order to examine the harmonics as well as the level of AF ripple
control signals in power networks. The following models are required:
Network elements (lines, filters, loads, synchronous machines..)
Harmonic sources (converter, AF ripple control transmitters...)
Network elements
The network elements are represented by their equivalent circuit elements: resis-
tance (R), inductance (L) and capacitance (C). A balanced three-phase system is
assumed, so that a single-phase representation of the network in the positive
sequence system will be examined.
In general the resistances and inductances of the network elements are

frequency-dependent (see Frequency dependence in chapter Element Data
Input and Models), for example by current displacement (skin effect). In general
the resistances are increasing with higher frequencies and the inductances are
decreasing. The capacitances are practically frequency-independent. The
frequency-dependency of the elements can be entered in three different manners.
For all frequencies the resistance and the inductance of the equivalent circuit
have to be recalculated.
Sources
There is a difference between current and voltage sources. Current sources inject
the source current into the network. Voltage sources engrave a source voltage on
the network node. The sources are need to reproduce the
equipment with non-linear current-voltage-characteristic
AF ripple control transmitters.
Sources with non-linear current/voltage characteristics are for example converter

and arc furnaces. As a rule these equipments are represented by a current source
for harmonics. The harmonic currents with their frequencies, amplitudes and
phase angles depend on the construction and operation of these equipments.
In case of an arc furnace these are statistic values depending on the particular
furnace.
In ideal case the harmonic currents of converters can be calculated as following:
1
Ik = I
k 1

Harmonic Analysis
with: k = n p 1; n = 1,2,3,....
It means:
Ik: k-th harmonic current
I1: first harmonic current
p: pulse number of converter
For details there are more information in the literature.
AF ripple control transmitters inject a voltage or current with a well-known

frequency in the network. There are two possibilities in coupling the parallel
injection and the series injection.
Calculation Algorithm
For a harmonic calculation the following steps for each interesting frequency will
be made:
Determination of the equivalent-circuit elements R (f), L(f) (frequency
dependent) and C.
Creating of the admittance matrix for the network
Solution of the linear equation system I(f)=Y(f) U(f)
It means:
I(f): vector of node currents at frequency f
Y(f): Y-matrix at frequency f
U(f): vector of node voltages at frequency f
For harmonic or AF ripple control calculation the harmonic generators or the AF

ripple control transmitters are represented by their equivalent circuits (current or
voltages sources).
For impedance calculation the program will take a fictious current source (1.0 pu)
for the interesting node. A constant amplitude, a constant phase angle and a
frequency range will be related to the source. For all frequencies in this range the
program calculates the voltage at the interesting nodes. With the ratio of voltage
and current for all frequencies the program calculates the impedances (amount
and angle). The impedance calculation is made with the following frequencies,
which will be calculated with the calculation parameters.
f k = fanf + k fdelta fend
It means:

Harmonic Analysis
fk: k-th harmonic, k = 0, 1, 2, ...
If the corresponding check box in the calculation parameter mask is checked, the
program will examine the amount and the angle of the impedance for large differ-
ences between two successive frequency steps. If large differences occur the
frequency step will be automatically adjusted according to following formulas:
Zalt
K1 = 5 log
Zneu
K 2 = 0.05 alt neu
If it is valid
K1 > 2, that means Zold / Znew > 2,5 or Zold / Znew < 0,4
or
K2 > 2, that means alt neu > 40 ,
the automatic frequency adjustment occurs. K will be set to the larger value of K1
and K2:
K = Maximum (K1, K2).
With this value the new frequency step will be calculated
fdelta
fdelta =
K
As soon as the condition
K>2
is no more fulfilled, the frequency step will be calculated according to the users
input with fstep.
It means:
Zold: impedance value (amount) at old frequency
Znew: impedance value (amount) at new frequency
Phiold: angle of impedance at old frequency
Phinew: angle of impedance at new frequency.

Harmonic Analysis
Addition of harmonics from different sources

In reality harmonics add always vectorial to each other. So, the sum of two
harmonic sources (voltage or current) with equal amplitude can vary considerably:
between 0% and 200%. The problem is that in practice the harmonic angles in the
sources are unknown. Therefore there are four different ways to make the
addition of harmonics, which come from different sources:
- vectorial
- geometrically
- according to IEC 1000-2-6
- arithmetically
For each harmonic source and each harmonic the network equation
I ( f ) = Y ( f ) U ( f ) will be solved. The angle given in the harmonic sources are not
considered for all calculations, except for vectorial sum calculation. After having
calculated all voltages for each source and harmonic the sum can be built:
Vectorial
The sum is built up vectorial: U h = U h1 + U h 2 + U h3 + ...
Geometrically
The sum is built up geometrically: U h = U h1 2 + U h 2 2 + U h 3 2 + ...
IEC 1000-2-6
The sum is built up according to IEC-1000-2-6: U h = k1 U h1 + k 2 U h 2 + k 3 U h3 + ...
Arithmetically
The sum is built up arithmetically: U h = U h1 + U h 2 + U h 3 + ...

Uh: Node voltage for harmonic h
Uh1: Node voltage for harmonic h caused by harmonic source 1
k1: Diversity factor for harmonic h and harmonic source 1

Harmonic Analysis
The size of ki is dependent on the harmonic order h and the ratio between the
node voltage Uhi caused by the single harmonic source i and the arithmetically
calculated node voltage Uh. For further information please refer to IEC 1000-2-6.
The vectorial sum is mathematically the correct one, but because of unknown
angles of the harmonics maybe in practice very incorrect. The geometrical sum
gives the smallest value, the arithmetical sum the highest value.
If the node voltage for the h-th harmonic is known the harmonic currents for all
branches can be calculated.
Characteristics
The following characteristics are important for harmonic analysis:
percentage harmonic voltage uk of the h-th harmonic
Uh
uh =
Un
3
It means:
Uk: r.m.s.-value of the k-th harmonic voltage (phase-to-earth)
Un: nominal system voltage
r.m.s-value of power frequency voltage (geometrical sum):
U = U 1 + U 2 + U 3 + ...
2 2 2
r.m.s-value of power frequency current (geometrical sum):
I = I1 + I 2 + I 3 + ...
2 2 2
r.m.s-value of harmonic voltage (geometrical sum):
U = U 2 + U 3 + U 4 + ...
2 2 2
r.m.s-value of harmonic current (geometrical sum):
I = I 2 + I 3 + I 4 + ...
2 2 2
Voltage Distortion Factor in %:

Harmonic Analysis
U 2 + U 3 + ....
2 2
THD = 100% with U1 = Un

U1
Current Distortion Factor in %:
I 2 + I 3 + .... Un Un
2 2
THDi = 100% with I 1 =

I1 STHDi
TIF:
(I Wh )
2
Un Un
TIF = with I 1 = and Wh=5Phhfn
h
I1 STHDi
IT:
(I Wh )
2
IT = h
It means:
U1: amount of voltage of first (fundamental) harmonic
U2: amount of voltage of second harmonic
U3: amount of voltage of third harmonic
I1: amount of current of first (fundamental) harmonic
I2: amount of current of second harmonic
I3: amount of current of third harmonic
STHDi: input value (see calculation parameters)
Wh: single frequency TIF weighting factor at frequency f = hfn according to
IEEE 519
fn: nominal system frequency
h: harmonic
Ph: C message weigthing factor at frequency f = hfn according to IEEE 519
Filter characteristics
Three types of filters can be defined (see description of filter dialog):
- normal filter
- HP-filter
- C-filter.
The following values are calculated for filters:
IL(FH) fundamental harmonic (nominal system frequency fn) current value

Harmonic Analysis
of the inductance L
+IL(RMS): rms current value of the inductance L.
+IL(ari): total current value (calculated arithmetically) of the inductance L.
IC(FH): fundamental harmonic (nominal system frequency fn) current value
of the main capacitance C
+IC(RMS): rms current value of the main capacitance C.
+IC(ari): total current value (calculated arithmetically) of the main
capacitance C.
Ird(FH): fundamental harmonic (nominal system frequency fn) current value
of the damping resistance Rd.
Ird(RMS): rms current value of the damping resistance Rd.
PRd(FH): fundamental harmonic (nominal system frequency fn) resistive
losses in kW in the damping resistance Rd.
PRd(tot): total resistive losses in kW in the damping resistance Rd caused by
Ird(RMS), PRd(tot) = 3RdIrd(RMS)2
PL(tot): total resistive losses in kW in the reactor caused by caused by
IL(RMS), PL = 3RvIL(RMS)2
UCsu: Arithemic sum of fundamental harmonic voltage and r.m.s-value of
harmonic voltage at auxiliary capacitance Cs (only for C-filters).
UCsu = UCs1 + UCs
2
h for h = 2, 3,
UCsi: Minimum rated capacitance voltage at which ICs can be transmitted
(IEC 871). ICs is 1.3 times the current at nominal system frequency
fn, which is calculated if UCsi is applied at the auxiliary capacitance
Cs (only for C-filters).
ICs
UCsi =
1.3 2 f n Cs
UCsq: Voltage at nominal system frequency fn, which causes the same
reactive power at the auxiliary capacitance Cs, as the arithmetic
sum of all reactive powers caused by the nominal system frequency
and the harmonic frequencies (only for C-filters).
UCsq = h f UCs h
2
0 for h=1, 2, 3,
UCu: Arithemic sum of fundamental harmonic voltage and r.m.s-value of
harmonic voltage at main capacitance C.
UCu = UC1 + UC
2
h for h = 2, 3,
UCi: Minimum rated capacitance voltage at which IC can be transmitted
(IEC 871). IC is 1.3 times the current at nominal system frequency
fn, which is calculated if Uci is applied at the main capacitance C.

Harmonic Analysis
IC
UCi =
1 .3 2 f n C
UCq: Voltage at nominal system frequency fn, which causes the same
reactive power at the main capacitance C, as the arithmetic sum of
all reactive powers caused by the nominal system frequency and
the harmonic frequencies.
UCq = h f UC h
2
0 for h=1, 2, 3,

Harmonic Analysis
Results (HA)
Select Results
here.
The values displayed at the diagram can be selected in the Harmonic Analysis tab
of the Edit Diagram Properties dialog.
Results Table
The results can be represented in different tables, each with its specifique
information.
Node impedances The node impedances are shown for the pre-selected nodes.
This is a result getting from a frequency scanning Z-
impedance.
Node results The results of the nodes will be displayed. This is a result of
either a frequency scanning U/I or a level calculation or or a
harmonic load flow.
Element results General results of elements will be displayed. This is a result
of either a frequency scanning U/I or a level calculation or a
harmonic load flow.
Filter results All results of the filters will be displayed. This is a result of a
level calculation.
Result files Its possible to export results to a *.ros file by selecting the file
and pressing the respective button.
Format for V5.x.
Node impedances:
f Frequency in Hz.

Harmonic Analysis
Z Impedance in Ohm.
Z ang Angle of impedance in .
Node results:
Name Node name.
THD Distortion factor in %.
f Frequency in Hz.
U Node voltage in V (line-line value)
U ang Voltage angle in .
Partial Number of the partial network, the node belongs to.
network
Element results:
From Name of starting node of element (From node)
To Name of ending node of element (To node)
THDi Current distortion factor in %.
TIF TIF factor.
IT IT factor.
F Frequency in Hz.
I1, I2, I3 Current at From node, To node, Tertiary node in A.
I1ang, I2ang, Current angle at From node, To node, Tertiary node in .
I3ang
U12, U31, U23 Voltage (line-line values) between From node and To
node and Tertiary node in V.
U12ang, U31ang, Angle of voltages between From node and To node and
U23ang Tertiary node in .

Harmonic Analysis

Filter results:
Please see section Filter characteristics.
Graphical Results
To open the graphical result window choose "Analysis Harmonic Analysis -
Graphical Results...".
Subchart settings:
Chart name Name of chart.
Add, Edit Delete Push buttons to add, edit and delete curves in the diagram.
curve
Harmonic Analysis Results
Curve name Name of curve
Variant Name of Variant or Rootnet.
Variable name The variable name can be selected. Three options are
available:
- Nodes variable
- Elements variable
- Level limit curve.
Element name, ID Name of element, whose results are displayed.
Variable Variable to be displayed.
File path File name and path for limit curve.
Limit curve Limit curve to be displayed. In the file several curves can
be stored. To display all curves in the file, please add new
curve.
Axis properties

Harmonic Analysis
not checked.
Min Sets the axis minimum value. Only enabled if the
corresponding check box Automatic is not checked.
Max Sets the axis maximum value. Only enabled if the
Legend
Height Height of legend in % of sub chart size
The format of the current limit file is given in the appendix.

Motor Starting
Motor Starting
Calculation Parameters (MS)
The calculation parameters are entered with the help of a "Parameters" dialog,
which is explained here.
Time simulation
End time End time for the simulation in s.
Time interval Time interval for the simulation in s.
Reduction Factor for reducing the time interval. During the simulation, the
factor for time time interval will be reduced by this factor, when the motor slip s
interval will be less than 0.2. After reaching the steady state point the
time interval will be reset to entered value.
Transformer Time delay for regulating transformers in s. After the given time
regulation the automatic regulation of the transformers will be activated.
considered This value is only important, if the parameter "Automatic
after time transformer regulation is checked in the load flow parameters.
Result storage
Points to be The user can enter the number of points to be saved for the
saved per marked elements during the simulation. In this way the
variable graphical output will be influenced (layout and speed).
Result display
Result display Output units. For low voltage in "V, A, kVA" or high voltage in
"kV, kA, MVA".
Only the results of the pre-selected nodes and elements are stored and can be
displayed. The selection can be done with the menu option Analysis Motor
Starting Select results or the push button Select results. The motor starting is
dependent on the parameters set in the load flow. To change load flow
parameters press push button LF-parameters.

Motor Starting
Theory of Motor Starting Calculation
The motor starting simulation is a sequence of load flow calculations. In every

calculation resp. time step (load flow) the impedance of the asynchronous
machine will be changed in function of the increasing speed and resistance (eddy-
current losses) as well as the leakage reactance (decreasing of the saturation).
The theory of the load flow calculation is explained section "Theory of Load Flow
Calculation" in chapter "Load Flow".
The equivalent circuit of an asynchronous machine is given below:
R1 X1 X2(s)
Xh R2(s)/s
Fig. 12.1 Asynchronous machine equivalent circuit
For more information about this model see Asynchronous Machine Model of
the chapter Element Data Input and Models.
To consider the voltage drop at the terminal of an infeed element (generator,

feeder, power system unit) the following model will be used:
Netw. node Xd Dummy node
Fig. 12.2 Equivalent circuit of an infeed element
For every infeed element a dummy node will be created. Between the real
network node and the dummy node the reactance Xd = 1.5 * Xd" (Xd":

Motor Starting
subtransient reactance) will be inserted. The reactance Xd" can be calculated

from the input values. The dummy nodes are named by the program. Their names
start with the character "@". The type of the network node (SL, PQ or PV) will be
automatically assigned to the dummy node and the network node will become a
normal PQ-node. The voltage of the network node is free adjustable and will be
calculated by the program.
The start-up of a motor will be described by the motion equation:
Me - Ml = - 2 Pi J n0 / p ds/dt
with
Me: Electromagnetic torque
Ml: load torque
J: moment of inertia
n0: synchronous speed
p: numbers of pole pairs
s: Slip
The electromagnetic torque is described by the equation:
Me = p / (2 Pi n0) R2 I22 / s
with
I 2: rotor current in circuit (R2, X2)
The load torque is described by the equation:
Ml = M0 + (1 - s) M1 + (1 - s) 2 M2 (parabola)
or
Ml = Ml(s) (characteristic)
with
M0, M1, M2: input values (see "Theory of Motor Starting Calculation" on page
12-2)
Ml(s): starting load characteristic, input values as well (see "Theory of
Motor Starting Calculation" on page 12-2)
If a motor will not be started-up, the steady state point will be

calculated with the help of the operating load and the electromagnetic torque
("LF-Type" must be set to "Mload")

Motor Starting
set as constant power load P and Q

("LF-Type" must be set to "PQoper").
The calculation of the steady state point with the help of the load characteristic
consists also of a sequence of load flow calculations. The steady state point that
means the crossing of the torque curves will be calculated with the Newton-
Raphson algorithm.
Voltage Drop
Selecting the corresponding menu option the voltage drop at time t=0.0 due to
starting motors is calculated. The calculation will be done as explained in section
"Theory of Motor Starting Calculation" on page 12-2. The difference is, that less
data have to be entered for the motors. For example the moment of inertia J, all
time data, load characteristics can be dropped.

Motor Starting
Results (MS)
Select Results
here.
Results tables
The results are represented in a table.

Name Name of node or element.
t Simulation time in s.
U Node voltage in kV at time t.
I Current in kA of the element at time t.
P Active power in MW of the element at time t.
Q Reactive power in Mvar of the element at time t.
Me Electrical machine torque in Nm at time t.
Ml Load torque in Nm at time t.
s Machine slip at time t.
n/nr Ratio between rotor speed at time t and nominal speed.
Graphical Results
To open the graphical result window choose "Analysis Motor Starting -
Subchart settings:
Chart name Name of chart.
Add, Edit Delete Push buttons to add, edit and delete curves in the diagram.
curve

Motor Starting
Motor Starting Results

Curve name Name of curve
Variant Name of Variant or Rootnet.
X-Axis variable
Time If checked, the x-axis is always the time axis. If not
checked, all selection as for Y-axis are possible.
Y-Axis variable
Element type Type of Element. Three options are available:
- Asynchronous machine
- Element
- Node
Element name, ID Name of element, whose results are displayed. Only the
pre-selected nodes or elements are displayed.
Variable Variable to be displayed.
Axis properties
not checked.
Legend
Height Height of legend in % of sub chart size

Network Reduction
Network Reduction
Introduction
This program module allows to reduce any network to any number of boundary
nodes, thus the behavior of the reduced network will be the same as the original
one. This is for short circuit and load flow calculation. The reduced network will be
represented with the help of series (see "Series Equivalents Data" in chapter
"Element Data Input and Models") and shunt (see "Shunt Equivalents Data" in
chapter "Element Data Input and Models") equivalents as well as equivalent
infeeds. Depending on the type of network reduction there are equivalents for
short circuit and for load flow. The same equivalent can't be valid for load flow
and short circuit.
Selection of the Network to be Reduced
The selection of the network to be reduced, respectively the nodes is independent

of the type of network reduction (load flow or short circuit). The node to be
reduced can be selected after having chosen the menu option "Analysis - Network
reduction - Network selection (LF)" (for load flow) or "Analysis - Network reduction
- Network selection (SC)" (for short circuit).
All nodes, which are selected in the list will be reduced for the corresponding
calculation.
When quitting the dialog box, the boundary nodes are set automatically.

Network Reduction
Network Reduction for Load Flow
A network will be reduced after having selected "Analysis - Network reduction -

Load flow". All nodes to be reduced will be erased from the project and the series-
and shunt equivalents as well as the equivalent infeeds or loads are generated.
The generated equivalents can be listed in the variant manager. The graphical
representation of these equivalents can be done as usual. The reduced network
has the same behavior with respect to the load flow as the original network.
If the original network should not be overwritten, the reduced network must
be stored with an other file name.
Important remarks:
1. Boundary nodes are represented as PQ-nodes without voltage control. The
node type and/or the voltage control become active if there is a synchronous
machine connected to the boundary node.
2. Reduced automatically regulated tap changing transformers have no influ-
ence on changes in the reduced network. If the influence should be consid-
ered the initial and ending node of these transformers should not be
reduced.
Network Reduction for Short Circuit
A network will be reduced after having selected "Analysis - Network reduction -

Short circuit". All nodes to be reduced will be erased from the project and the
series- and shunt equivalents as well as the equivalent infeeds or loads are
generated. The generated equivalents can be listed in the variant manager. The
graphical representation of these equivalents can be done as usual. The reduced
network has the same behavior with respect to the short circuit as the original
network.
The network can be reduced dependent on the short circuit parameters for differ-
ent short circuit faults and short circuit methods (see "Short Circuit Parameter" in
chapter "Short Circuit"):
Short circuit type:

3-phase short circuit
Only the matrix of the positive system will be built up and reduced. In the reduced
network only 3-phase short circuit can be calculated.

Network Reduction
Asymmetrical short circuit

The matrices of the positive, negative and zero system will be built up and
reduced. In the reduced network any kind of short circuit can be calculated.
Short circuit methods:

IEC909
The nodal admittance matrix will be built up and reduced according to IEC909. In
the reduced network only short circuits according to the mentioned method should
be calculated (see "Theory of Short Circuit Calculation" in chapter "Short Circuit").
Superposition method
The nodal admittance matrix will be built up and reduced according to superposi-
tion method. In the reduced network only short circuits according to the mentioned
method should be calculated (see "Theory of Short Circuit Calculation" in chapter
"Short Circuit").
ANSI/IEEE
The nodal admittance matrix will be built up and reduced according to ANSI/IEEE
method. In the reduced network only short circuits according to the mentioned
method should be calculated (see "Theory of Short Circuit Calculation" in chapter
"Short Circuit").
If the original network should not be overwritten, the reduced network must
be stored with an other file name.

Voltage Stability
Voltage Stability
To change the voltage stability calculation options, select "Analysis - Voltage

Stability - Parameters..." from the menu.
Sensitivity Analysis / Modal Analysis
Enable U-Q sensitivity S Enable U-Q sensitivity analysis for voltage

analysis stability calculation
Enable Q-U modal analysis M Enable Q-U modal analysis for voltage
stability calculation
Options
Buses without load M Q=0, constant: reactive power variation of
elements buses without connected load elements is
zero.
Q variable: reactive power of buses without
connected load elements is variable.
Maximum number of M Maximum number of stored eigenvalues
eigenvalues
Limits for sensitivities / S, M Values smaller than % of the maximum
participation factors value arent stored.
Results
Mutual bus sensitivities S Not only the bus self sensitivities U i / Qi ,
but also the mutual bus sensitivities
U k / Qi are stored.
Bus participation factors M Bus participation factors are stored.
Branch participation factors M Branch participation factors are stored.
Generator participation M Generator participation factors are stored.
factors
Eigenvectors M Eigenvectors are stored.
S: used by sensitivity analysis

M: used by modal analysis

Voltage Stability
U-Q Curves
Enable computation of U-Q Enable computation of U-Q curves for voltage

curves stability analysis
Voltage interval
Lower limit First point of U-Q curves
Upper limit Last point of U-Q curves
Increment Distance between 2 points
Sign convention for reactive Determines if reactive power injection or reactive

power power consumption is positive
Select nodes Select nodes whose U-Q curves have to be
computed.
P-U Curves
Enable computation Enable computation of P-U curves for voltage stability

of P-U curves analysis
Load scaling factor
Lower limit First point of P-U curves
Upper limit Last point of P-U curves. Set to a high value (e.g. 106) if
the voltage collapse point has to be the last point.
Initial increment Maximum distance between 2 points, increment at the
beginning of the simulation
Final increment Minimum distance between 2 points, increment at the
voltage collapse point. The increment is automatically
adjusted from Initial increment to Final increment
P-U computations List of defined P-U computations

Identifier Name of computation
Loads Number of selected loads to be scaled
Generators Number of selected generators to be scaled
Buses Number of bus voltages to be recorded
New Insert a new item into the computation list

Voltage Stability
Delete Delete the selected item from the list

Select All Enable all items
Select None Disable all items
Elements Determine for the selected item the loads and the
generators to be scaled and the bus voltages to be
recorded.
The voltage stability analysis can be started selecting "Analysis - Voltage Stability
- Calculation" from the menu. To perform voltage stability analysis for a partial
network choose "Analysis - Voltage Stability - Partial Network...".
Result Files
File name File name or full file path name

Select full path name
Build after calculation File is automatically built after calculations
Build export file File is built.

Voltage Stability
Results
Graphical Results
To open the graphical result window choose "Analysis - Voltage Stability -
Subchart settings:
Subchart type Select results to be displayed
Add curves If checked, curves have to be added using the tab
manually Curves. If not checked, tab Curves isnt visible and
curves of the actual variant are automatically added
according to the following 4 subchart settings.
Select eigenvalue Eigenvalue selection (for participation charts)
Select bus Bus selection (for mutual bus sensitivity chart)
Select U-Q curves Select U-Q curves to be displayed (for U-Q curve chart)
Select P-U curves Select P-U curves to be displayed (for P-U curve chart)
Axis properties
not checked.
Legend

Voltage Stability
The tab Curves is visible only if Add curves manually is checked. Press the
Add Curve button to add a new curve to the subchart. Press the Edit Curve
button to change the settings of the selected curve.
Curve settings:
Curve name Curve name used for the legend. This field is enabled only
if Create name automatically is not checked.
Create name Create curve name automatically
automatically
Variant Select variant
P-U computation Select P-U computation. Enabled only for P-U curve
charts.
Node name, ID Select node. Enabled only for mutual bus sensitivity charts,
U-Q curve charts and P-U curve charts.
Eigenvalue Select eigenvalue. Enabled only for participation charts.
Result Tables
To open the result tables choose "Analysis - Voltage Stability Result Tables".
The result tables display all calculated and stored numerical results.

Voltage Stability
Theory
Introduction
The analysis of voltage stability can be done using two different methods, time
simulations and static methods. Time simulations capture the events and their
chronology leading to instability. The computer tries to solve the differential
equations describing the power system. Time simulations are useful for detailed
study of specific voltage collapse situations and coordination of protection and
controls. The Dynamic Analysis module can be used for such time domain
simulations.
Many aspects of voltage stability problems can be effectively analyzed by using
static methods, which examine the viability of the equilibrium point represented by
a specified operating condition of the power system. The static analysis
techniques allow examination of a wide range of system conditions, can provide
much insight into the nature of the problem and can identify the key contributing
factors. The Voltage Stability module contains 4 static methods: U-Q Sensitivity
Analysis, Q-U Modal Analysis, U-Q Curves and P-U Curves. Static voltage
stability analysis is based on the conventional load flow model.
U-Q Sensitivity Analysis

U-Q sensitivity analysis calculates the relation between voltage change and
reactive power change.
U = J R1 Q
U incremental change in bus voltage magnitude (vector)

Q incremental change in bus reactive power injection (vector)
JR reduced Jacobian matrix
The elements of the inverse of the reduced Jacobian matrix J R are the U-Q
sensitivities. The diagonal components are the self sensitivities U i / Qi and the
nondiagonal elements are the mutual sensitivities U k / Qi . The sensitivities of
voltage controlled buses are equal to zero.
Positive sensitivities: Stable operation; the smaller the sensitivity, the more stable
the system. As stability decreases, the magnitude of the sensitivity increases,
becoming infinite at the stability limit (maximum loadability).

Voltage Stability
Negative sensitivities: Unstable operation. The system is not controllable,

because all reactive power control devices are designed to operate satisfactorily
when an increase in Q is accompanied by an increase in U.
Q-U Modal Analysis

The modal analysis approach has the added advantage that it provides
information regarding the mechanism of instability. Voltage stability characteristics
of the system can be identified by computing the eigenvalues and eigenvectors of
the reduced Jacobian matrix J R .
JR =
diagonal eigenvalue matrix

right eigenvector matrix
left eigenvector matrix
i ith right eigenvector, ith column of right eigenvector matrix
i ith left eigenvector, ith row of left eigenvector matrix
Using modal analysis techniques the original problem (see chapter U-Q
Sensitivity Analysis)
U = J R1 Q
is transformed into
u = 1 q
u = U vector of modal voltage variations

q = Q vector of modal reactive power variations
The difference between these two equations is that 1 is a diagonal matrix

whereas the reduced Jacobian matrix in general is nondiagonal. The inverse
transformation is given by
U = u
Q = q
Positive eigenvalue: The system is voltage stable. The smaller the magnitude, the
closer the ith modal voltage is to being unstable. The magnitude of the
eigenvalues can provide a relative measure of the proximity to instability.
Zero eigenvalue: The ith modal voltage collapses because any change in that
modal reactive power causes infinite change in the modal voltage.
Negative eigenvalue: The system is voltage unstable.

Voltage Stability
Eigenvalues and eigenvectors of the reduced Jacobian matrix for all practical
purposes are real. If for Buses without load elements the option Q=0, constant
is selected, Q = 0 is introduced for buses without any active bus elements. In
this case the variable U of these buses is dependent only on other bus voltage
magnitudes and is eliminated.
Bus participation factors: The relative participation of a bus in a certain mode is
given by the bus participation factor. Bus participation factors determine the areas
with each mode. Thus, voltage weak areas or unstable (not controllable) areas
are identified. The sum of all the bus participations for each mode is equal to
unity. The size of bus participation in a given mode indicates the effectiveness of
remedial actions applied at that bus in stabilizing that mode.
Branch participation factors: The relative participation of branch j in a certain
mode is given by the participation factor
Qloss j
Pj =
[
max Qloss j
j
]
Branch participation factors indicate, for each mode, which branches consume the
most reactive power in response to an incremental change in reactive load.
Branches with high participations are either weak links or are heavily loaded.
Branch participations are useful for identifying remedial measures to alleviate
voltage stability problems and for contingency selection.
Generator participation factors: The relative participation of machine m in a
certain mode is given by the generator participation factor
Qm
Pm =
max[Qm ]
m
Generator participation factors indicate, for each mode, which generators supply
the most reactive power in response to an incremental change in system reactive
loading. Generator participations provide important information regarding proper
distribution of reactive reserves among all the machines in order to maintain an
adequate voltage stability margin.
U-Q Curves
The U-Q curves are produced by running a series of load flow cases. U-Q curves
show the necessary amount of reactive power Q to achieve a specified voltage
level U. The minimum point of a U-Q curve (reactive power injection positive) is
the critical point, i.e. all points of the curve to the left of the minima are assumed
to be unstable. The points to the right of the minima are assumed to be stable. If
the minimum point of the U-Q curve is above the horizontal axis, the system is
reactive power deficient. Additional infeed of reactive power is required to prevent

Voltage Stability
voltage collapse. If the critical point is below the horizontal axis, the system has
some VAR margin. Additional infeed of reactive power is required if a greater
margin is desired.
Voltage collapse starts at the weakest bus and then spreads out to other weak
buses. Therefore the weakest bus is the most important in the voltage collapse
analysis using U-Q curve techniques. The weakest bus is one that would exhibit
one of the following conditions: a) has the highest voltage collapse point, b) has
the lowest reactive power margin, c) has the greatest reactive power deficiency,
or d) has the highest percentage change in voltage.
Fig. 14.1 U-Q curve with VAR margin Q
P-U Curves
The P-U curves are produced by running a series of load flow cases. P-U curves
relate bus voltages to load within a specified region. The benefits of this
methodology are that it provides an indication of proximity to voltage collapse
throughout a range of load levels.
The nature of voltage collapse is that as power transfers into well-bounded region
are increased, the voltage profile of that region will become lower and lower until a
point of collapse is reached. The voltages at specific buses in the region can vary
significantly, and some specific bus voltage could appear acceptable. The point-
of-collapse at all buses in the study region, however, will occur at the same power
import level, regardless of the specific bus voltages.

Voltage Stability
Fig. 14.2 P-U curve
Before the calculation can be run, the following has to be defined:

A set of loads to be scaled
A set of generators to be scaled
A set of bus voltages to be recorded
The load level at the beginning of the simulation
The load increment
The load level at the end of the simulation if the simulation should stop
before the point-of-collapse occurs

Small Signal Stability
To set the calculation options, select "Calculation - Small Signal Stability -

Parameters..." from the menu.
Calculation
Eigenvectors Enable calculation of eigenvectors

Participation factors Enable calculation of participation factors
Limit for participation Percentage of the maximum participation factor:
factors participation factors greater than this value are
stored. Set this value to 0 if all participation factors
have to be stored.
Eigenvalue sort order Determines the order how eigenvalues are listed in
table and file outputs.
Eigenvalue interval Eigenvalues located in this range are stored
Result Files
File name File name or full file path name

Select full path name
Build after calculation File is automatically built after calculations
Build export file File is built.
The small signal stability analysis can be started selecting "Calculation - Small
Signal Stability - Calculation" from the menu. To perform small signal stability
analysis for a partial network choose "Calculation - Small Signal Stability - Partial
Network...".

Results
Graphical Results
To open the graphical result window choose "Analysis Small Signal Stability -
Subchart settings:
Subchart type Select results to be displayed
Axis properties
not checked.
Legend
Choose the tab Curves in order to add or edit curves. Press the Add Curve
button to add a new curve to the subchart. Press the Edit Curve button to
change the settings of the selected curve.
Curve settings:
Curve name Curve name used for the subchart legend. This field is
enabled only if Create name automatically is not
checked.
Create name If checked, curve name is automatically created

automatically
Variant Select variant
Eigenvalue Select eigenvalue. Enabled only for mode shape charts
and eigenvalue participation factor charts.
State variable Select state variable. Enabled only for state variable
participation factor charts
Result Tables
To open the result tables choose "Analysis Small Signal Stability Result
Tables". The result tables display all calculated and stored numerical results.

Theory
Introduction
Small signal stability is the ability of a power system to maintain synchronism
when subjected to small disturbances. Disturbances are said to be small if the
equations that describe the resulting response of the system may be linearized for
the purpose of analysis. The linear equations are derived from the corresponding
nonlinear equations. That is done trough linearization at a specified operating
point. An operating point corresponds to a steady-state load flow condition.
Eigenvalue analysis (modal analysis) is a valuable tool in analysis of power
system small signal stability. It provides information about the inherent dynamic
characteristic of the power system and assists in its design. It is typically used in
studies of interarea oscillations.
Eigenvalue Theory
The linearized state space equations of a nonlinear system are
x& = A x + B u
y = C x + D u
The stability in the small is given by the eigenvalues i of the state matrix A . For
any eigenvalue i , there exists at least one nonzero column vector ri which
satisfies
A ri = i ri
The vector ri is called a right eigenvector of its eigenvalue i . A vector li which

satisfies
AT li = i l i
is called a left eigenvector of its eigenvalue i .

The stability of a power system is determined by the eigenvalues as follows:
A real eigenvalue corresponds to a non-oscillatory mode. A negative real
eigenvalue represents a decaying mode. The larger its magnitude, the faster the
decay. A positive real eigenvalue represents aperiodic instability.

Complex eigenvalues occur in conjugate pairs (since the state matrix is real), and
each pair correspond to an oscillatory mode. The real component of the
eigenvalues gives the damping, and the imaginary component gives the
frequency of oscillation. A negative real part represents a damped oscillation
whereas a positive real part represents oscillation of increasing amplitude. For a
complex pair of eigenvalues = j the frequency of oscillation in Hz is given
by

f =
2
The damping ratio is given by

=
2 +2
Mode shape
A right eigenvector gives the mode shape, i.e., the relative activity of the state
variables when a particular mode is excited. For example, the degree of activity of
the state variable xk in the ith mode is given by the element k of the right
eigenvector ri . The magnitudes of the elements of ri give the extents of the
activities of the state variables in the ith mode, and the angles of the elements
give phase displacements of the state variables with regard to the mode. Because
different system variables have different units, it is inconvenient to compare
elements of an eigenvector for different types of variables. Generally, only
variables of a same type (e.g rotor speed) are compared.
Participation factor
For the kth state variable and the ith eigenvalue, the associated participation
factor is calculated by
pki = lki rki
where lki and rki are the kth entries in left eigenvector li and right eigenvector ri
respectively. A participation factor is a measure of the relative participation of the
kth state variable in the ith mode, and vice versa. Since rki measures the activity
of the state variable k in the ith mode and lki weighs the contribution of this activity
to the mode, the product measures the net participation.The effect of multiplying
the elements of the left and right eigenvectors is also to make the participation
factor dimensionless (i.e. independent of the choice of units).

In view of the eigenvector normalization, the sum of the participation factors

associated with any eigenvalue or with any state variable is equal to 1.0 + j 0.0:
n
pki = 1 + j0
k =1
n
pki = 1 + j0
i =1
Participation factors are complex values. However, their magnitudes provide

enough information for dynamic system analysis.
Algorithm
The NEPLAN small signal stability calculation procedure contains the following
main steps:
1. Load flow calculation
2. Linearization of the state space equations of all power system elements
(e.g. generators, loads, etc.)
3. Build system state matrix A .
4. Calculation of eigenvalues and eigenvectors using an LR-QR algorithm
5. Calculation of participation factors, etc.
Results are only available if no error occurred.

Transient Stability
Transient Stability
General Remarks
Transient Stability module is a simulation program for computing electro-

mechanical transient phenomena in electricity networks.
For calculating the electricity network's behavior, all network elements are simu-
lated by mathematical models. Synchronous machines and their control circuits
are described (in terms of their behavior in non-steady-state operation) by their
system equations, which contain algebraic equations and differential equations. In
conjunction with the algebraic equations of the network, we thus obtain an equa-
tion system representing a mathematical model of the entire network.
In addition to the depiction of the primary elements, the Transient Stability module
also provides an option for simulating secondary elements (protective equipment).
During the simulation process, the measured values of the protective relays are
determined and the trip conditions are continuously monitored. Trips, and the as-
sociated switching operations, are performed automatically by the program. Ad-
justment and monitoring routines for complex protective systems are thus signifi-
cantly facilitated.
The starting point for each simulation is a steady-state operating condition, which
is determined by a load flow calculation beforehand.
Simulation method
The simulation method's job in calculating electro-mechanical transient phenom-
ena is to simultaneously solve the algebraic equations of the network and the sys-
tem equations of the dynamic elements at any one point in time.
The algebraic equations of the network are the model equations of the quasi-
steady-state elements in the electricity network. These elements are: lines, trans-
formers, constant compensators, and loads with constant impedance. The model
equations are formed from complex admittances and/or admittance matrices. The
model equations for the individual quasi-steady-state elements are put together to
form the network admittance matrix YN so as to reflect the network topology. The
network admittance matrix is a square matrix with complex matrix elements, with
the order of the matrix corresponding to the number of nodes in the network.
The matrix equation of the electricity network is thus obtained as
1
u = YN i

Transient Stability
If the node currents i are known, then the unknown node voltages u can be calcu-
lated. During simulation, the network admittance matrix is constant for as long as
there are no changes to the topology. The network admittance matrix is altered
only by switching operations in response to network disturbances, or in the event
of tripping of faults. The inverse of YN is determined by factorizing, and to mini-
mize the computation work the sequence of the nodes is specified by dynamic or-
dering.
The incoming node currents i are the output variables for the system equations of
the dynamic elements and are mostly voltage-dependent. Node currents are also
caused by loads which do not represent an impedance pure and simple. These
node currents, too, are voltage-dependent. The matrix equation of the electricity
network is thus non-linear and has to be solved iteratively.
System equations are used for all pieces of equipment which are simulated by
algebraic and differential equations. The system equations generally read in the
state form
dx
= A x + B u
dt
y = C x + D u
As exemplified by the model of the synchronous machine, the input variables u

are the d and q axis components of the terminal voltage, the excitation voltage
and the turbine's torque. The output variables y are the terminal currents. The cur-
rent feeding into the inverted network admittance matrix can be determined by
transformation from the fixed-rotor coordinate system into the complex coordinate
system of the network equations. The state variables x depend on the model se-
lected, and do not have to correspond to physical variables.
Laplace transformation of the differential equations of the system equations will
produce the following:
X(s) = (sI - A)-1x0 + (sI - A)-1BU(s)
A and B are given, x0 is the starting point of the state variables. If the input vari-
ables U(s) were also known, then re-transformation into the time domain would
produce an accurate solution of the state equations. If the input variables are ap-
proximated between two integration points by means of a first-order polynomial
(straight line), the following integration formulas are obtained (see [1])
xn+1 = Pxn + W1un + W2un+1

xn,un ... Variables at the beginning of the integration interval

Transient Stability
xn+1,un+1 ... Variables at the end of the integration interval
The integration method is an implicit single-step method, and is stable for all inte-
gration step sizes, irrespective of the sizes of the time constants involved.
The integration formula contains one part, which depends only on the variables at
the beginning of the interval. This part must be calculated only once per interval,
and is then constant during the iterative solution process. The input variables u at
the end of the integration interval are estimated at the beginning of the iteration
and then continuously improved as iteration proceeds.
The coefficient matrices P, W1 and W2 are constant for as long as the integration
interval remains unchanged. The coefficient matrices are determined analytically,
or by series development, in dependence on the size and the structure of system
matrix A. To avoid excessive computation work, the system equations are divided
into subsystems, with an order of up to three or four. The subsystems are then
solved consecutively, block by block, thus arriving at a solution to the entirety of
all system equations within the iterative solution process.
The iterative solution process looks like this:
a) Start with initial load flow or with the result of the last integration step, estimate
the input variables for the end of the interval.
b) Solve the system equations for the dynamic elements and for loads not repre-
senting a constant impedance. Determine the incoming currents I.
c) Solve the network equations and calculate the new node voltages
d) Check the convergence by comparing the node voltages prior to and after itera-
tion. When convergence has been reached, iteration will be aborted and the
next integration interval started. Otherwise continue with iteration at b).
This iterative solution of the network equations and system equations will supply a
simultaneous solution for the entire system without any interface error.
A control function for the integration's step size is superimposed onto the iteration
process described above. The step size is changed in dependence on the devia-
tion between the estimated and the actually computed variables for rotor angle
and electric active power of synchronous machines. A logic function increases or
decreases the step size between specified values. Thanks to this step-width con-
trol, the computation work required for a long simulation period can be signifi-
cantly reduced.

Transient Stability
Terms and Definitions, Per-Unit System
Terms and Definitions
Function block
A function block is the smallest function unit of a control circuit. Each function
block is described by a transfer function, which forms the output signal(s) from the
input signals. A transfer function can be independent of time (algebraic equations
only) or dependent on time (algebraic and differential equations).
Variable
An variable is the analog or binary output variable of a network element which var-
ies in time. A variable can be selected for outputting and display, or can serve as
input variable for a control circuit or a protective device. The user can change a
variable's value by forming absolute values, by negation and/or inversion.
Controller signal
A controller signal is an analog or binary output of a function block of a control cir-
cuit. A controller signal is available as a variable both within the control circuit
concerned and outside it as well.
Switching operation
A switching operation is a change in the state of a network element. There is more
than one type of switching operation for each type of element. A switching opera-
tion is triggered at a preset point in time by the user or automatically by the trigger
function of a protective device.
Per-Unit System
Internally, the Transient Stability module calculates with referenced variables, with
per-unit variables. The nominal values of the network elements are converted into
"per-unit" with the reference power SB and with the reference voltage UB which is
specified for each node. Reference power and reference voltages are read in us-
ing the LoadFlowFile.
Referenced powers
Nominal values:

Transient Stability
S[ MVA ] = P[MW] + j Q[ MVAr ]
Per-unit:
S P Q
s = p + j q = + j
SB SB SB
Referenced voltages
Nominal values:
U[ kV ] = U re [kV] + j U im [kV]
Per-unit:
U U re U
u = u re + j u im = + j im
UB UB UB
Referenced currents
Nominal values: Reference current:
SB
I[ A ] = I re [A] + j I im [ A ] IB =
3 UB
Per-unit:
I I I
i = i re + j i im = re + j im
IB IB IB
Referenced impedances
Nominal values: Reference impedance:
U 2B
Z[ ] = R[] + j X[] ZB =
SB
Per-unit:
Z R X
z = r + j x = + j
ZB ZB ZB

Transient Stability
Referenced exciter voltages

The voltages of the synchronous-machine models are referenced variables with
the reference network voltage UB of the machine terminal's node as the reference
variable. In order to simulate exciter devices, the exciter voltage and the input
variables of the voltage controller model must be converted from network-per-unit
into exciter-per-unit.
In accordance with IEEE [4], the reference variable UE for exciter voltages is that
exciter voltage which in no-load mode produces rated voltage at the machine ter-
minals on the synchronous machine.
Network-per-unit and exciter-per-unit are different only if the saturation of the syn-
chronous machine is simulated or if the synchronous machine's rated voltage UN
is not equal to the reference voltage UB.
Network-per-unit: Conversion factor:
UB UB
( )
ufB =
UE U N 1 + A e 0,2B
A,B ... saturation factors (see synchronous machines)
Exciter-per-unit:
UB
u fE = u fB
( )
ufE
U N 1 + A e 0,2B

Transient Stability
Network Elements
Controlled Admittance
Controlled admittances are the most general form of a simulation model in the
Transient Stability module. Controlled admittances in combination with controller
models of any desired structure give users complete freedom to choose the na-
ture and complexity of the mathematical model to be simulated.
Basically, a controlled admittance is a constant admittance ycad, which has been
permanently incorporated in the network admittance matrix. The constant admit-
tance's value is entered through Dynamic Data file, and is independent of the
value of the admittance in the initial load flow. The effective admittance is gener-
ated by an injected current into the admittance matrix.
The effective admittance (in [Ohm-1]) can be controlled by any desired controller
model. Active and reactive components of the admittance can be controlled inde-
pendently of each other.
A controlled admittance is primarily intended for modeling static reactive power
compensators. In these cases, it is only the reactive component that is controlled,
the active component (if it does not equal 0) remains unchanged. The controlled
admittance corresponds to the "Interface" block of Fig. 11.67 in [7].
However, controlled admittances can also be used to model (above and beyond
static compensators) dynamic load models, special synchronous-machine models
and the like.
The use of controlled admittances requires a good knowledge of the effect of the
admittance concerned and of the supply current on the solution of the network
equations. Since plausibility checks are not run, divergence or numerical instabil-
ity can easily be achieved!
Block diagram of the simulation model
SB
G 2 ycad uk
UB
Iterations
uk
SB
B 2 j
UB y ik
icad
ycad

Transient Stability
Variables
All variables of a controlled admittance are analog variables.
A Voltage magnitude [pu]
B Voltage angle [degree]
C Current magnitude [A]
D Current angle [degree]
E Active power [MW]
F Reactive power [MVAr]
G Magnitude of the effective admittance [Ohm-1]
H Angle of the effective admittance [degree]
I Active component of the effective admittance [Ohm-1]
J Reactive component of the effective admittance [Ohm-1]
Switching operations
none
Function Generators
A function generator is a fictitious network element, serving to test control equip-

ment or as a disturbance function for network simulation.
A function generator is switched on and off by means of a switching operation.
More than one function generator can be switched on simultaneously.
The following types of function generators are avail-
able:
A .... Step
If the generator is switched off, the output sig-
nal is 0.
If the generator is switched on at the time t0, the output signal equals the
constant value K.
B .... Ramp
If the generator is switched off, the output sig-
nal is 0.
If the generator is switched on at the time t0,
the output signal is computed, using the func-
tion

Transient Stability
y = Min K , ( t t 0 )
K
T
If |T| < 0.0001, the ramp function corresponds to a jump function of the size K.
C .... Sine
If the generator is switched off, the output signal
is 0.
If the generator is switched on at the time t0, the
output signal is computed, using the function
2
y = K sin
T ( )
t t 0 + T .

If |T| < 0.0001, the sine function corresponds to a jump function of the size
K.
Variables
A .... Output of the function generator [pu]
A .... Generator ON
Parameters: none
The function generator is switched on.
B .... Generator OFF
Parameters: none
The function generator is switched off.
Simulation
The simulation sequence can be controlled in dependence on the computed re-
sults using a fictitious network element called "Simulation".
Variables
None
A Abort simulation
Parameter: none

Transient Stability
The switching operation aborts the simulation immediately.

B Set debug flag
Parameter:
P1 Number of debug flag[#]
Debug flag Number P1 is set, and the debug information concerned is output. The
debug flag remains set until it is reset again.
If the debug flag had not been set, the switching operation has no function.
C Reset debug flag
Parameter:
P1 Number of debug flag [#]
Debug flag Number P1 is reset.
If the debug flag had not been set, the switching operation has no function.
Maximum-minimum relays
Maximum-minimum relays monitor a measured variable for over or under violation
of a preset measured value. If the measured variable of a maximum relay ex-
ceeds the threshold value (Starting), a time counter is started, which defines a
time interval. If the measured variable concerned remains above the threshold
value during this time interval, then a trip command will be output at the end of the
interval. If the measured variable falls back below the threshold value, the time
counter will be reset, and no trip command will be output. If a trip command is
given, the associated trip function will be executed on expiry of a breaker opening
time.
Examples of maximum-minimum relays are
- overcurrent relays
- overvoltage relays
- undervoltage relays
- power relays
- impedance relays (central impedance circuit)
- frequency relays
The concept of a monitored measured variable is not restricted to the measured
variables listed above. Any variable can be used as monitored measured variable.
Up to four relay stages can be operated by one measured variable.
Any desired switching operation can be triggered as a trip function assigned to a
relay stage. More than one trip function can be assigned to one relay stage. Start-
ing or trip signals can be utilized as signal connections for other relays.
The monitoring of specific variables can advantageously be utilized for controlling
the simulation run. To determine the stability limits, for example, the rotor angle

Transient Stability
can be monitored. If a defined value is exceeded, then the simulation will be

aborted as the "switching operation" of the relay. The generator will then already
have fallen out of synchronism, and the computation can be aborted.
Variables
All variables of max/min relays are binary variables.
A Trip, Stage 1
B Trip, Stage 2
C Trip, Stage 3
D Trip, Stage 4
None
Distance protection
The simulation model for distance protection equipment processes analog and bi-
nary input signals, and sends out binary output signals. The signal flow plan is
shown on Page 15.
x
The analog input signals are current and voltage of the branch element as-
signed. Additionally, and independent of all subsequent functions, the current is
monitored for over violation of a minimum value and the voltage for under violation
of a maximum value. If there is no over or under violation, none of the subsequent
time counters will be started.
In the "direction" block, the direction of the fault is determined from current and
voltage. If the measured impedance in the r/x diagram is in the hatched area (see
picture on right), then the decision will be for forward direction. Otherwise, it is a
case of backward direction. The effect of the direction can be set as positive,
negative or inoperative both for starting and for the measuring stages. This means

Transient Stability
characteristics can be simulated as forward-directional, backward-directional or

non-directional.
In the "Starting" and "Measurement" blocks, tripping of the distance relay or the
start of a time counter for a measuring stage is derived by means of impedance
characteristics, which can be used for the following functions:
- Starting
- Stage 1
- Stage 1 extended
- Stage 2
- Stage 3
- Trip and triggering of an external auto-reclosure
Each of these functions can be associated with the following impedance charac-
teristics. More than one characteristic of the same type or different types can be
associated with one function.
Overcurrent starting
The use of overcurrent starting is predominantly intended for the "Starting" func-
tion.
The overcurrent starting function evaluates only the current of the branch element,
and is voltage-independent. It is thus an "impedance characteristic" only in a very
general sense. If the current of the branch element exceeds the minimum-current
value, the time counter of the function assigned will be started.
Circular characteristic x
The circular characteristic in the r/x diagram is shown in
the adjacent picture. If the impedance point measured is
located inside the circle, then the associated time counter Z
will be started. The circle has a diameter of Z, and is offset X
R
from the coordinate center by (R,X). r
Polygonal characteristic
The polygonal characteristic in the r/x diagram is x (R3,X3)
shown in the adjacent picture. If the impedance (R2,X2)
point measured is located inside the polygon,
then the associated time counter will be started.
The polygon is defined by four corner points. If r

the fourth corner point is not specified, the poly-
(R4,X4)
(R1,X1)
Transient Stability
gon will be interpreted as a triangle. Polygons with more than 4 corner points can
be created by combining several 4-cornered polygons.
Binary signals
Binary signals can be used to influence the behavior of the distance protection
model by external events.
The binary input signals can be binary output signals from other distance relays or
from other types of relays as well. These signals can be altered both at the signal
source and at the input of the distance relay.
For controlling the time dependent signal flow, binary signals can be provided at
the source with a pick-up delay TAS and/or with a drop-out delay TAF. For the
time of signal transmission between the signal source and the destination, the
signal can be assigned a transmission time TL.
Signal source
TAS
Pick-up delay
TAF
Drop-out delay
TL
Transmission time
The illustration above shows the basic manner in which the signal is influenced.
When the signal arrives at the distance relay, it can be altered as follows:
0 Signal is not altered

1 Signal is inverted
2 Signal is always 1
3 Signal is always 0
Note that a binary signal can have the following functions in the distance protec-
tion model (see illustration at the end of this chapter):
Blocking
A trip command to the circuit-breaker will be given only when this signal is not be-
ing received.
Enable
The time counter of Stage 1 will not be started until the external signal is being re-
ceived. The start of Stage 1 time counter will, however, be blocked only until the
time, TFG, has elapsed. On expiry of

Transient Stability
TFG, Stage 1 time counter will be started even if no enable signal is being re-
ceived.
Intertripping
If a signal is being received, a trip command will be sent provided that the direc-
tional starting has been activated.
Range extension
When an external signal is being received, the Stage 1 extended is activated.
External starting
Starting function begins when an external signal is being received.
Auto-reclosure blocking
The time counter for a trip using the characteristic for auto-reclosure will be
started only when no external signal is being received.
Variables
All variables of the distance relay are binary variables.
B General starting
C Directional starting
D General tripping
E Tripping, Stage 1
F Tripping, Stage 1 extended
G Tripping, Stage 2
H Tripping, Stage 3
I Tripping, directional starting
J Tripping, non-directional starting
K OFF command (signal to circuit breaker)
L Forward direction
M Auto-reclosure
None

Transient Stability
Signal flow plan for distance protection

External starting
1
1 TAU 9
&
I> & U<

&
2
& TAG 8
&
1
T3 7
&
Starting 3
6 1
T2 1 10
& & TLS Circuit-breaker
opened
T1E 5
&
11
Direction
T1 4
&
&
Auto-reclosure blocking
TWE 12
&
&
WE
3
Current
Messung
Voltage
2
Internal Signals:
1E 1 .....General starting
& 2 .....Directional starting
3 .....General tripping
4 .....Tripping Stage 1
1 TFG 5 .....Tripping Stage 1 extended
1
6 .....Tripping Stage 2
Range extension 7 .....Tripping Stage 3
Enable 8 .....Tripping directional starting
&
9 .....Tripping non-directional starting
Intertripping 10 ....OFF command
11 ....Forward direction
Blocking 12 ....Auto-reclosure
Pole slip protection

Pole slip is a dynamic, asynchronous operation of two or more synchronous gen-
erators, in which the air-gap voltages of the generators run at least once through
phase opposition.

Transient Stability
ZA
ZC
ZB
In the event of a short-circuit in the network, a generator is relieved of active

power and accelerated, because the turbine torque does not change immediately.
If the short-circuit is of short duration, the generator will indeed exhibit power
swing in relation to the network, but the oscillation will decay under damping. If the
short-circuit duration exceeds a certain value, which will depend on generator ca-
pacity utilization, the type of fault concerned, and how far away it is, the generator
will pull out of synchronism, exhibiting slip against the network. Pulling out of syn-
chronism is accompanied by major oscillations in current and power, and consti-
tutes a severe stress case for the generator involved. In order to avoid mechanical
and thermal damage, a slip must be detected as soon as possible, and the gen-
erator disconnected from the network. In a network with more than one generator,
the slip can be acquired using the movement of the impedance pointer, viewed
from the generator terminals, in the r/x plane.
The characteristic of the pole slip current in the Transient Stability module con-
sists of a lens-shaped area divided into two lens halves by a straight line in the
lens axis. A straight line which is aligned perpendicular to the lens axis will divide
the r/x plane into areas close to and remote from the generator terminals. The co-
ordinate center designates the generator terminals. The position of the lens is de-
fined by the angle phi of the lens axis, and the shape of the lens by the angle al-
pha.
The criterion for a slip is the movement of the impedance pointer through the lens.
The impedance pointer must enter into the lens area on one side, and exit from
the lens again on the other side. The impedance pointer must dwell for at least 25
ms in each half of the lens. If the impedance pointer passes through the lens
above the straight line, this means the slip concerned is remote from the genera-
tor terminals, and in Stage 2, otherwise it is close to the generator terminals, and
in Stage 1.
The maximum acquirable slip frequency is specified by selecting the lens size and
the lens shape. The wider the lens is, the higher the slip frequencies are which
can be detected. The width of the lens, together with the lens size, also deter-
mines the range in the r-direction, which must exhibit a sufficiently large distance
from the minimum operating impedance.

Transient Stability
The relay's trip function can be specified separately for Stage 1 and Stage 2.
More than one trip function can be defined for each level. Any switching operation
can be assigned as the trip function. For a description of the trip functions, see
under "Maximum-minimum relays".
Variables
All variables of the pole slip relay are binary variables.
A Trip, Stage 1
B Trip, Stage 2
None
Overcurrent protection
Functional description
In electricity networks, an overcurrent protection feature monitors a measured cur-
rent, and sends a trip command to a circuit-breaker when the current meets de-
fined starting and trip conditions.
Simulation of an overcurrent protection feature in the Transient Stability module is
accordingly divided up into
measured variable
starting condition
trip condition
trip function
An overcurrent protection feature possesses a measured variable, a starting con-
dition and a trip function. An overcurrent protection feature can, however, have
more than one trip condition (e.g. independently time-delayed high-current level,
dependently time-delayed overcurrent level).
Measured variable
The measured variable can be a current magnitude from any network element.
Other variables are not permissible (error message).
Starting condition
The starting condition is the over violation of a starting current IA, which is the mul-
tiple KA of the set current IE. After starting, the trip time begins to run (trip condi-

Transient Stability
tion). If the current drops below a reset current IR (which is the multiple KR of the
set current IE), before the trip time has elapsed, the trip time will be reset and no
trip will be executed.
IA = K A IE
IR = K R IE
Trip condition
Different characteristics can be selected for the trip time, as the trip condition. An
overcurrent protection feature can be associated with more than one trip charac-
teristic.
1) Independent trip time

The trip time tA is constant, and independent of the current measured:
t A = TE
2) Analytically dependent trip time

The trip time tA is variable, and depends non-linearly on the measured current I.
The non-linear correlation is analytically given as,
tA K1
=
TE I K 2
1
IE
By means of K1 and K2, the trip characteristics can, for example, be formed in ac-
cordance with IEC 255:
Normally dependent (Type A) : K1 = 0.14 K2 = 0.02

Heavily dependent (Type B) : K1 = 13,5 K2 = 1
Extremely dependent (Type C) : K1 = 80 K2 = 2
If the current is more than the multiple KB of the set current IE, the trip time will not
be reduced any
I
further; ( max = K B ). KB is, for example, equal to 20.
E
I

Transient Stability
3) Tabularly dependent trip time

The trip time tA is variable, and is non-linearly dependent on the current I. The
non-linear correlation is given as a tabular function:
tA
= f I
TE
I E
A tabular function can, for example, be used to simulate fuse characteristics.
Trip function
If the measured current remains above the reset current IR longer than the trip
time after the starting current IA has been exceeded, the trip function will be initi-
ated. In the Transient Stability module, the trip function is any desired switching
operation. More than one switching operation, can also be assigned to a single
trip function.
On expiry of a breaker opening time which can be set for each switching opera-
tion, the switching operations will be executed.
Variables
The variables of an overcurrent relay are analog or binary variables.
A Measured current I [A]
B Effective trip time tA [s]
C Starting condition fulfilled [binary]
D Trip condition fulfilled [binary]
No switching operations can be performed at an overcurrent protection feature.
This must NOT be confused with switching operations which are caused by an
overcurrent protection feature.
Pickup Conditions
Subroutine REGS gives as currents the square of per unit currents:
2
I SB
i =
2
IB current base of network element
IB 3 UB
Pickup condition in nominal values is
i2 IB2 > (K A IE )
2
I > IA I2 > I2A
Results as programmed pickup condition:

Transient Stability
2
K I
i2 > A E i2 > pcka
IB
where
2 2
K I K I U
pcka = A E = 3 A E B
IB SB
Analytical Dependent Time Delay Characteristics

Subroutine REGS gives as currents the square of per-unit currents (see above).
The characteristic requires
I i IB 2 IB
2 2
= = i

IE IE IE

The analytical characteristic results as
tA K1 tck1
= =
TE
I
K2
2 2 (i 2
pcie )
tck 2
1
i2 B 1
IE

where
2 2
I 1 SB
pcie = B =
IE 3 IE UB
tck1 = K1
K2
tck2 =
2

Transient Stability
Program control
Simulation run and table output
Initial integration step length

The simulation is started with the initial step length, and altered automatically by
the program. If the step length control has been switched off, then the entire simu-
lation will be executed with the integration step length, XDT0.
Default value: 0.001 s (when XDT0 < 0.0001 s)
Simulation duration
Default value: XDT0 (when TEND < XTD0)
Automatic step length control

0 switched off
1 switched on
Default value: 1 (when NVIS 0)
Name of a synchronous machine for reference rotor angle

The rotor angle of the synchronous machine with this name is the reference vari-
able for outputting the rotor angles of all other synchronous machines. All rotor
angles are output as the difference from the rotor angle of the reference synchro-
nous machine.
Controlling program run stop

0 No stop
1 Stop after reading in load flow
2 Stop after reading in and initializing the dynamic data
3 Stop after reading in and initializing the protective data
4 Stop after reading in all data
Default value: 0 (when NST < 0 or > 4)
Control of list outputs of variables

0 Lists are not printed
1 Lists are printed
Default value: 1 (when KLIS 0)

Transient Stability
Control of output of variables on file

0 Variables are not output
1 Variables are output
Default value: 1 (when KMON 0)
Number of points per variable on file

It states only the approximate number of points per variable. Due to switching op-
erations and step length control, the actual number may deviate from that speci-
fied.
Default value: 150 (when NVF < 1)
Simulation parameters
Number of sub-intervals for control circuits
The system equations for the control circuits are solved NSI times within one inte-
gration step. Minimum value is 2.
Default value: 5 (when NSI < 2 or > 100)
Maximum number of iterations for the implicit solution

Default value: 100 (when NITAMX < 1 or > 1000)
Convergence tolerance for active power of synchronous machines

Default value: 0.001 per unit (when EPSP < 10-8 or > 0.1)
Convergence tolerance for real and imaginary components of node voltages

Default value: 0.001 per unit (when EPSV < 10-8 or > 0.1)
Limitation of the table for multiplication of the initial step length

The integration step length is altered in multiples of the initial step length. Multipli-
cation proceeds in accordance with the table given below. The maximum step
length can be specified by limiting the table.
1 1 5 15 9 35 13 55 17 75
2 2 6 20 10 40 14 60 18 80
3 5 7 25 11 45 15 65 19 85
4 10 8 30 12 50 16 70 20 90
Default value: 20 (when NVIMMX < 1 or > 20)
Maximum number of iterations for the implicit solution after which the step
length to be reduced

Transient Stability
Default value: 7 (when NVIIMX < 1 or > 20)
Number of steps to further increase the step length after the last increase of
the step length
Default value: 3 (when NVIINC < 1 or > 20)
Number of steps to increase the step length after the last decrease of the
step length
Default value: 10 (when NVIDEC < 1 or > 20)
Maximum active-power mismatch to increase the step length

Default value: 0.001 per unit (when DEPEMX <10-6 or >0.1)
Maximum frequency mismatch to increase the step length

Default value: 0.001 rad/s (when DERSMX < 10-6 or > 0.1)

Symbol Library
Symbol Library
Overview
With the NEPLAN Symbol Library you can

modify the existing element and protection device symbols,
add new element and protection device symbols, using existing symbols as a
template,
draw your own graphic symbols.
Basic Concepts
The symbols can be categorized to the following groups:

1. Symbols of network elements with one or more connecting points to nodes
(loads, transformers, etc.),
2. Symbols of protection devices and switches (relays, earthing switches, etc.)
3. Symbols for "General Elements"
4. Disconnection Symbol and Flow Indicator
5. Drawing Symbols
In the main application you can select the network and the protection device sym-
bols with "Input - Symbol Selection".
To draw a "drawing symbol" you have to select "Draw - Symbol...".
Select the symbols for the disconnection symbol and flow indicator with "Options -
Symbols".
Symbols of Network Elements

Symbols of network elements are drawn between their connecting points (Fig.
17.1). To each graphic object of the symbol, you can assign a connection side.
This side will be considered, if you color the network according to the voltage
levels. For switchable symbols you get two diagrams, one for the "ON" state and
the other for the "OFF" state.

Symbol Library
Connecting Point
Fig. 17.1 Symbols of network elements
Symbols of Protection Devices and Switches

Protection devices are positioned at the logical switches of an element and are
connected to the corresponding node. The connecting point of a protection device
determines the distance from the node (Fig. 17.2).
Fig. 17.2 Protection Devices and Switches
Symbols for "General Elements"

The general element type, can be used for documentation and information pur-
poses. These elements will not be used for the calculation. New general element
types can be defined with the Symbol Library. For each element type it is possible
to assign a SQL database table (requires the optional SQL database driver
module). The fields of this SQL table can be defined by the user.
Disconnection Symbol and Flow Indicator

You can define your own symbols for the disconnection symbol and flow indicator.
The connecting point of the disconnection symbol determines the distance from

Symbol Library
the node. The disconnection symbol will be shown, if the display of the "logical
switches" is not selected (see "Drawing parameters").
Drawing Symbols
The drawing symbols are not connected to any other element. They can be scaled
in the main application.
Mouse Buttons
Select Mode
Pressing the left mouse button selects and deselects the graphic objects.
Holding down the "Shift-key" allows multiple selection.
Press the left mouse button while moving the mouse to move selected objects.
Drawing Mode
To enter new objects press the left mouse button while moving the mouse.
Double-Click
A double-click on an objects brings up the property dialog box.

Symbol Library
Graphical Elements
Line Width (Symbol Library)

The line widths of the different symbols are considered as follows:
Network elements, If the line width is set to 0.0 mm, the setting for the
Protection Devices corresponding element of the main application are
taken into consideration for the line width.
Line widths > 0.0 mm will be taken into consideration
by the main application.
"General Element", If the line width is set to 0.0 mm, the main application
Disconnection symbol, sets the line width to 1 pixel (0.25 mm).
Flow indicator, Line widths > 0.0 mm will be taken into consideration
Drawing symbols by the main application.

Symbol Library

References
References
Additional References
/1/ L. Busarello
ber die Entwicklung eines Programmsystems zur Analyse und Planung
elektrischer Energieversorgungsnetze fr Arbeitsplatzcomputer
Dissertation Nr. 8319, Eidgenssische Technische Hochschule Zrich,
1987
/2/ VDE0102 Teil 100
Berechnung von Kurzschlussstrmen in Drehstromnetzen
Entwurf April 1985, VDE-Verlag, D-Berlin 12
/3/ H. Happolt, D. Oeding
Elektrische Kraftwerke und Netze
Springer-Verlag
/4/ O. I. Elgerd
Electric Energy System Theory. An Introduction
McGraw-Hill, 1971
/5/ Elektrische Energietechnik, Bnde 1-3
Springer-Verlag, 29. Auflage, 1988
/6/ L. Busarello, G. Balzer, K. Reichert
Die Kurzschlussstromberechnung nach IEC 909
SEV-Bulletin, Heft 9, 1989
/7 / Xiao-Ping Zhang
Fast three phase load flow method
IEEE Transaction on Power Systems, Vol. 11, No. 3. August 1996
/8 / Funk, Hantel
Frequenzabhngigkeit der Betriebsmittel von Drehstromnetzen
ETZ-Archiv Band 9 (1987), Heft 11, Seiten 349-356
/9/ W. Tenschert
Simulation elektromechanischer Ausgleichsvorgnge in elektrischen
Energienetzen mit Nachbildung von Schutzeinrichtungen.
Dissertation Technische Universitt Wien, 1988

References
/ 10 / I.M. Canay
Determination of model parameters of synchronous machines.
IEE Proc., Vol.130, Pt.B., 1983, H.2, S.86-94
/ 11 / Polschlupfschutz GZX 104 - Technische Beschreibung.
BBC, CH-ES 31-58 D
/ 12 / Excitation System Models for power system stability studies.
IEEE Committee Report
IEEE Transactions, Vol. PAS-100, 1981, S.494-509
/ 13 / P.M. Anderson, A.A. Fouad
Power System Control and Stability
The Iowa State University Press, 1977
/ 14 / S. Ertem, Y. Baghzouz
Simulation of Induction Machinery for Power System Studies
IEEE Transactions on Energy Conversion, Vol.4, 1989, S.88-94
/ 15 / P. Kundur
Power System Stability and Control
EPRI Power System Engineering Series
McGraw-Hill, Inc.
/ 16 / G. Hosemann (Hrsg.)
Htte - Taschenbcher der Technik;
Band3: Netze Springer Verlag, Berlin, 1987
ISBN 3-540-15359-4
/ 17 / H.-J. Haubrich (Hrsg.)
Zuverlssigkeitsberechnung von Verteilungsnetzen.
1. Auflage, Aachen, Verlag der Augustinus-Buchhandlung1996
(Aachener Beitrge zur Energieversorgung, Bd. 36)
ISBN 3-86073-492-X

Appendix
Appendix
The Structure of the Import-/Export-Files
EDT-File
With the help of the EDT-file, topological and electrical data can be imported and
exported. This File can be generated and read by MS-Excel (see "Interfaces to
NEPLAN - Import/Export" in chapter "Tutorial" and "File - Import/Export" in chapter
"Menu Options"). When exporting the file, the user will be asked about the field
seperator to use in the EDT-file. The structure and the description of the file are
found below:

Appendix
----------------------------------------------------------------------------
| Data field| Elements |
|--------------------------------------------------------------------------|
|Name |Type | Line |Coupling|Reactor |2-w.Tran|3-w.Tran|Shunt |Net.feed|
|--------------------------------------------------------------------------|
| id | N2 | [1] | [2] | [3] | [4] | [5] | [50] | [51] |
| l1 | L |Switch 1|Switch 1|Switch 1|Switch 1|Switch 1|Switch 1|Switch 1|
| l2 | L |Switch 2| |Switch 2|Switch 2|Switch 2| regul ?| |
| l3 | L | | | |regulate|Switch 3| | |
| l4 | L |Cable ? | | |Unit Tr.| | | |
| c1 | C8 |No.nam 1|No.nam 1|No.nam 1|No.nam 1|No.nam 1|No.nam 1|No.nam 1|
| c2 | C8 |No.nam 2|No.nam 2|No.nam 2|No.nam 2|No.nam 2| | |
| c3 | C8 | | | | |No.nam 3| | |
| c4 | C8 |Elem.nam|Elem.nam|Elem.nam|Elem.nam|Elem.nam|Elem.nam|Elem.nam|
| c5 | C10 | | | |Vectorgr|Vectorgr| | |
| c6 | C24 | Type | | | Type | | | |
| c7 | C8 |Freq.dep| |Freq.dep|Freq.dep|Freq.dep|Freq.dep|Freq.dep|
| r1 | N8 | Un | Un | Un | Un1 | Un1 | Un | Un |
| r2 | N8 | B1(1) | | | Un2 | Un2 | | |
| r3 | N8 | B1(0) | | | Delta U| Un3 | | |
| r4 | N8 | G1(1) | | Ur | Ur1 | Ur1 | | |
| r5 | N8 | G1(0) | | | Ur2 | Ur2 | | |
| r6 | N8 | | | | Beta | Ur3 | | |
| r7 | N8 | Ir max | | | Sr | Sr12 | P(1) | Sk"max |
| r8 | N8 | X(1) | X(1) | ukr(1) | ukr(1) |ukr(1)12| | Sk"min |
| r9 | N8 | X(0) | X(0) | | ukr(0) |ukr(1)23| | |
| r10 | N8 |Per.temp| | |reg.side|ukr(1)13| | |
| r11 | N8 | R(1) | R(1) | uRr(1) | uRr(1) |uRr(1)12| | |
| r12 | N8 | R(0) | R(0) | | uRr(0) |uRr(1)23| | |
| r13 | N8 | Y(0) | Y(0) | | Tap act|uRr(1)13| | |
| r14 | N8 | Y(1) | Y(1) | | XE1 | XE1 | | |
| r15 | N8 | Number | Ir | | XE2 | XE2 | | |
| r16 | N8 | ir min | Ipmax | | RE1 | RE1 | | Ik"max |
| r17 | N8 | red.fac| | | RE2 | RE2 | | Ik"min |
| r18 | N8 | C(1) | | Ir | I0 |ukr(0)12| P(0) | R1/X1 |
| r19 | N8 | C(0) | | | Tap min|ukr(0)23| Q(1) | Z0/Z1 |
| r20 | N8 | Length | | | Tap max|ukr(0)13| Q(0) | C |
| r21 | N8 | B2(1) | | | P Fe | Sr23 | Umin | |
| r22 | N8 | B2(0) | | | Tap mit| Sr13 | Umax | |
| r23 | N8 | Q | | | Preg | RE3 | Qmin | |
| r24 | N8 | Units | | | | XE3 | Qmax | |
| r25 | N8 | G2(1) | | | |reg.side| Imax | |
| r26 | N8 | G2(0) | | | | Delta U| | |
| r27 | N8 | | | | |Tap min | | |
| r28 | N8 | | | | |Tap max | | |
| r29 | N8 | Ltg_sec| | | |Tap mit | | |
| r30 | N8 | Num_sec| | | |Tap akt | | |
| c8 | C31 |Descr.N1|Descr.N1|Descr.N1|Descr.N1|Descr.N1|Descr.N1|Descr.N1|
| c9 | C31 |Descr.N2|Descr.N2|Descr.N2|Descr.N2|Descr.N2| | |
| c10 | C31 | | | | |Descr.N3| | |
| c11 | C31 |Descr.El|Descr.El|Descr.El|Descr.El|Descr.El|Descr.El|Descr.El|
----------------------------------------------------------------------------

Appendix
Table (continue):
----------------------------------------------------------------------------
|--------------------------------------------------------------------------|
|Name |Type |Synchron|Asynchro|PS-Unit | Series |Filter |Parallel| Series |
|--------------------------------------------------------------------------|
| id | N2 | [52] | [53] | [54] | [6] | [55] | [7] | [56] |
| l1 | L |Switch 1|Switch 1|Switch 1|Switch 1|Switch 1|Switch 1|Switch 1|
| l2 | L |Unit Gen|Conv dri|Turbo ? |Switch 2| |Switch 2| |
| l3 | L | | | | | | | |
| l4 | L | | | | | | | |
| c1 | C8 |No.nam 1|No.nam 1|No.nam 1|No.nam 1|No.nam 1|No.nam 1|No.nam 1|
| c2 | C8 |Turbo |Ml(s) | |No.nam 2| |No.nam 2| |
| c3 | C8 | |Me(s) | | | | | |
| c4 | C8 |Elem.nam|Elem.nam|Elem.nam|Elem.nam|Elem.nam|Elem.nam|Elem.nam|
| c5 | C10 | |I(s) |Vectorgr| | | | |
| c6 | C24 | Type | Type | | | | | |
| c7 | C8 |Freq.dep|Freq.dep|Freq.dep|Freq.dep|Freq.dep|Freq.dep|Freq.dep|
| r1 | N8 | Un | Un | Un1 | Un | Un | Un | Un |
| r2 | N8 | |Start.de| Un2 | | | | |
| r3 | N8 | |P oper. | xd" | | | | |
| r4 | N8 | Ur | Ur | Ur1 | Ur | Ur | Ur | Ur |
| r5 | N8 |Ufmx/Ufr| Mk/Mr | Ur2 | | | | |
| r6 | N8 | | M0 | x(2) | | | | |
| r7 | N8 | Sr | Pr | SrT | | Qr | Sr | |
| r8 | N8 | mue | Number | ukr(1) | L1 | L1 | L1 | L1 |
| r9 | N8 | RE | Ir | ukr(0) | | | | |
| r10 | N8 | XE | M1 | xdsat. | | | p | |
| r11 | N8 | | M2 | uRr(1) | R1 | R1 | R1 | R1 |
| r12 | N8 | |Q oper. | uRr(0) | | | | |
| r13 | N8 | | |Cos(phi)| | | | |
| r14 | N8 | X(0) | J | XE1 | | | | |
| r15 | N8 | RG | sr | RE1 | | f0 | f0 | |
| r16 | N8 | Ikk | ETA | | | G | G | |
| r17 | N8 |cos(phi)|Polepair| | | | | |
| r18 | N8 | xd" |Cos(Phi)| SrG | C1 | C1 | C1 | C1 |
| r19 | N8 | x(2) | Ia/Ir |Ufmx/Ufr| | | | |
| r20 | N8 | xdges. | Ma/Mr | | | | | |
| r21 | N8 | Pmin |t switch| | | | | |
| r22 | N8 | Pmax |cos sta.| | | | | |
| r23 | N8 | Qmin | RM | | | | | |
| r24 | N8 | Qmax | | | | | | |
| r25 | N8 | | | | | | | |
| r26 | N8 | | | | | | | |
| r27 | N8 | | | | | | | |
| r28 | N8 | | | | | | | |
| r29 | N8 | | | | | | | |
| r30 | N8 | | | | | | | |
| c8 | C31 |Descr.N1|Descr.N1|Descr.N1|Descr.N1|Descr.N1|Descr.N1|Descr.N1|
| c9 | C31 | | | |Descr.N2| |Descr.N2| |
| c10 | C31 | | | | | | | |
| c11 | C31 |Descr.El|Descr.El|Descr.El|Descr.El|Descr.El|Descr.El|Descr.El|
----------------------------------------------------------------------------

Appendix
Table (continue):
-------------------------------
|-----------------------------|
|Name |Type |Serie Eq|Shunt Eq|
|-----------------------------|
| id | N2 | [11] | [12] |
| l1 | L |Switch 1|Switch 1|
| l2 | L | | |
| l3 | L |Eq.Type |Eq.Type | Eq.Type: 1: Loadflow 2: Short circuit
| l4 | L | | |
| c1 | C8 |No.nam 1|No.nam 1|
| c2 | C8 |No.nam 2| |
| c3 | C8 | | |
| c4 | C8 |Elem.nam|Elem.nam|
| c5 | C10 | | |
| c6 | C24 | | |
| c7 | C8 | | |
| r1 | N8 | Un1 | Un |
| r2 | N8 | Un2 | |
| r3 | N8 | | |
| r4 | N8 | | |
| r5 | N8 | | |
| r6 | N8 | | |
| r7 | N8 | R12(1) | R(1) |
| r8 | N8 | X12(1) | X(1) |
| r9 | N8 | R21(1) | R(2) |
| r10 | N8 | X21(1) | X(2) |
| r11 | N8 | R12(2) | R(0) |
| r12 | N8 | X12(2) | X(0) |
| r13 | N8 | R21(2) | P gen |
| r14 | N8 | X21(2) | Q gen |
| r15 | N8 | R12(0) | P loa |
| r16 | N8 | X12(0) | Q loa |
| r17 | N8 | R21(0) | |
| r18 | N8 | X21(0) | |
| r19 | N8 | | |
| r20 | N8 | | |
| r21 | N8 | | |
| r22 | N8 | | |
| r23 | N8 | | |
| r24 | N8 | | |
| r25 | N8 | | |
| r26 | N8 | | |
| r27 | N8 | | |
| r28 | N8 | | |
| r29 | N8 | | |
| r30 | N8 | | |
| c8 | C31 |Descr.N1|Descr.N1|
| c9 | C31 |Descr.N2| |
| c10 | C31 | | |
| c11 | C31 |Descr.El|Descr.El|
-------------------------------

Appendix
As seen above a record consists of 42 data fields. Each data field is described by
its name and its type. The following types exist:
N2: Numerical field (integer value)

L: Logical field (T=True, F=False)
C8: Character field
C10: Character field
N8: Numerical field (float value)
The first data field "id" gives the type of element. For example with [1] a line will
be described. The file is an ASCII-file. The description of the data fields are given
in chapter "Element Data Input and Models".
The logical switches are saved in L1, L2 and if necessary in L3:

L: "T" merans: Switch closed (element connected at node 1, 2 or 3)
L: "F" means: Switch open
The load and disconnect switches are also exported/imported. Their identifica-
tions are:
id = 8: disconnect switch (node-node)
id = 9: load switch (node-node)
id = 10: circuit breaker (node-node)
For these elements the logical switches "L3" and "L4" indicate, if the node 1
(starting node) or/and node 2 (ending node) should be reduced during the calcu-
lation. "T" means reduce, "F" means not reduce (see "Disconnect Switch" in
chapter "Element Data Input and Models").
The data fields are the same as for couplings.
The units information for exporting/importing the lines are:

units = 1: Line parameters in OHM/km, F/km, S/km and the length in km
units = 2: Line parameters in OHM/miles, F/miles, S/miles and the length
in miles
units = 3: Line parameters in OHM/1000feet, F/1000feet, S/1000feet and
the length in 1000feet

Appendix
The data of network equivalents are only exported, if the module network reduc-
tion is available.
Line Sections:
Line sections are also included in the EDT-file. The data field "Ltg_sec" gives the
information if the record is for a line or a line section:
0: normal line
1: line section.
For a line consisting of several sections the data field "Num_sec" must contain the
number of sections. For example, if a line consists of 3 sections the data field
"Num_sec" must contain the number 3. The following data fields are not important
for line sections: "l1" to "l3" and "c1" to "c5" and "c7" as well as "r1", "r21" and
"r22". The program will calculate the total length and the parameters of the lines,
which consist of several sections, when reading the EDT-file (import).

Appendix
NDT-File
In the NDT-file the node data (load data) are imported or exported. The File can
be generated and read by MS-Excel. When exporting the file, the user will be
asked about the field seperator to use in the EDT-file. The structure and the
description of the record fields are:
------------------------
| Data field| |
------------------------
|Name |Type | Node |
------------------------
| c1 | C8 |Node name |
| c2 | C2 | LF-Type |
| p | L | HV/LV |
| r1 | N8 | Poper inp|
| r2 | N8 | Qoper inp|
| r3 | N8 | Umin |
| r4 | N8 | Umax |
| r5 | N8 | U |
| r6 | N8 | WU |
| c3 | N8 | El.Name |
| r8 | N8 | Si.factor|
| r9 | N8 | Poper cal|
| r10 | N8 | Qoper cal|
| c4 | C24 | Type |
| p2 | L | Lineload |
| r11 | N8 | Distance |
| r12 | N8 | DU |
| r13 | N8 | xp |
| r14 | N8 | xq |
| r15 | N8 | P0 |
| r16 | N8 | Q0 |
| r17 | N8 | Ureg | Regulated or nominal node voltage
| r18 | L | Switch | Indicates, if the Load is connected (T) or not (F)
| c5 | C31 | Descr.El.|
| r19 | L | No.Info | Indicates, if only the nominal node voltage (T) is
------------------------ read in

Appendix
The same is valid as in the ELD file. The fields c1 and c3 can be 8 or 17 charac-
ters long. The field p indicates, if the numerical values are given for low (kVA, A,
V) or high (MVA, kA, kV) voltage:
p1: "T" means: Input for high voltage.
p1: "F" means: Input for low voltage.
The field c2 "LF-Type" gives the node type:

Type: "SL" means slack node
Type: "PQ" means PQ node
Type: "PV" means PQ node
more types: "PI", "IC", "PC", "SC".
The load type is saved in the field "Type". "Line load" indicates, whether it is a line
load or not:
p2: "T" means: line load.
p2: "F" means: load/generator/feeder/motor.
The distance of the line load in meter from the line starting node is saved into
"Distance". The number of domestic units for the loads and line loads are saved in
"DU".

Appendix
Measurement Data / Load Factor Files

Only text files, whose fields are separated by tabulators, can be read. The fields
may have different lengths. A file can contain any number of records. A record
can be a behaviour of measurement data or a behaviour of a load factor. A record
consists of a header row and of a certain number of data rows. The number of
data rows is fixed for week and month factors (7 and 12). It mustn't be greater
than a maximum value for the other records. The header row must have the
following tabulator-separated entries:
Name Name of profile or name of element to which the
measurement data should be assigned
Type DF = Day factor, WF = Week factor, MF = Month
factor, YF = Year factor, LO = Measurement data of a
load, MD = behaviour of a measurement device
Unit A, kA, kW, MW, %
Number of data rows
description
Day by Hours Characteristic (Day factor)

Maximum number of data rows: 96, unit of values: %
A data row consists of 3 tabulator-separated fields.
Hour 0, 1, 2, ... , 23
Minute 0, 1, 2, ... , 59
Value >= 0
Week by Days Characteristic (Week factor)

Number of data rows: 7, unit of values: %
A data row consists of 1 field.
Value >= 0
Year by Months Characteristic (Month factor)

Number of data rows: 12, unit of values: %
A data row consists of 1 field.
Value >= 0
Long Term by Years Characteristic (Year factor)

Maximum number of data rows: 10, unit of values: %

Appendix
The first data row consists of only 1 field (year). It is not counted. The following
data rows (maximum 10) consist of 2 tabulator-separated fields.
Year Year (4 digits: e.g. 2003)
Value >= 0
Measurement Data (day profile)

Maximum number of data rows: 96, unit of values: %, A, kA, kW or MW
A data row consists of 3 tabulator-separated fields:
Hour 0, 1, 2, ... , 23
Minute 0, 1, 2, ... , 59
Value
Example
File with 2 records (1 year factor, 1 day factor):
YF_LOW_INCREASE YF % 5 Yearfactor: Low increase

1984
1989 1
1995 -0.5
1996 0
2000 0.2
2010 0.24
DF_INDUSTRY DF % 13 Dayfact.: Industry
0 0 50
1 0 48
3 0 49
6 0 54
8 0 92
9 0 96
11 0 100
12 0 98
15 0 92
16 0 92
18 0 83
19 0 80
21 0 70
Harmonic limit file

Limits for harmonic can be entered and stored by Excel. The file name has an
extension *.gre. The file consists of 5 rows, which are separated by semicolon:
Title of the curve

Appendix
1. sub title
2. sub title
h Harmonic
value Current or voltage value in %.
Example
File with 2 curve:
VDEW; odd harmonics; not divisible by 3; h; val;

; ; ;5; 6;
; ; ;7; 5;
; ; ;11; 3.5;
; ; ;13; 3;
; ; ;17; 2;
; ; ;19; 1.5;
; ; ;25; 1.5;
VDEW; odd harmonics; divisible by 3; h; val;
; ; ;3; 5;
; ; ;9; 1.5;
; ; ;15; 0.3;
; ; ;21; 0.2;
; ; ;51; 0.2;

NEPLAN Users Guide Electrical PDF

Transféré par

Informations du document

Titre original

Copyright

Formats disponibles

Partager ce document

Partager ou intégrer le document

Options de partage

Avez-vous trouvé ce document utile ?

Ce contenu est-il inapproprié ?

Droits d'auteur :

Formats disponibles

NEPLAN Users Guide Electrical PDF

Transféré par

Droits d'auteur :

Formats disponibles

NEPLAN

Busarello + Cott + Partner Inc. ABB Utilities Gmbh

Phone: +41 1 914 36 66 +49 621 386 27 86

LOAD FLOW CALCULATION ...................................................................................................69

NEPLAN User's Guide V5 0-3

NEPLAN User's Guide V5 0-4

Left Mouse Button.............................................................................................................41

NEPLAN User's Guide V5 0-5

CURRENT TRANSFORMER ....................................................................................................182

NEPLAN User's Guide V5 0-6

Show Results .......................................................................................................................9

NEPLAN User's Guide V5 0-7

NEPLAN User's Guide V5 0-8

CHECKING THE RELAY SETTINGS ..........................................................................................33

NEPLAN User's Guide V5 0-9

NEPLAN User's Guide V5 0-10

NEPLAN User's Guide V5 0-11

NEPLAN User's Guide V5 1-1

The User Interface

Fig. 1.1 Window features in the user interface

The numbers indicate the following window features:

1-2 NEPLAN User's Guide V5

NEPLAN User's Guide V5 1-3

The Online Help

Fig. 1.2 How to call the Online Help

1-4 NEPLAN User's Guide V5

Fig. 1.3 Data Organization of NEPLAN

Bin: contains executable and control files

NEPLAN User's Guide V5 1-5

The Basic Elements of NEPLAN

To understand the NEPLAN environment, it is essential that certain concepts

Network Feeder Disconnect,

Fig. 1.4 One line diagram with network components

An electrical power system consists of nodes and elements.

1-6 NEPLAN User's Guide V5

The active elements are network feeders, asynchronous machines, synchronous

Modeling of Active Elements

Protection Devices, Current and Voltage Transformers

NEPLAN User's Guide V5 1-7

Zones and Areas

1-8 NEPLAN User's Guide V5

Network feeder Disconnect,

logical switch "open"

Fig. 1.2 Partial networks

NEPLAN User's Guide V5 1-9

Step 1 Create a new project

Fig. 1.5 Create a new project

1-10 NEPLAN User's Guide V5

Fig. 1.6 After creating a new project

NEPLAN User's Guide V5 1-11

Step 2 Enter a small network

Fig. 1.7 Network to be entered in NEPLAN

The necessary parameters are all listed in the following tables.

1-12 NEPLAN User's Guide V5

NEPLAN User's Guide V5 1-13

TRA8 -12 0 0 0 0 impedance 0.1 0 100 impedance 6 0 100

Name J H LF type P oper Q oper ANSI Load M0 M1 M2 M0,1,2 Model

Enter the network

1-14 NEPLAN User's Guide V5

Fig. 1.8 Enter an element

NEPLAN User's Guide V5 1-15

Fig. 1.9 Enter a node

1-16 NEPLAN User's Guide V5